C-550 Lanovia Scanner Engineer's Reference Guide

C-550 Lanovia Scanner
Engineers Reference Guide 6700800003
IMPORTANT
FujifilmT products are so designed and constructed as to be safe and without risk to health when properly used (in accordance with the supplied documentation) and when the safety precautions contained in this document are fully observed.
This document was produced by the Technical Publications Department, FUJIFILM Electronic Imaging Ltd.
1999 FUJIFILM Electronic Imaging Ltd. Fujifilm House Boundary Way Hemel Hempstead Hertfordshire HP2 7RH England
Tel: 01442 213440 Fax: 01442 343432 Registered Number: 3244452
Preliminaries
This document must not be copied without prior written authorization, and although correct at the time of writing is subject to change without notice. For further information contact the Product Information Manager, FUJIFILM Electronic Imaging Ltd, at the address given on the front page of this manual.
(ii) C550 Lanovia Scanner
Preliminaries
WARNING All precautions mentioned in this document must be strictly observed at all times. Personnel MUST therefore read the contents of the document BEFORE commencing any work on the equipment described in the document. Improper use of controls and switches, failure to comply with warnings, and the performance of adjustments or procedures not specified in this document, may expose personnel to danger.
(iii)
Preliminaries
CAUTION The attention of the engineer is particularly drawn to the requirement for ensuring that the site for installation and operation of the C-550 LanoviaT Scanner at the customers premises shall accord in all respects and at all times with the following environmental conditions. Verify the environmental conditions. The temperature in the work area must be within the range 20C to 24C. The humidity shall be within the range 50% to 70% RH (non-condensing), with a rate of change not exceeding 2% per hour. Low humidity causes a build up of static electricity which, if discharged, can cause data errors. High humidity leads to condensation and corrosion problems. Regularly inspect the scanner ventilation fans, to make sure they are working and that their grills have not been accidentally covered. If temperature limits are exceeded, the scanner switches off.
(iv)
C550 Lanovia Scanner
Preliminaries
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to be compliant with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
(v)
Preliminaries
Electromagnetic Compatibility Information - Europe

This product has been found to satisfy the Class A limits for radio interference of information technology equipment. Class A equipment is intended for use in a light industrial or commercial environment for which the 30 metre protection distance is used. Operation of this equipment in a domestic or residential environment may result in interference to other equipment, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. In some countries this equipment may be subject to restrictions on its use. Where applicable the user should inform the relevant local authority that Class A Information Technology Equipment has been taken into service. This equipment may also be susceptible to strong electromagnetic fields and should not be sited close to high power radio transmitters or radar installations. If the intended site of operation is prone to electromagnetic disturbances due to lightning strikes, additional precautions should be taken to protect the equipment from the resulting electromagnetic disturbance. Typical examples for the intended environment of this equipment would include: business premises, for example, offices, banks, etc. retail outlets, for example, shops, supermarkets, etc. light industrial locations, for example, workshops,
service centres, etc.

Locations which are characterised by being supplied directly at low voltage from the public mains are considered to be residential, commercial or light industrial. This equipment conforms to the requirements of EC directives:
73/23/EEC - Low Voltage Directive 89/336/EEC - EMC Directive.
(vi)
Preliminaries
About this Document

The purpose of this Guide is to provide suitably qualified service personnel with sufficient information to maintain a C-550 Lanovia Scanner. This Guide includes details of the system and PCB configurations, field replacements, setup procedures, fault diagnosis, and the routine maintenance procedures. It also gives a comprehensive technical description of the main sub-systems for use by engineers during an approved training course.
Chapter 1 - System Description. Describes the main features of the C-550 Lanovia
Scanner and shows its construction and connections to peripheral equipment.
Chapter 2 - Safety Practices. Explains the Fujifilm recommended safety guidelines,

identifies relevant precautions and interlock strategy, and the antistatic precautions. This chapter must be read before any servicing or replacement procedures are implemented.
Chapter 3 - Functional Description. Provides brief functional descriptions about the

optical system, the electronic systems, and motion control.
Chapter 4 - Field Replacements. Provides recommended procedures for the

replacement of spared modules.
Chapter 5 - Terminal Diagnostics. Describes the terminal diagnostics system for the
C-550 Lanovia Scanner and provides the useful menu commands.
Chapter 6 - Alignments and Calibrations. Describes the test targets, the setup menus,
the carriage alignments, and system calibrations. Before any alignments or calibrations are performed, C-550 Lanovia Scanner must be free of any functional problems.
Chapter 7 - Workstation Diagnostics. Describes the screen menus, the Electronic

Repro test for quality conformance - performed after fault diagnosis, corrections, alignments, and system calibrations - and the identities of the SCSI buffers.
Chapter 8 - Maintenance. Describes the safety interlock checks, cleaning procedures

for the optical components, and the health (confidence) check of the C-550 Lanovia Scanner.
Appendix A - Electrical Reference Data. Shows the locations of the electrical

modules and provides the physical data of the PSU, system board, CCD headboard, digitizer board, lamp driver board, distribution boards and display board.
Appendix B - Fault Diagnosis Describes certain image defects and provides fault
diagnosis tables in support to the customer service engineer.
(vii)
Preliminaries
Associated Documents
C-scan Application Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67008610 C-scan Application Users Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67008600 C-550 Lanovia Scanner with C-scan Users Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67008620 C550 Lanovia Safety Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67008890 C-550 Lanovia Installation Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67008370 Sprint Option Installation Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67009280 Sprint Upgrade Installation Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67009290
Trademarks and Copyright

C-scan and Lanovia are trademarks of FUJIFILM Electronic Imaging Ltd that may be registered in certain jurisdictions. Fuji and Fujifilm are trademarks of Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd that may be registered in certain jurisdictions. Apple, AppleShare, AppleTalk, , System 7, Power Macintosh and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer Inc. that may be registered in certain jurisdictions. Kermit is a trademark of Columbia University that may be registered in certain jurisdictions. Sun, Sun Ultra, Solaris and SunOS are trademarks of Sun Microsystems Inc. that may be registered in certain jurisdictions. All other company names, products or brand names are trademarks of their respective holders.
(viii)
Preliminaries
Contents
Chapter 1 System Description
1.1 Overview of Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 1.1.1 1.1.2 1.1.3 1.2 Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 C-550 Lanovia Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
C-550 Lanovia Scanner Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 1.2.1 1.2.2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mechanical Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Carriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X-slide Carriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lens Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCD Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optical Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reflection Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Light Table Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Platen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mirror Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCD Headboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electrical Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lamp Driver Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lamp Driver Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Carriage Servo Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X-slide Carriage Stepper Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enlargement Stepper Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 1-6 1-6 1-7 1-7 1-7 1-8 1-8 1-8 1-8 1-9 1-9 1-9 1-9 1-10 1-10 1-10 1-10 1-11 1-11 1-11 1-11
1.2.3
1.2.4
(ix)
Preliminaries
1.2.5
1.2.6
Focus Stepper Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FLASH Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sensors and Interlock Control . . . . . . . . . . Image Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCSI Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motion Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Synchronization Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environment Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCD Headboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digitizer Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digitizer Board Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interlocks and Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Datum Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Limit Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-11 1-12 1-12 1-12 1-12 1-12 1-13 1-13 1-13 1-13 1-13 1-14 1-14 1-14 1-14 1-14 1-14 1-15 1-15
1.3
C-550 Lanovia Scanner Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 1.3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Workstation Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Terminal Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
1.4
System Fault Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 1.4.1 1.4.2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Diagnostic Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
1.5
Alignment and Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18 1.5.1 1.5.2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18 Alignment and Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
(x)
Preliminaries
1.6
Workstation Diagnostics and Electronic Repro . . . . . . . . 1-19 1.6.1 1.6.2 Workstation Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19 Electronic Repro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
1.7
Accessory Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 1.7.1 1.7.2 1.7.3 Long Registration Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 Coded Copyholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 A3 Cover Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Chapter 2
Safety Practices
2.1 Health and Safety at Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 2.1.1 2.2 Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Site Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 2.2.1 Safety Signs, Labels, and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.3
General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 2.3.1 2.3.2 Safety Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Unattended Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8
Electrical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Mechanical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Antistatic Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Interlock Strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Lamp Driver Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Chapter 3
Functional Description
3.1 System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 3.1.1 3.1.2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
(xi)
Preliminaries
3.1.3 3.1.4
3.1.5 3.1.6 3.1.7 3.2
Optical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Supply and Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Image Data Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motion Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illumination System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electrical Reference Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fault Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4 3-4 3-4 3-5 3-6 3-6 3-7 3-8 3-8 3-9
System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 3.2.1 3.2.2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line Scan CCD Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed Platen - Moving Camera Scanning . . . . . . Fluorescent Illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable Magnification Optics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Autofocus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X-Slide Carriage Movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Three-Stripe CCD Colour Separation . . . . . . . . . Image Re-alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Graphics and Line-art Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reading Copyholder Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Calibration System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequence of Scanning Operations . . . . . . . . . . . Stabilize Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X-Slide Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enlargement Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Focus Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exposure Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Autofocus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 3-10 3-10 3-11 3-12 3-12 3-12 3-12 3-13 3-13 3-13 3-14 3-14 3-15 3-15 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-17 3-17
3.2.3
(xii)
Preliminaries
Black Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . White Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lamp Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3
3-17 3-17 3-17 3-18
Optical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 3.3.1 3.3.2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . White Balance Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission Illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission White-balance Area . . . . . . . Reflection Illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reflection White-balance Area . . . . . . . . . . Light Table Illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Platen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aqua Strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy Holder Registration Edges . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reflection Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optical Baffles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCD Image Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCD Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCD Clocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 3-21 3-22 3-23 3-24 3-24 3-25 3-25 3-25 3-26 3-27 3-27 3-27 3-28 3-28 3-29 3-29 3-29 3-31
3.3.3
3.3.4 3.3.5 3.3.6
3.4
Electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32 3.4.1 3.4.2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +5 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +24 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +18 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -12 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCD Headboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32 3-33 3-33 3-34 3-34 3-34 3-35
(xiii)
3.4.3
Preliminaries
3.4.4
3.4.5
3.4.6
CCD Clock Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output Buffers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digitizer Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCD Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input Multiplexer and Level Shifter - RGB . . . . Correlated Double Sampling (CDS) . . . . . . . . . . RGB Multiplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analogue-to-Digital Converter (ADC) . . . . . . . . Voltage Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Image Processing (Formatting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Image Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clock Generation and Synchronization . . . . . . . SCSI Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motion Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stepper Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Servo Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lamp Driver Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lamp Driver Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lamp Driver Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input RFI Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Soft Inrush Current Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +5 V and +14 V Regulators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Voltage Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Boost Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Temperature Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Serial DAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Serial ADC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Five Lamp Interlock Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-36 3-37 3-37 3-37 3-38 3-38 3-39 3-39 3-40 3-41 3-41 3-41 3-42 3-43 3-44 3-47 3-49 3-49 3-50 3-50 3-52 3-54 3-55 3-56 3-59 3-59 3-60 3-60 3-60 3-60 3-61 3-61 3-61
(xiv)
Preliminaries
Voltage Controlled Oscillators (VCO) . . . . . . . . Heater Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ballast Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.7 Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enlargement Datum Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Focus Datum Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X-Slide Datum Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Carriage Datum Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Carriage Limit Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.8 Interlocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.9 Display Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.10 Distribution Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LH Distribution Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RH Distribution Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flexicable Distribution Boards Assembly . . . . . 3.5
3-62 3-62 3-63 3-64 3-64 3-64 3-65 3-66 3-67 3-67 3-69 3-69 3-70 3-70 3-71
Motion Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72 3.5.1 Main Carriage Drive Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Carriage Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Forward Limit Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reverse Limit Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Datum Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stepper Motor Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ramping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X-Slide Carriage Drive Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . Enlargement Drive Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . Focus Drive Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72 3-72 3-73 3-73 3-73 3-73 3-73 3-74 3-75 3-76 3-78
3.5.2
3.5.3 3.5.4 3.5.5 3.6
Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-79 3.6.1 3.6.2 3.6.3 3.6.4 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pedestal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-79 3-79 3-80 3-80
(xv)
Preliminaries
3.6.5 3.6.6 3.6.7 3.6.8
Platen Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosure Fan Filter Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-82 3-82 3-83 3-83
Chapter 4
Unit Replacement Procedures

4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 Recommended List of Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Preparation for Replacement Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Replacement Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Lightbar Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 4.4.1 Lightbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lamp Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking, Cleaning and Removing the Diffuser Lamp Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission Lamp Detector Board . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 4-5 4-5 4-6 4-7 4-7 4-8 4-8 4-9 4-9
4.4.2
4.4.3
4.5
Lightbar Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4.6
Reflection Tray and Transmission Column . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4.7
Stand Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
(xvi)
Preliminaries
Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 4.8 Enclosure Fan Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 4.9 RFI Box Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 4.9.1 RFI Box Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dongle for Sprint Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PSU and Cable Loom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RFI Box Cooling Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Power Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 4-17 4-18 4-18 4-19 4-20 4-21 4-21 4-22 4-22 4-24 4-25 4-26 4-27 4-27 4-27 4-28 4-28
4.9.2
4.9.3
4.9.4
4.9.5
4.9.6
4.10 Protective Covers and Gas Struts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30 4.10.1 Lid Gas-Struts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10.2 Lid Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30 4-30 4-31 4-31 4-32 4-32
(xvii)
Preliminaries
4.11 Main Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34 Open Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Close Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11.1 Reflection White-Balance Strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11.2 Main-Cover Gas-Struts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11.3 Main-Cover Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34 4-35 4-35 4-36 4-36 4-37 4-37 4-38 4-38 4-39 4-39
4.12 Moving the Main Carriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41 4.12.1 Workstation Diagnostics Method . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41 4.12.2 Terminal Diagnostics Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42 4.12.3 Mechanical Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43 4.13 Safety Interlocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45 4.13.1 Main Cover Interlocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13.2 Lid Interlocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45 4-45 4-46 4-47 4-47 4-48
4.14 Platen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49 4.15 Reflection Lamps Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51 4.15.1 Reflection Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
(xviii)
Preliminaries
4.15.2 Reflection Lamp Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.15.3 Reflection Lamp Detector Boards . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.15.4 Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-53 4-53 4-53 4-54 4-54 4-54 4-54 4-55 4-55
4.16 Light Table Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.16.1 LT -Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.16.2 LT-Lamp Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58 4-58 4-58 4-59 4-59 4-60 4-60 4-60
4.17 Lamp Driver Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63 4.18 Base and Structure Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64 4.18.1 Flexicable - 50-Way . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.18.2 Flexicable - 62-Way . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.18.3 Flexicable Distribution Boards Assembly . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64 4-64 4-65 4-66 4-67 4-68 4-68 4-69 4-71
(xix)
Preliminaries
4.18.4 Main Carriage Datum Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.18.5 Main Carriage Reverse Limit Sensor . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.18.6 Main Carriage Forward Limit Sensor . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.18.7 Standby Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.18.8 Standby Switch Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.18.9 Display Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.18.10 Display Board Ribbon Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.18.11 LH Distribution Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.18.12 LH Ribbon Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.18.13 RH Distribution Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.18.14 RH Ribbon Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(xx)
4-72 4-73 4-73 4-74 4-74 4-74 4-75 4-76 4-76 4-76 4-76 4-77 4-77 4-78 4-78 4-79 4-79 4-79 4-79 4-79 4-80 4-80 4-81 4-81 4-81 4-82 4-82 4-83 4-83 4-83 4-84 4-84 4-84
Preliminaries
4.18.15 Enclosure Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86 4.19 Main Leadscrew Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87 4.19.1 Leadscrew Nut Clamp Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.19.2 Main Carriage Leadscrew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.19.3 Main Leadscrew Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.19.4 Main Leadscrew Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.19.5 C-Bearing Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.19.6 Fit Front Transit Fixing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.19.7 Remove Front Transit Fixing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.19.8 Main Carriage Wheel Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Two-Wheel Carriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . One-Wheel Carriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87 4-88 4-88 4-89 4-89 4-90 4-91 4-91 4-92 4-93 4-93 4-93 4-94 4-95 4-95 4-96 4-97 4-98 4-98 4-99 4-99 4-100 4-100 4-101
4.20 X-Slide Carriage Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101 4.20.1 Moving the X-Slide Carriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102 4.20.2 Moving the Lens Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102 4.20.3 Moving the CCD Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103
Engineers Reference Guide 6700800003 (xxi)
Preliminaries
4.20.4 X-Slide Carriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.20.5 X-slide Carriage Bearings Assembly . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.20.6 Digitizer Board Cover Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.20.7 Digitizer Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.20.8 Digitizer Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.20.9 Focus Motor Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement/Alignment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . 4.20.10 Focus Motor and Cable Loom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.20.11 Focus Datum Sensor and Cable Loom . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.20.12 Enlargement Datum Sensor and Cable Loom . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.20.13 Enlargement Leadscrew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.20.14 Enlargement Leadscrew Clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(xxii)
4-104 4-105 4-106 4-108 4-108 4-109 4-110 4-110 4-111 4-111 4-112 4-112 4-112 4-113 4-114 4-114 4-114 4-115 4-116 4-116 4-117 4-117 4-118 4-118 4-119 4-119 4-120 4-120 4-121 4-122 4-122 4-122 4-123
Preliminaries
4.20.15 Enlargement Motor and Cable Loom . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.20.16 Cam Follower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-123 4-124 4-124 4-124 4-125 4-125
4.21 X-slide Leadscrew Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127 4.21.1 X-slide Datum Sensor and Cable Loom . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.21.2 X-slide Leadscrew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.21.3 X-slide Leadscrew Motor and Cable Loom . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.21.4 X-slide Leadscrew Clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127 4-127 4-128 4-128 4-129 4-129 4-130 4-131 4-131 4-132 4-132 4-132
Chapter 5
Terminal Diagnostics
5.1 5.2 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 Power-up Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 5.2.1 5.3 Power-on Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Terminal Diagnostics User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 5.3.1 The Terminal Diagnostics Display . . . . . . . . . . . VT100 Emulation Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Access on a Macintosh/PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The VT100 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entering Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 5-5 5-5 5-5 5-6
(xxiii)
Preliminaries
5.3.2
5.3.3
5.3.4 5.4 5.5
Global Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Command Line Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Soak Test Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verbose Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard Monitor Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitor Mode Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Servo Motor Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stepper Motor Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-7 5-9 5-9 5-10 5-11 5-11 5-13 5-15 5-17
Terminal Diagnostic Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 System Board Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 5.5.1 5.5.2 5.5.3 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CPU Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cpu_test Menu Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sys_brd Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCSI_Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . scsi_tests Menu Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DSP_Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . dsp_tests Menu Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sync_Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . sync_tests Menu Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mcb_brd Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mcb_brd Tests Menu Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 5-21 5-22 5-23 5-23 5-24 5-24 5-25 5-26 5-26 5-28 5-28
5.5.4
5.6
Digitizer Board Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29 5.6.1 5.6.2 5.6.3 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digitizing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dig_brd Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Tests Menu Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function Tests Menu Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29 5-29 5-30 5-30 5-31
(xxiv)
Preliminaries
5.7
Lamp Driver Board Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32 5.7.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32 Lamp_brd Tests Menu Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
5.8
Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34 5.8.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34 Utilities Menu Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
5.9
Optics Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36 5.9.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36 Optics Menu Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
5.10 Mechanical Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37 5.10.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mech Menu Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10.2 Service Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Menu Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37 5-38 5-39 5-39
Chapter 6
Alignments and Calibrations

6.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Camera Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Carriage Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-dot SP Calibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2 6.3 6-1 6-1 6-2 6-2
Test Films . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Setup Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 6.3.1 Setup Menu Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6.4
Carriage Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 6.4.1 6.4.2 Carriage Menu Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Carriage Tests Menu Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Light_bar Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
(xxv)
Preliminaries
6.4.3
Lightbar Alignment Target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alignment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diff_Focus Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjustment Procedure for Two-wheel Carriage . Adjustment Procedure for One-wheel Carriage .
6-7 6-8 6-9 6-10 6-11 6-14
6.5
System Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17 Calibrate Menu Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrate Tests Menu Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.2 System Calibration Target Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.3 Main Carriage Datum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.4 X-slide Carriage Datum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.5 Enlargement & Focus Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.6 Start of Scan Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.7 Bad (CCD) Pixel Elimination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.8 All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.9 Registration Bar Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.10 Copyholder Search Enable/Disable . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.1 6-17 6-18 6-19 6-19 6-19 6-20 6-20 6-21 6-21 6-21 6-21 6-22 6-22 6-22 6-23 6-23 6-28
6.6
C-dot SP Calibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29 6.6.1 6.6.2 6.6.3 C-dot Platen Calibration for Sharpness at 36 Lines/mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29 C-dot Platen Calibration for Sharpness at 45 Lines/mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34 Swathe Scanning Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
(xxvi)
Preliminaries
6.7
Saving Calibration Data to a Secure Location . . . . . . . . . 6-41
Chapter 7
Workstation Diagnostics
7.1 7.2 7.3 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Launching the Diagnostics Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Workstation Diagnostics Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 7.3.1 File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save As . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verbose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Temperature Readings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clear Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Window Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Arrange Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scanner 0 - 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rescan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scanner 0 - 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Carriage Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Buffers Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Write Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCSI Buffers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scanner Application System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DRAM Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 7-4 7-4 7-5 7-5 7-5 7-5 7-5 7-5 7-6 7-6 7-7 7-7 7-7 7-8 7-8 7-8 7-10 7-11 7-11 7-11 7-14 7-17 7-17 7-17
(xxvii)
7.3.2 7.3.3
7.3.4
7.3.5
7.3.6
Preliminaries
7.3.7
7.3.8 7.4 7.5 7.6
Boot System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scanner Application System Log . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics FLASH Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics RAM Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scripts Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Statistical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tests Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Tests (Ctrl+T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic Repro (Ctrl+R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Soak Tests (Ctrl+S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrate Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-17 7-18 7-19 7-19 7-19 7-20 7-20 7-21 7-21 7-23 7-24 7-25
Tool Bar Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27 Diagnostic Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28 Electronic Repro Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31 7.6.1 7.6.2 7.6.3 Electronic Repro Test Subjects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31 Positioning the Electronic Repro Test Subject . . 7-33 Electronic Repro Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
7.7
Downloading Firmware to the Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
Chapter 8
Maintenance
8.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 8.1.1 8.2 8.3 Maintenance and Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Safety Interlock Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Cleaning Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 8.3.1 Handling and Cleaning of Optical Components . 8-3 Recommended List of Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 Approved Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
(xxviii)
Preliminaries
8.3.2 8.3.3
8.3.4 8.3.5 8.3.6 8.4
Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visual Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning Processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning Preparations and Completions . . . . . . . Platen Cleaning Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Topside Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Underside Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mirror Cleaning Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lens Cleaning Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCD-Window Cleaning Procedure . . . . . . . . . . .
8-4 8-5 8-6 8-6 8-7 8-8 8-8 8-9 8-9 8-10
Scanner Health (Confidence) Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Appendix
Electrical Reference Data

A.1 Module Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1 A.1.1 A.2 A.3 Flexicable Looms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Power Supply Unit (PSU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7 System Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9 A.3.1 System Board Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PL1 to LH Distribution Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SK1 to RH Distribution Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SK2 to Main Carriage Servo Motor . . . . . . . . . . SK3 to Lamp Driver Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SK4 to Digitizer Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11 A-12 A-13 A-14 A-15 A-17 A-19 A-19 A-19 A-20 A-20
A.3.2 A.3.3 A.3.4 A.3.5 A.3.6 A.4
CCD Headboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-21 A.4.1 CCD Headboard Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-22

(xxix)
Preliminaries
SK1 to Digitizer Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-22 A.5 Digitizer Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-24 A.5.1 Digitizer Board Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PL1 to Enlargement Datum Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . PL2 to Enlargement Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PL3 to Focus Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PL4 to Digitizer Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25 A-25 A-26 A-26 A-27 A-27
A.5.2 A.6
Lamp Driver Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-28 A.6.1 Lamp Driver Board Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . PL1 to Reflection Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PL2 to Transmission Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PL3 to Light Table Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SK1 to Lamp Detector Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lamp Detector Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lamp Detector Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-29 A-29 A-30 A-31 A-32 A-33 A-33 A-34 A-34 A-34
A.6.2 A.6.3 A.6.4 A.6.5
A.7
RH Distribution Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-35 A.7.1 RH Distribution Board Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . PL3 to Main Carriage Datum Sensor . . . . . . . . . PL4 to Main Carriage Reverse Limit Sensor . . . PL5 to Main Cover - RH Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . PL6 to Lid Interlocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-35 A-36 A-36 A-37 A-37
A.8
LH Distribution Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-38 A.8.1 LH Distribution Board Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . PL1 to Enclosure Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PL2 to Display Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PL3 to Main Cover - LH Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . A-38 A-39 A-39 A-40
(xxx)
Preliminaries
PL4 to Main Carriage Forward Limit Sensor . . . A-40 A.9 Flexicable Distribution Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-41 A.9.1 Flexicable Distribution Boards Connectors . . . . PL4 to X-slide Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PL5 to Lightbar Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PL6 to X-slide Datum Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PL7 to Focus Datum Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-42 A-42 A-43 A-43 A-44
A.10 Display Board Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-44
Appendix
Fault Diagnosis
B.1 Image Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1 B.1.1 B.1.2 B.1.3 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lack of Sharpness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Streaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Light Streaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deep Streaks in Shadows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distortion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Skew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compression or Stretching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tonal Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Subtle Colour Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Patterning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cropping Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Graininess . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analogue Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lack of Smoothness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1 B-2 B-2 B-3 B-3 B-3 B-4 B-4 B-5 B-5 B-6 B-6 B-7 B-7 B-7
B.1.4
B.1.5 B.1.6 B.1.7 B.1.8 B.1.9
B.2
Troubleshooting Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9 B.2.1 B.2.2 B.2.3 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9 Symptom Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9 Loss of Power Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10
(xxxi)
Preliminaries
B.2.4 B.2.5 B.2.6 B.2.7
POST Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Image Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Test Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-11 B-12 B-21 B-24
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index-1
Figures
Figure 1.1 C-550 Lanovia Scanner system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Figure 1.2 C-550 Lanovia Scanner construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Figure 1.3 Electrical module locations within the scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Figure 2.1 Figure 2.2 Figure 2.3 Figure 2.4 Figure 2.5 Warning label inside RFI box and on lamp-driver module . . . . . . . . . Serial rating label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warning label in front of enclosure fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Caution labels under main cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Servo motor encoder labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 2-3 2-4 2-4 2-7 3-2 3-11 3-20 3-21 3-23 3-24 3-27 3-28 3-30 3-32 3-36 3-40 3-42 3-44
Figure 3.1 Overview of system blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3.2 Transmission scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3.3 Transmission and reflection scan illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3.4 Mirror, lens mount and CCD mount (camera sub-assembly) . . . . . . . Figure 3.5 Transmission illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3.6 Reflection illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3.7 Transmission format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3.8 Reflection format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3.9 CCD image sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3.10 Electrical module locations within the scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3.11 CCD headboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3.12 Digitizer 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3.13 Digitizer 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3.14 System board block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(xxxii)
Preliminaries
Figure 3.15 Figure 3.16 Figure 3.17 Figure 3.18 Figure 3.19 Figure 3.20 Figure 3.21 Figure 3.22 Figure 3.23 Figure 3.24 Figure 3.25 Figure 3.26 Figure 3.27 Figure 3.28 Figure 3.29 Figure 3.30 Figure 3.31 Figure 3.32 Figure 3.33 Figure 3.34 Figure 3.35
Scanner image-data flow original system board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scanner image-data flow Kicker system board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A stepper motor electronic block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Servo motor electronic blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lamp driver module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lamp driver block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lamp driver switched-mode PSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lamp driver system board interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission lamp driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reflection lamps driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Light table lamps driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flexicable sensor interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ribbon cable sensor interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interlock system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flexicable distribution boards assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X-Slide leadscrew backlash nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Schematic of X-slide carriage interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enlargement drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Focus drive mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-550 Lanovia scanner structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Base and platen support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-46 3-47 3-51 3-53 3-55 3-56 3-57 3-58 3-59 3-63 3-64 3-65 3-66 3-68 3-71 3-75 3-76 3-77 3-78 3-79 3-81 4-3 4-5 4-6 4-8 4-10 4-12 4-15 4-16 4-17 4-18 4-21 4-23 4-24 4-26
Figure 4.1 Service tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.2 Lightbar assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.3 Transmission lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.4 Transmission lamp detector board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.5 Lightbar interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.6 Reflection Tray and Transmission Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.7 Stand covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.8 Enclosure fan filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.9 RFI box - removing cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.10 System board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.11 Removing and fitting the dongle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.12 WA 304 PSU and cable loom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.13 Sirius 250 PSU and cable loom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.14 RFI-box cooling fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(xxxiii)
Preliminaries
Figure 4.15 Figure 4.16 Figure 4.17 Figure 4.18 Figure 4.19 Figure 4.20 Figure 4.21 Figure 4.22 Figure 4.23 Figure 4.24 Figure 4.25 Figure 4.26 Figure 4.27 Figure 4.28 Figure 4.29 Figure 4.30 Figure 4.31 Figure 4.32 Figure 4.33 Figure 4.34 Figure 4.35 Figure 4.36 Figure 4.37 Figure 4.38 Figure 4.39 Figure 4.40 Figure 4.41 Figure 4.42 Figure 4.43 Figure 4.44 Figure 4.45 Figure 4.46 Figure 4.47 Figure 4.48 Figure 4.49 Figure 4.50
(xxxiv)
Mains power switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lid gas-struts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lid assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening the main cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reflection white-balance strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main-cover gas-struts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main cover removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Workstation diagnostics display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Carriage positions menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mech - service menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving the main carriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main cover interlocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lid interlocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Platen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reflection lamps assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reflection lamp replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Light table assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT lamps removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lamp driver module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flexicables: 50-way and 62-way . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flexicable distribution boards assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main carriage datum and reverse limit sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main carriage left-end limit sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standby power switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LH distribution board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RH distribution board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosure fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Leadscrew nut clamp plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main carriage leadscrew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main leadscrew motor and coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-bearing assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-bearing alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main carriage wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main carriage wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-28 4-30 4-32 4-34 4-35 4-37 4-39 4-41 4-42 4-43 4-43 4-45 4-47 4-49 4-51 4-52 4-55 4-57 4-59 4-61 4-65 4-69 4-73 4-75 4-77 4-80 4-81 4-83 4-85 4-87 4-89 4-92 4-94 4-96 4-98 4-100
Preliminaries
Figure 4.51 Figure 4.52 Figure 4.53 Figure 4.54 Figure 4.55 Figure 4.56 Figure 4.57 Figure 4.58 Figure 4.59 Figure 4.60 Figure 4.61 Figure 4.62 Figure 4.63 Figure 4.64 Figure 4.65 Figure 4.66 Figure 4.67 Figure 4.68 Figure 4.69 Figure 4.70 Figure 5.1 Figure 5.2 Figure 5.3 Figure 5.4 Figure 5.5 Figure 5.6 Figure 5.7 Figure 6.1 Figure 6.2 Figure 6.3 Figure 6.4 Figure 6.5 Figure 6.6 Figure 6.7 Figure 6.8
Moving the X-slide carriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving the lens mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving the CCD mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X-slide leadscrew nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X-slide bearing alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X-slide carriage bearing on guide bar assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X-slide guide bar alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digitizer board cover plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digitizer fan removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digitizer board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Focus motor rack alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Focus motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Focus datum sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCD baffle and enlargement sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enlargement leadscrew and clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enlargement motor and cable loom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cam follower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X-slide datum sensor and cable loom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X-slide leadscrew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X-slide leadscrew motor and cable loom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Menu Map for the scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power-up and software access diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal diagnostics opening screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Elec/menu tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal view of the mtr_sens display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal view of the lmp_sens display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal view of the sys_sens display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engineers Calibration Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lightbar alignment target, 75524070 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alignment target fitted to the lightbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of interface plate adjustment screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engineers Calibration Chart on platen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Differential focus bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjusting screw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placement of Engineers Calibration Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-102 4-103 4-104 4-104 4-106 4-108 4-109 4-110 4-111 4-113 4-115 4-116 4-118 4-119 4-121 4-123 4-125 4-127 4-129 4-130 5-2 5-3 5-6 5-20 5-34 5-35 5-35 6-3 6-7 6-8 6-9 6-11 6-13 6-15 6-20
(xxxv)
Preliminaries
Figure 6.9 Registration bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6.10 Fitting registration bars to platen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6.11 C-dot scanner calibration target on platen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6.12 Swathe scanning calibration target on platen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6.13 Swathe scanning calibration target on platen showing cross-hairs . .
6-23 6-24 6-30 6-35 6-39
Figure 7.1 Electronic Repro Transparency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32 Figure 7.2 Engineers Calibration Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32 Figure 7.3 Electronic repro image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37 Figure 8.1 Optical components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Figure A.1 Electrical module locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure A.2 Arrangement of flexicables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure A.3 Main system interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure A.4 Distribution board interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure A.5 Lamp driver board interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure A.6 PSU Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure A.7 System board layout: pre-Kicker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure A.8 Kicker System board layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure A.9 CCD headboard layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure A.10 Digitizer board layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure A.11 Lamp driver board layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure A.12 Lamp detector board layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure A.13 RH distribution board layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure A.14 LH distribution board layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure A.15 Flexicable distribution boards layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure A.16 LED display board layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure B.1 Figure B.2 Figure B.3 Figure B.4 Figure B.5 Figure B.6 Figure B.7 Lack of sharpness example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example of a light streak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example of distortion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tonal problem example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example of patterning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example of a cropping error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example of graininess . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2 A-3 A-4 A-5 A-6 A-7 A-9 A-10 A-21 A-24 A-28 A-34 A-35 A-38 A-41 A-44 B-2 B-3 B-4 B-5 B-6 B-7 B-8
(xxxvi)
Preliminaries
Tables
Table 3.1 Enlargement resolutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77 Table 5.1 Flashing fault-lamp modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5.2 Global commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5.3 Standard monitor commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5.4 Servo motor test commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5.5 Stepper motor test commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5.6 Display logs menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5.7 CPU_test menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5.8 Sys_brd tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5.9 SCSI_tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5.10 dsp_tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5.11 Sync_tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5.12 mcb_brd tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5.13 Dig_brd tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5.14 Basic tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5.15 Function tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5.16 lamp_brd utilities and tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5.17 Utils menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5.18 Optics tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5.19 Mechanical tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5.20 Service tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 5-8 5-12 5-13 5-15 5-18 5-22 5-23 5-24 5-25 5-27 5-28 5-30 5-30 5-31 5-33 5-34 5-36 5-38 5-39
Table 6.1 Setup Menu Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Table 6.2 Carriage tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Table 6.3 Calibrate tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18 Table 7.1 SCSI Buffer identities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18 Table A.1 Table A.2 Table A.3 Table A.4 Table A.5 Table A.6 PSU AC-connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PSU DC-connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System board connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System board to LH distribution board connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System board to RH distribution board connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System board to main carriage servo motor connections . . . . . . . . . . . A-7 A-8 A-11 A-12 A-13 A-14
(xxxvii)
Preliminaries
Table A.7 System board to traverse distribution board to lamp driver board connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.8 System board to traverse distribution board to digitizer board connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.9 Fuses on system board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.10 Switches on system board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.11 LEDs on system board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.12 Relays on system board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.13 Links on system board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.14 CCD headboard to digitizer board connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.15 Digitizer board connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.16 Enlargement datum sensor connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.17 Enlargement motor connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.18 Focus motor connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.19 Digitizer fan connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.20 Digitizer board test points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.21 Lamp driver board connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.22 Reflection lamps connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.23 Transmission lamp connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.24 Light table lamps connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.25 Lamp detector board connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.26 Test points on lamp driver board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.27 LEDs on lamp driver board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.28 LEDs on lamp driver board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.29 Lamp detector connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.30 RH distribution board connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.31 Main carriage datum sensor connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.32 Main carriage reverse limit sensor connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.33 Main cover RH interlock connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.34 Lid interlock connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.35 LH distribution board connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.36 Enclosure fan connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.37 Display board connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.38 Main cover LH interlock connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.39 Main carriage forward limit sensor connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.40 Connectors on Traverse and X-slide distribution boards . . . . . . . . . .
A-15 A-17 A-19 A-19 A-19 A-20 A-20 A-22 A-25 A-25 A-26 A-26 A-27 A-27 A-29 A-29 A-30 A-31 A-32 A-33 A-33 A-34 A-34 A-35 A-36 A-36 A-37 A-37 A-38 A-39 A-39 A-40 A-40 A-42
(xxxviii)
Preliminaries
Table A.41 Table A.42 Table A.43 Table A.44 Table B.1 Table B.2 Table B.3 Table B.4 Table B.5
X-Slide motor connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lightbar interlock connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X-slide datum sensor connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Focus datum sensor connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loss of power faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . POST failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Image Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic test numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-42 A-43 A-43 A-44 B-10 B-11 B-12 B-21 B-24
(xxxix)
Preliminaries
Issue Records
Chap Prelim 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 App A App B Index Pages 40 22 8 84 132 40 44 48 12 44 28 8 Issue 02 02 02 03 03 02 02 02 02 03 02 02 Date 06/99 06/99 06/99 11/99 11/99 06/99 06/99 06/99 06/99 11/99 06/99 06/99 Comments/Changes Third issue Changes to Accessories Kit section Minor technical change New section on reading copymount details. Also revised for new system board and power supply Changes in replacement procedures for transmission lightbar, the main carriage leadscrew + bearings, system board / dongle and power supply. Also other minor changes. New procedure for moving stepper motor and changes to diagnosic commands Revised for differential focus adjustment, register bar calibration, C-dot calibrations and other changes Change to Electronic Repro procedure and other changes Non-technical change Changes for new system board and PSU Non-technical changes only Third issue
Note:
The ISSUE STATE of a document or chapter is indicated by the last two digits of its document number (e.g. the first re-issue of document 6500123000 becomes 6500123001 , and the second re-issue becomes 6500123002 etc.). A change of issue state indicates that substantial changes have been made to the document or chapter, although this does not necessarily mean that the contents of each page have changed.
(xl)
1 System Description
This chapter provides a general overview of the C-550 Lanovia Scanner and describes its major features.
1.1
Overview of Features
The C-550 Lanovia Scanner is a versatile A3-format scanning system. The two major components are:
a Macintosh workstation, the scanner.

Figure 1.1 shows the typical C-550 Lanovia Scanner system.
WORKSTATION
C-550 LANOVIA SCANNER
Figure 1.1 C-550 Lanovia Scanner system
The C-550 Lanovia Scanner is a floor-standing unit designed and styled to fit in a desktop publishing environment.
1-1
System Description
The C-550 Lanovia Scanner will scan transmission and reflection originals up to a maximum size of 470 mm x 350 mm. The flush platen allows oversize originals to be scanned. The C-550 Lanovia Scanner will scan copy objects up to 4 mm thick, without removing the lightbar assembly (transmission-light source). For thicker copy or 3D objects, the lightbar assembly must be removed.
1.1.1
Workstation
The function of the workstation is to control the scanner, provide workflow management and job setup tools, perform colour corrections and image sharpening processes on scanned images, and also report the status of the scanner. The workstation is also used to operate the diagnostic software, the system setup, the alignment and calibration software, and the electronic repro software. The workstation is connected to the C-550 Lanovia Scanner by a single-ended SCSI cable.
1.1.2

The C-550 Lanovia system is an A3-size flatbed input scanner which supports a variety of scan techniques:
transmission copy, reflection copy, line-art, 3D objects, oversized originals.

Images are captured by a CCD image sensor, digitized, and then stored as image files.
1-2
System Description
The scanner has a horizontal fixed-glass platen. Scanning is performed by moving the camera head sub-assembly under the platen. Illumination for transmission copy is from a lightbar, mounted above the platen, which moves in unison with the mirror and the camera. The scanner will scan both reflection and transmission copy in sizes from 35 mm to A3. Copy may be mounted directly on to the platen or on special copy holders. The scanner provides an RS232 interface port for terminal diagnostics by way of a VT100 type terminal. The scanner has four casters. It also has two adjustable feet to raise the base and so fix its position. The scanner is provided with an extensive suite of diagnostics which are available to both the customer and the field service engineer. However, the customer does not have access to the terminal diagnostics facility.
1.1.3
Modules
The design of the C-550 Lanovia Scanner allows the equipment to be built and serviced in modular form. Modules are available as field replaceable units (FRUs). The diagnostics test the functionality of the modules with a pass or fail status. The major physical modules are summarized in Figure 1.2. The electrical/electronic modules are summarized in Figure 1.3.
1-3
System Description
LIGHTBAR ASSEMBLY MAIN CARRIAGE DRIVE LAMP DRIVER MODULE REFLECTION LAMPS MIRROR
PLATEN
LIGHT TABLE
CAMERA HEAD
ENLARGEMENT DRIVE STEPPER MOTORS
MAIN LEADSCREW MAIN CARRIAGE
FOCUS DRIVE X-SLIDE LEADSCREW LENS BASE AND STRUCTURE
X-SLIDE CARRIAGE
Figure 1.2 C-550 Lanovia Scanner construction
1-4
System Description
DIGITIZER BOARD CCD HEADBOARD LAMP DRIVER BOARD RH DISTRIBUTION BOARD DISPLAY BOARD LH DISTRIBUTION BOARD LAMP DETECTOR BOARDS RFI BOX REFER TO Figure 3.29 FOR FLEXICABLES PSU MAIN SWITCH STANDBY SWITCH SYSTEM BOARD
VIEWED FROM FRONT
Figure 1.3 Electrical module locations within the scanner
1-5
System Description
1.2
C-550 Lanovia Scanner Modules

1.2.1 Introduction
The scanner has several aspects of operation which influence its modular construction:
Mechanical, Optical, Electrical, Electronics, Interlocks and Sensors.
1.2.2
Mechanical Modules
The mechanics involve the hardware modules which control the movements and positioning of the scanning components. The structure module provides the base for the main carriage, the platen supports and the positive pressure cooling fan. At the back of the pedestal, the RFI box houses the PSU and system control electronics. The main carriage supports the X-slide carriage, the light table, and the Reflection column. The X-slide carriage supports the the camera-head assembly. This consists of the lens, the CCD mount and drive mechanisms to enable accurate positioning.
Main Carriage
The main carriage moves in the slow scan direction. The forward direction is from right-to-left and the reverse direction is from left-to-right.
1-6
System Description
The datum and park positions of the main carriage are at the right-hand end of the scanner. The main carriage provides support for the X-slide drive mechanism.
X-slide Carriage
The X-slide carriage provides the platform for the lens mount, the CCD-mount, and the stepper motors which position the camera for focussing and enlargement of the received image. The X-slide carriage supports the camera-head slide and trays. This carriage is moved to bring the centre line of the camera into alignment with the copy positioned on the platen.
Lens Mount
This mount supports the lens which can be moved along the camera-head slide in a variable relation to the CCD mount. The lens mount is fixed to the enlargement leadscrew assembly which mechanically moves the mount along the camera-head slide. The lens is positioned by its own stepper motor in relationship with the CCD mount. The enlargement datum sensor is situated under the camera head and it references the distance to the lens mount.
CCD Mount
The CCD mount supports the CCD headboard, the digitizer board, two stepper motors, and the digitizer fan. The CCD mount is moved by the focus motor pinion along a fixed rack relative to the X-slide carriage. A focus-datum sensor is situated behind the enlargement motor and it references the position of the CCD mount.
1-7
System Description
1.2.3
Optical Components
The optical components include:
Illumination system (fluorescent lamps), Image forming system (mirror and lens), Three-stripe CCD image sensor.
Illumination
Three sources of light are provided. They are as follows:
Transmission lightbar, Reflection lamps, Light table.
Transmission Lamp
The lightbar source provides variable illumination for transmission scanning. Transmission scanning uses a light source that is above the platen. Transmission light passes through the original which is placed on the platen.
Reflection Lamps
The reflection lamps provide variable illumination for reflection scanning. Reflection scanning uses the illumination provided under the platen. Reflection light reflects off the original placed on the platen.
1-8
System Description
Light Table Lamps

The light table source provides fixed illumination to the underside of a diffused sheet having grid lines. These grid lines have been provided to assist the user in mounting an original. The light table uses a front and a rear lamp to illuminate the underside of transparencies. The diffuser sheet provides uniform illumination over the whole area of the platen.
Platen
The glass platen supports originals, whether they are 2-dimensional or 3-dimensional objects. A portion of the platen is used for Transmission white-balance referencing. This area may be also used for reflection scanning but not transmission scanning.
Mirror Mount
The fixed mirror is mounted on the main carriage at 45_ to the platen face. The mounted mirror travels with the main carriage. The mirrored image is reflected to the lens of the camera.
Lens
The lens is mounted on the lens mount and is moved by the enlargement drive-mechanism. Together the mirror and lens form an image of the copy, received through the platen, on the CCD array. The relative positions of the copy, the lens, and the CCD array are controlled by the enlargement and focussing drive-mechanisms. The lens mount is a part of the X-slide carriage assembly.
1-9
System Description
CCD Headboard
The camera uses a tri-linear CCD sensor array. One line is used to detect the red spectral region. Another is used to detect the blue and the third to detect the green. The CCD assembly is mounted on the CCD headboard which sits in front of the digitizer board. Both boards are housed in a metal enclosure which also supports a cooling fan.
1.2.4
Electrical Modules
A single PSU provides all of the required DC voltages for the whole scanner system.
Power Supplies
The power supply voltages produced are listed as follows:
+5 V Logic for system and digitizer boards, +24 V Power for the motors, fans and lamps, +18 V For the CCD and digitizer analogue circuits, -12 V For the CCD and digitizer analogue circuits.
Lamp Driver Module

The lamp driver module is located at the rear of the light table. It receives its +24 V supply from the system board by way of the flexicable distribution system. Power to all five fluorescent lamps is delivered from the lamp-driver module.
1-10
System Description
Lamp Driver Control

The light-table lamps have a fixed intensity level, whereas the transmission and reflection lamps have dimmer and detection controls. The transmission and reflection lamps have opto-sensors to measure the presence and intensity of light.
Main Carriage Servo Motor

The DC-servo motor encoder drives the leadscrew which traverses the main carriage. The encoder output is 2,000 clock pulses per rotation. With such accuracy the main carriage can be positioned in steps of 1 micron.
X-slide Carriage Stepper Motor

The X-slide stepper-motor drives the leadscrew which traverses the X-slide carriage. One rotation of the pinion is completed in 400 half-steps. One step (running in half-step mode) moves the carriage by 10 microns.
Enlargement Stepper Motor

The enlargement stepper-motor drives the leadscrew which traverses the lens mount along the camera slide. One rotation of the pinion is completed in 400 half-steps. One step (running in half-step mode) moves the lens mount by 10 microns.
Focus Stepper Motor

The focus stepper-motor uses a rack and pinion drive to traverse the CCD mount along the camera slide. One rotation of the pinion is completed in 800 quarter-steps. One step (running in quarter-step mode) moves the CCD mount by 15.707 microns.
1-11
System Description
Fans
There are three cooling fans. They are used as follows:
The enclosure fan is internally located at the left-hand end of

the base and structure assembly. If the safety interlocks are activated, then the fan is disabled.
The RFI box fan is located at the rear of the scanner. The digitizer fan is located on the backplate of the digitizer
module.
1.2.5
Electronic Components
The electronics involve the hardware on the printed circuit boards and the interfacing control which synchronize the mechanics and optics to produce the required imaging output.
System Board
The system board is the central control board of the scanner and has the functional blocks described below. It also provides the plug for the connection of the dongle which enables Sprint funtionality.
System Controller
This system controller manages all operating functions and communication links with all of the other control blocks.
FLASH Memory
The system controller uses FLASH memory. The FLASH memory is divided into the following sections:
Application software,
1-12
System Description
Diagnostic software, System profile data from the calibration tests.

The contents of the FLASH memory can be changed by the system controller by downloading new data from the workstation.
Sensors and Interlock Control

The system board contains the circuits for the scanner interlock system.
Image Processor
The image processor performs the image processing functions, using a Digital Signal Processor (DSP).
SCSI Controller
The SCSI controller controls the SCSI communications link with the workstation.
Motion Control
The system board contains the motion circuits that control the servo motor and the three stepper motors. The three stepper-motor drives are identical except for their resolution, which is quarter or half-step. They drive the X-slide carriage leadscrew, the focus rack, and the enlargement leadscrew.
Synchronization Control
Synchronization ensures that lines of the image data are captured at the correct position in the scan.
1-13
System Description
Environment Monitoring
The system board contains circuits that perform voltage monitoring and temperature sensing.
CCD Headboard
The CCD headboard buffers the CCD clock signals. It also connects the signal outputs to the digitizer board.
Digitizer Board
The digitizer board is part of the camera head and it provides the front-end analogue electronics for the CCD array.
Digitizer Board Monitoring

The digitizer board contains circuits that perform voltage monitoring and temperature sensing.
Display Board
The display board has three LEDs to indicate status conditions. The three display LEDs are used as follows:
Status reporting while in boot mode, Scanner operating states, Power.
1.2.6
Interlocks and Sensors

Interlocks and sensors are used to:
1-14
System Description
provide safety switching of motor driven mechanisms, lamps

and the fan when the lid or main cover is opened,
provide datum and limit sensing of the moving carriages.

The transmission lightbar has a switch interlock to indicate the presence of the lightbar. This interlock activates the lid interlocks. The magnetic lid interlocks prevent the operation of the main carriage drive when the lid is opened and the lightbar is present. The magnetic main cover interlocks prevent the operation of all mechanical parts, the enclosure fan and fluorescent lamps whenever the main cover is opened.
Datum Sensors
The main carriage, X-slide carriage, lens mount, and CCD mount each have a datum sensor to initialize the carriage positions when the scanner is booted up.
Limit Sensors
The main carriage has limit sensors to cut the supply of power to its servo motor under fault conditions.
1-15
System Description
1.3
C-550 Lanovia Scanner Diagnostics

1.3.1 Introduction
There are two levels of diagnostics. They are the workstation diagnostics and the terminal diagnostics.
The workstation diagnostics are used by both the customer and the field-service engineer. Communication between the workstation and the scanner is via the single-ended SCSI link. Note: Using this method, it is only possible to run a subset of the terminal diagnostics. For access to the full set, refer to the terminal diagnostics section. The workstation diagnostics can perform most of the available tests and it can use its SCSI buffers to either upload existing program code from the system board or download new code to a remote facility.
The terminal diagnostics program is only available to the field service engineer. With a RS232 cable fitted, the scanner can run its own diagnostic routines using either a remote terminal or a terminal-emulation program that runs on a Macintosh or PC. The terminal diagnostics program can run the complete range of tests. Chapter 5 covers the use of the terminal-diagnostic routines. Chapter 6 covers the use of the alignment and calibration routines via the Setup menu of the diagnostics program. Chapter 7 covers the workstation-diagnostics menus and access paths.
1-16
System Description
1.4
System Fault Diagnosis

1.4.1 Introduction
System faults are broadly categorized into four levels (See Appendix B).
Non-active scanners in which the power supply - or the

system processor - has completely failed.
Power-up Self Test (POST) failures which are discovered by

the boot routines.
Error message reporting at the workstation. Image defects which affect the quality of the scan even
though the scanner passes all of the diagnostic tests.
1.4.2
Diagnostic Tests
Diagnostic tests are provided to test most of the field replacement units (FRUs). A systematic approach to diagnostics is as follows:
If the scanner develops a fault, run the diagnostic tests. The diagnostic tests will detect many of the electrical, optical,
and mechanical problems and so help to identify the relevant unit that is associated with the failure. Always investigate the first test to fail.
If the diagnostic tests all pass, then it is probably an optical or

a mechanical problem. Refer to Appendix B for fault diagnosis guidelines.
Special care must be exercised to maintain the cleanliness

standards of all the optical components.
Within the scanning application that operates on the

workstation, error messages are raised when a problem with the scanner is detected.
1-17
System Description
1.5
Alignment and Calibration

1.5.1 Introduction
The alignment and calibration procedures are only run after a successful pass of the diagnostic tests. These procedures are first run at the factory after the scanner has been built. They are then run when either an important FRU has to be replaced with a new unit and after scan failures have been reported. The alignment and calibration procedures provide valuable feedback for making the required mechanical adjustments. The calibration procedures measure the various characteristics of the scanner for producing a system profile. This system profile is then used during each scan operation. When certain units have to be replaced with new units, it is necessary to run some, or all, of the alignment and calibration procedures to rebuild the system profile. The camera-head assembly which is mounted on the X-slide carriage is pre-aligned in a special test rig at the factory.
1.5.2
Alignment and Calibration

When certain modules have been replaced, it is necessary to use the appropriate software to set up the various alignments and calibrations which ensure the scanner system operates correctly. The calibration task assists a user to measure any inaccuracies in the scanner system operation, so that a characterization profile can be used to alter the raw data that is stored in FLASH memory. However, the service engineer may need to perform setup procedures using the workstation diagnostics software.
1-18
System Description
1.6
Workstation Diagnostics and Electronic Repro

1.6.1 Workstation Diagnostics
Workstation diagnostics are completed across the SCSI link. The purpose is to perform a selection of the diagnostic tests that are available on the scanner.
1.6.2
Electronic Repro
The purpose of electronic repro test is to check that the scanner can produce images of the required quality. Electronic repro consists of a series of software tests performed on a scanned test image. The tests are able to identify subtle image quality faults, such as jitter on sharp edges, noise, or flare, which cannot be detected using other diagnostics. See Section 7.6 for more information.
1-19
System Description
1.7
Accessory Kit
The accessory kit comprises the following:
a long registration bar, a selection of coded copyholders, an A3 cover glass.
1.7.1
Long Registration Bar

The two registration bars fit into the registration holes on the platen surround. The short bar (supplied as basic equipment) fits on the right-hand edge of the platen and the long bar fits along the rear edge of the platen. The two bars provide a 90_ corner into which the copyholders can be located.
1.7.2
Coded Copyholders
Coded copyholders enable automatic image cropping of transparencies. They have a series of holes moulded along the edges of the holder. When the scanner lid is closed a platen scan is performed and the orientation, location and size of any holders present is detected. As with the earlier copymounts, the copyholders allow transparencies to be mounted off-line and the holders can be placed quickly on the platen without the need for accurate positioning. A range of copyholder sizes provide an opaque surround suitable for common transparency sizes. This eliminates the need for masking the platen.
1-20
System Description
1.7.3
A3 Cover Glass
The cover glass is used to hold flat transmission originals. The glass has an anti-Newton ring coating.
1-21
System Description
1-22
2 Safety Practices
This chapter explains the Fujifilm recommended safety guidelines for completing any approved form of maintenance or modification to the C-550 Lanovia Scanner, its interlock strategy, and its antistatic precautions. This chapter must be read before any work is performed.
2.1
Health and Safety at Work

All personnel are advised to familiarize themselves with any local or national legislation relating to health and safety at work. Particular attention should be given to those sections covering personal responsibility regarding safe working practices which must be strictly observed at all times. This chapter explains the safety conventions used in this manual and highlights safety practices specific to this equipment. It also covers the interlocking systems to protect the scanner, the user, and the service engineer from any harm due to normal, or foreseeable abnormal circumstances.
2.1.1
Warnings and Cautions

There are two safety categories:
WARNINGS are given for conditions which may endanger

life.
CAUTIONS are given for conditions which may cause

damage to equipment or materials.
2-1
Safety Practices
2.2
Site Safety
Most accidents can be avoided if you follow these simple rules.
Familiarize yourself with the location of the main and

standby switches on the scanner and all equipment on/off switches.
Always obey the warnings, cautions, and any other

instructions included in this guide, and in other associated equipment manuals.
Never attempt to perform procedures that are not included in

this guide.
Always perform the replacement procedures as recommended

in this guide.
2.2.1
Safety Signs, Labels, and Indicators

Safety labels are fitted to the equipment to warn you of potential hazards. These labels must not be defaced or removed. Typical warning labels, for the C-550 Lanovia Scanner, are shown in Figure 2.1, Figure 2.2, Figure 2.3, and Figure 2.4.
Attention! high tension
Vorsicht! Hochspannung Precaution! haute tension Precaucion! alta tension
Figure 2.1 Warning label inside RFI box and on lamp-driver module
2-2
Safety Practices
92206 CONFORMS TO UL STD 1950
Product: Model No: Serial No: Volts Max Current: Manufactured:
C-550 Lanovia
75484700A0 C550ANnnnn
110/230 V
50/60 Hz
4/2 A May 1999
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause any harmful interference. and 2. This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation. This Class A digital apparatus meets all the requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing EquipmentRegulations. Cet appareil numrique de la classe A respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada. FUJIFILM ELECTRONIC IMAGING LTD. PETERBOROUGH ENGLAND 7550 878D 01
Figure 2.2 Serial rating label
2-3
Safety Practices
WARNING MOVING PARTS

KEEP LOOSE CLOTHING, HAIR, AND JEWELLERY ETC. CLEAR. 7541-5800
Figure 2.3 Warning label in front of enclosure fan
CAUTION PINCH POINT
KEEP HANDS CLEAR

ELOIGNER LES MAINS HNDE FERNHALTEN TENERE LE MANI AL SICURO MANTENGA LAS MANOS ALEJADAS
Figure 2.4 Caution labels under main cover
2-4
Safety Practices
2.3
General Precautions
The following basic precautions apply to the scanner, and also to its associated equipment.
WARNING Do not attempt to lift heavy equipment by yourself.
2.3.1
Safety Devices
Read all warning labels as shown in Figure 2.1 to Figure 2.4. Make sure that all safety controls, such as the interlocks, are working correctly:
CAUTION Do NOT attempt to override, negate, or bypass any of the safety devices.
Always close covers to prevent internal access. Avoid leaving electrical cables trailing where anyone may trip
over them.
Make sure that servicing is undertaken only by authorized

personnel (i.e. trained by Fujifilm).
2.3.2
Unattended Equipment
Never leave equipment unattended unless it is in a safe condition.
2-5
Safety Practices
2.4
Electrical Safety
Electrical safety is ensured by interlocks, which make access to live parts impossible without the intentional use of tools. High tension exists inside the lamp driver module. A double-pole isolating switch, located on the RFI box, is marked 1 and 0. All mains voltages are contained within the main RFI box. There is an additional low-voltage standby switch located at the front right-hand corner of the scanner. The power-on green LED is extinguished when the standby switch is activated.
WARNING Hazardous voltages exist behind the protective covers. Do not remove any protective cover, unless directly instructed to do so by this guide.
Do not move or lift the unit while it is switched on or
connected to its electrical supply.
Regularly, verify that the mains cable is not worn or

damaged.
Make sure that water and other liquids do not come into
contact with the scanner or its associated equipment.
Do not attempt to operate the equipment while flammable or

volatile substances are present in the atmosphere.
Make sure that electrical servicing is undertaken only by

skilled personnel authorized by Fujifilm.
2-6
Safety Practices
2.5
Mechanical Safety
Mechanical safety is ensured by making access to moving parts impossible without the intentional use of tools. It is possible to trap fingers at the back by the light-bar support, when the lid is open. Care must be taken while changing lamps. Mechanical damage may result, if the traversing lightbar assembly hits an object on the platen.
2.6
Antistatic Precautions
Apply the full antistatic practices when handling any PCB or similar static sensitive devices. This includes the main carriage servo motor.
WARNING
Precision Optical Encoder Fitted Handle With Care Do Not Strike Shaft
Figure 2.5 Servo motor encoder labels
2-7
Safety Practices
2.7
Interlock Strategy
The strategy is to de-activate the associated interlock by removing the 24 V supply to de-energize the isolating relay, and so remove the supply of power:
to the electronic systems that control all moving parts, and to all lamps.
When the main cover is opened (mainly for changing the lamps) the high-voltage supply to the lamps and the enclosure fan is disabled. All motors are disabled to prevent powered movement. If the lightbar is fitted, then main carriage motor will not move until the lid is closed. If the lightbar is not fitted, the main carriage motor will move, whether the lid is open or closed.
2.8
Lamp Driver Precautions

The lamp driver module is contained within a metal enclosure that is located on the rear support of the main carriage. High voltages, for driving the lamps, are generated on board. Lamp wiring and holders are located behind suitable protection which prevents the operator from touching any contacts.
2-8
3 Functional Description
This chapter provides a description of the C-550 Lanovia Scanner and its major functions for the hardware modules.
3.1
System Overview
3.1.1 Introduction
The C-550 Lanovia Scanner is a flatbed scanner, which uses the three-plane (x, y, and z) principle to give high-resolution scanning over the entire platen and focus at any point above the platen. The scanner has a stationary platen for placing various types of original, or objects, to be scanned. A copy holder kit is provided to mount various sizes of media up to 4 mm above the platen. Illumination is by fluorescent lamps which have apertures to concentrate the intensity of light. Scans can be either transmission or reflection copies from multiple 35 mm originals to a single A3 original. The A3 original can only be mounted in the landscape orientation. The largest portrait original is the A4 size. Since the original is stationary, the scanning system has to traverse (normally from right to left) during the scanning process. The X-slide carriage can position the camera anywhere across the width of the platen for high resolution scanning.
3-1
LIGHTBAR ASSEMBLY MAIN CARRIAGE DRIVE LAMP DRIVER MODULE REFLECTION LAMPS MIRROR
PLATEN
LIGHT TABLE
CAMERA HEAD
ENLARGEMENT DRIVE STEPPER MOTORS
MAIN LEADSCREW MAIN CARRIAGE
FOCUS DRIVE X-SLIDE LEADSCREW LENS BASE AND STRUCTURE
X-SLIDE CARRIAGE
Figure 3.1 Overview of system blocks
3-2
3.1.2
System Operation
The CCD headboard is fixed to a moveable CCD mount and its lens is fixed to a lens mount. Both mounts are independently moved along the camera slide by two dedicated stepper motors. The camera slide is positioned parallel to the front of the scanner. The CCD mount is moved by the focus stepper-motor, and the lens mount is moved by the enlargement stepper-motor. These units are collectively known as the camera head sub-assembly and they are an integral part of the X-slide carriage assembly. The camera head is traversed along its slide from left to right. The X-slide carriage is moved independently by a leadscrew and drive system. The X-slide leadscrew is turned by the X-slide stepper-motor. The X-slide carriage traverses along a guide from front to back. The X-slide carriage is mounted on the main carriage assembly which is driven by a leadscrew mechanism. The main carriage is moved by the main leadscrew that is driven by a DC servo-motor This has an integral encoder for closed-loop control. When the scanner is ready, an original piece of film or media is placed on the platen. The scan details are planned at the workstation and the application software instructs the scanner to perform the required scanning process. From the original piece of film or media, either a transmission or a reflection image is mirrored to the lens of the camera. The camera head is moved to its optimum position on the X-slide carriage. The X-slide carriage is then moved to centralize the camera with the centre of the mirrored image. The X-slide carriage is now set up for the scanning process. The DC servo-motor moves the main carriage forward and the CCD captures the image one line at a time as each line is imaged onto it. As each scanned line is processed to the workstation display, so the image begins to develop until the original is fully scanned.
3-3
3.1.3
Optical System
The functions of the optical system are concerned with the following:
All aspects of illumination, An original on the platen, The mirror, The lens, The CCD baffle, The CCD.
3.1.4
Electronics
The electronics can be divided functionally into five main areas:
Power supply and distribution, System control, Image data path, Motion control, Illumination system.
Power Supply and Distribution

The scanner is powered from a single power supply unit (PSU) connected to the AC mains. The mains switch located at the bottom right-hand side of the scanner is only normally used to completely power down the machine e.g. when a service is required. The remote standby switch is also connected to the PSU. This disables all the DC outputs from the PSU but leaves the AC mains connected.
3-4
The PSU DC outputs are distributed to the rest of the scanner via the system board. The exception is the RFI box fan which is directly connected to the PSU output. The system board also provides a connection from the signal and power grounds to chassis ground. The DC outputs provide the following functions:
Digital +5 V supply for the system board, the digitizer board

and the distribution boards to power the sensors.
Analogue +18 V and -12 V supplies for the digitizer board.

The system board also regulates the +18 V supply down to +11.5 V for the digitizer board.
+24 V supply for the motors, the lamp driver board and the
enclosure fan.
System Control
The scanner is controlled via commands issued from the workstation across the SCSI link. All of the operations of the scanner are controlled and monitored by a Motorola 68332 microprocessor. The control functions are as follows:
Set up and control the devices on the system board i.e. the
SCSI controller, the DSP and the motor controllers,
Set up and control the digitizer board, lamp driver board, and
the display board,
Synchronize the scanned lines received from the digitizer

with the main carriage servo-motor drive,
Control stop/start when the workstation cannot remove data

quickly enough,
Monitor all sensors and safety interlocks.
3-5
Image Data Path

Image data is generated by the CCD and passes through the CCD headboard, digitizer board, system board, and finally to the workstation where the image is stored on disk. Light from the original is directed onto a 3-line CCD where it is converted into red, green, and blue voltage outputs. The voltage levels are proportional to the original light intensities. These analogue signals are buffered by the CCD headboard and then passed to the digitizer board. The digitizer board conditions the signal levels and multiplexes the RGB channels into a single serial stream. This is then fed through an analogue to digital converter to generate a digital output. The digital data, multiplexed as sequential RGB is passed down a flexicable to the system board. A digital signal processor (DSP) on the system board is used to manipulate the digital data into a suitable form for the workstation. Some of the functions performed by the DSP are black and white balance, line cropping, line reversal, and thresholding of line-art data. Since there is a physical gap between the RGB lines on the CCD, the data needs to be realigned within the DSP. This is implemented using memory on the DSP which stores sufficient lines so that realigning can be done. The memory is also used to store intermediate calculations from the DSP e.g. when averaging data across scan lines. The DSP then passes the data through the SCSI interface and down a SCSI cable to the workstation.
Motion Control
All the mechanisms within the scanner are controlled by electronic drivers on the system board. The mechanisms which are driven are:
Main carriage using a DC servo motor, X-slide using a stepper motor, Optical enlargement using a stepper motor,
3-6
Focus using a stepper motor.

Since the CCD is a linear array, the camera must be traversed across the image during scanning. A brushed DC servo-motor is used to drive the main carriage. The motor has an optical encoder built in which indicates its position. The system board uses a servo controller and a power-driver stage to control the motor, with the encoder providing feedback. Software is used to control the positioning, velocity, and acceleration of the motor. A datum sensor is used to indicate the home position of the motor. Forward and reverse limit switches prevent the main carriage from being driven into the mechanical end stops. The scanner can scan at the maximum resolution for originals placed anywhere on the platen. This is implemented by moving the camera across the platen on a X-slide carriage that is driven by a stepper motor. Software is used to control the number of steps, direction, velocity, and acceleration applied to the motor. Optical enlargement is adjusted by varying the lens-to-CCD distance. A stepper motor controlled by a driver on the system board varies the distance. Software is used to control the number of steps, direction, velocity, and acceleration applied to the motor. Focus is adjusted by varying the lens-to-mirror distance. A stepper motor controlled by a driver on the system board varies the distance. Software is used to control the number of steps, direction, velocity, and acceleration applied to the motor.
Illumination System
The electronic system is required to drive five fluorescent lamps. These are as follows:
Transmission lamp, Reflection lamps (2 off), Light table lamps (2 off).

The lamp-driver board drives all 5 lamps. The lamp-driver board is powered from the +24 V supply, routed via the system board interlocks and down the flexicables. Control signals are also passed down the cables which switch the lamps on and off and
3-7
control the lamp brightness. The +24 V supply is converted into +320 V DC using a switch mode power supply. This is then chopped and applied to the lamps via ballast circuits. The transmission lamp is preheated by applying a voltage to the lamp cathodes. This ensures rapid starting. A ballast circuit is used to generate a constant arc current through the lamp when it lights up. The lamp brightness is controlled by varying the arc current. This is implemented by varying the chopped frequency applied to the ballast. An optical-detector diode is used to monitor the brightness of the lamp. This is passed back to the lamp-driver board, converted into digital form and fed back to the system board. The system board monitors the lamp brightness and adjusts the arc current to maintain a constant brightness using closed-loop feedback control. The optical-detector diode feedback is also used in diagnostics to prove that the lamp is working. The reflection lamps work in a similar way except that there is a separate detector diode for each lamp. Both signals are passed back to the system board where they are summed in software. Only one signal is passed back to control the average lamp currents. The light table lamps do not have detector diodes and can only be switched on or off at full brightness. Diagnostics cannot be used to prove that the lamps are working. This must be done visually.
3.1.5
Structure
The structure of the scanner has been designed to provide suitable supports for the major assemblies and to enclose them with covers to keep out dirt, dust and moisture.
3.1.6

All data relating to the layouts of boards and their associated connectors, links, LEDs, fuses, and cable looms are available in Appendix A.
3-8
3.1.7
Fault Diagnosis
Failure charts are available in Appendix B.
3-9
3.2
System Operation
3.2.1 Introduction
This section describes the basic principles of the scanner, and follows the sequence of operations necessary to perform a scan.
3.2.2
Basic Principles
The scanner has the following functional features:
Line scan CCD camera, Fixed platen, moving camera scanning, Fluorescent illumination, Variable magnification optics, Autofocus, X-Slide carriage movement, Three-stripe CCD colour separation, Image re-alignment, Graphics and line-art scanning, Automatic calibration system, Control system.
Line Scan CCD Camera

The scanner uses a line-scan system. This means that the optical system can read only one line of the image at a time. The complete image is built up by moving the optical system relative to the original, one line at a time. The line-scan optical system, also called the camera, consists of a CCD and a lens. The CCD
3-10
converts light intensity into an electrical signal for one line at a time. The lens focuses one line of the original onto the CCD.
TRANSMISSION LIGHTBAR
CCD HEADBOARD CAMERA HEAD
LENS
MIRROR
Figure 3.2 Transmission scanning
Note: The platen remains stationary while the illumination and optical elements move in unison.
Fixed Platen - Moving Camera Scanning

The original is stationary on a fixed, horizontal glass platen, and the line-scan optical system is moved underneath it by an electro-mechanical system using a leadscrew and servo motor. So that the camera can be fitted more easily into the space available, a mirror is used; this means that the camera can be mounted horizontally, but still look up at the underside of the platen via the mirror.
3-11
Fluorescent Illumination
Two sources of illumination are provided. Transparent originals must be illuminated from above, and reflective originals from below. In each case, only the single line of the original that is being read needs to be illuminated, so a long, thin light source is used.
Variable Magnification Optics

To read the whole of the platen, the optical system must be designed so that the whole width of the platen is imaged onto the length of the CCD. However, because the CCD has limited resolving power, this is not ideal when originals much smaller that the platen are being scanned. To get the best performance, the optical system is made variable, so that the width of original which is imaged onto the length of the CCD is controllable over a wide range. To achieve this the components of the camera, the lens and CCD are independently positioned.
Autofocus
Having the lens and CCD moveable also allows the camera to be able to focus on originals which are not actually in contact with the platen, for example a picture in a frame. To find the best focus position, a part of the original is imaged at a number of different positions of the lens and CCD and a special algorithm applied to the data read to determine the sharpness for each position. The algorithm then uses interpolation to find the position for best sharpness.
X-Slide Carriage Movement

When the optical system is set to image less than the full width of the platen, there will be areas of the platen which cannot be read. To overcome this, another mechanism is used to drive the camera from side-to-side over the width of the platen, so that the camera
3-12
is able to use its high-resolution setting on a small original anywhere on the platen.
Three-Stripe CCD Colour Separation

To read colour information in a single pass, the scanner uses a CCD that has three lines of optical sensors in the same device, very close together. Each CCD stripe has a colour filter in front of it, one red, one green, and one blue.
Image Re-alignment
The data produced by the CCD during a scan is not in the same format that is required in the output image file. The most important difference is that, as the red, green and blue colour channels are read by three lines of CCD elements that are close together, but not co-incident, it is necessary to delay the signal from two of the lines so that they are properly aligned with the third line. It may also be necessary to select only part of each line, or reverse the order along the line, to suit the output required. All of this is done by a special format processor known as the DSP that is within the system board. After the formatting, the image data are passed out of the scanner over the output interface.
Graphics and Line-art Scanning

When scanning colour images, such as photographs, the C-550 Lanovia Scanner converts the image into a digital representation with a colour value at each pixel. It is also capable of operating in a line-art mode, in which internal software thresholding replaces each pixel value with just a single-bit on-off value.
3-13
Reading Copyholder Details

When the top lid is closed a scan of the platen is performed to detect the position, orientation and size of any copyholders. This data is obtained from the coded holes along the edge of the copyholders. For successful detection it is necessary that the first copyholder is positioned to top right of the platen (as viewed from the front of the scanner) and located with its edges against the horizontal and vertical registration edges. Subsequent copyholders must first be butted against this copyholder, then against each other to form a regular pattern. Copyholders may be rotated in 90 degree increments to obtain optimum image orientation. When called for by the application software this data is processed to display the crop areas (the windows in the copyholders) on the platen display in the Acquire Image window.
Automatic Calibration System

There are two levels of automatic calibration within the scanner. One level is operated on every scan, and is designed to compensate for irregularities in the optical system, and the other is operated at manufacture and in certain service situations, and is designed to compensate for mechanical tolerances. The once-per-scan calibration comprises the following:
exposure control, black balance, white balance.

Exposure control adjusts the sensitivity of the CCD to match the available illumination, ensuring that the best use is made of the operating range of the CCD. Black balance is used to cancel the variation in dark signal from the CCD. It is measured by putting the CCD into the dark, and measuring the response of each CCD element. This value is then used to correct that element during the following scan.
3-14
White balance is used to cancel the combined effects of CCD sensitivity variation and the illumination being non-uniform. The CCD is shown the illumination at the white point (clear platen for transmission and a white strip for reflection) and the correction factor for each CCD element is determined. This value is then used to correct that element during the following scan. This process is very sensitive. Any errors built in during the balance procedures will affect the same pixel all through the scan, causing streaks. The service calibrations are designed to reduce the amount of mechanical setting up required, both in the factory and in the field, when major components are changed. By scanning a special chart, the scanner is able to measure various critical dimensions, and save them in the non-volatile storage. These settings are then used during all subsequent scans.
Control System
All of the operations of the scanner are controlled and monitored by a microprocessor system that is located on the system board.
3.2.3
Sequence of Scanning Operations

A scan is initiated by a scan request sent from the workstation. On receipt of the request, the following functional operations occur in sequence:
Stabilize lamps, X-slide setting, Enlargement setting, Focus setting, Exposure control, Autofocus, Black balance,
Engineers Reference Guide 6700800003 3-15
White balance, Scan control, Lamp control.
Stabilize Lamps
If necessary, the appropriate lamp (reflection or transmission) is switched on, and the other switched off. The scan carriage remains at the park position while the brightness of the lamps is monitored by the optical feedback sensors. When the lamp is sufficiently stable for the type of scan to be performed (e.g. overview, preview, or high-resolution), the lamp control system is set and the next operation is initiated. Once the lamp is stable, this step is omitted until the next time the lamp is switched on.
X-Slide Setting
The X-slide carriage is moved to bring the centre-line of the camera into line with the centre-line of the area of platen to be scanned. This movement may overlap the following two movements.
Enlargement Setting
The enlargement drive is moved to the pre-set position for the optical magnification required for the scan.
Focus Setting
The focus drive is moved to the pre-set position for the optical magnification required. This position will focus the camera either onto the surface of the platen or on the grain of the original.
3-16
Exposure Control
The carriage is moved to the white balance position and the exposure control on the CCD is checked and adjusted if necessary to suit the light level.
Autofocus
The carriage is moved to the centre of the region to be scanned and the camera is focused onto the copy. This step is omitted in overview and preview scans.
Black Balance
The carriage is moved to the black-balance area and, for reflection scans only, the lamp is switched off briefly, for the CCD black compensation to be set up.
White Balance
The carriage is moved to the white-balance area for the CCD white compensation to be set up.
Scan
The carriage is then re-positioned close to the start point of the area to be scanned. The servo and CCD are synchronized, and the carriage is run up to the start of scan. At the start-of-scan point, image data start to flow from the CCD through the image processor (DSP) (see Figure 3.15) and out through the SCSI interface to the workstation. If, during a scan, the workstation is unable to accept data from the scanner, the flow will stop, and the scanner will back up. When the workstation becomes ready to accept further data, the
3-17
servo and CCD are again synchronized, run up to speed, and data flow re-started with the next line after the stop.
Lamp Control
At the end of a scan, the carriage is returned to the park position. The lamps are switched according to a set of rules designed to minimise the waiting time before the next scan. If the scanner is unused for two hours, the lamp or lamps will switch off to save power and extend their life.
3-18
3.3
Optical System
3.3.1 Introduction
The optical system comprises the following components:
Illumination - transmission, reflection, and light table, Platen, Mirror, Lens, CCD Image Sensor.
Originals, mounted on the platen surface, are illuminated by fluorescent lamps. A single fluorescent lamp, used for transmission scanning, is mounted in a removable lightbar that sits above the platen. Two fluorescent lamps, used for reflection scanning, are mounted in a tray that sits on the reflection column of the main carriage which is under the platen.
3-19
Figure 3.3 Transmission and reflection scan illumination
A further pair of fluorescent lamps, together with a reflector and diffusing sheet comprise the light-table which sits below the platen. The light table lamps help the operator to mount originals on the platen. A mirror, located on the end of the main carriage, reflects the optical path through 90_. The function of the mirror is to compact the optical system. The fixed focal-length lens forms an image of the original at the CCD. The CCD has a linear array of three channels. One channel for red (R), another for green (G), and the third for blue (B). The CCD image sensor is mounted on the CCD headboard. The lens is housed on the lens mount and the CCD headboard is housed on the CCD mount. Both mounts are independently moved along the same camera slide so that they maintain alignment at different optical resolutions.
3-20
Figure 3.4 Mirror, lens mount and CCD mount (camera sub-assembly)
To achieve high quality scans over the specified range of resolutions, the system software has the ability to change the optical magnification over a wide range of settings. The camera sub-assembly is a part of the X-slide carriage assembly. The electro-mechanical X-slide assembly can move the camera sub-assembly to any position across the width of the platen. These functions, in conjunction with the main (scan) carriage movements, allow high resolution scans to be performed anywhere on the whole surface area of the platen.
3.3.2
Illumination
Illumination is provided by five aperture fluorescent lamps. A single lamp is used for transmission scanning, a pair of lamps are used for reflection scanning, and another pair of lamps are used for the light table. All lamps are of an identical type. The uniformity of illumination, over the full field width at all resolutions, is better than 2:1. This allows the full dynamic range to be achieved anywhere on the platen. Illumination uniformity is
3-21
affected by the lamp output, the lens quality, and the CCD non-uniformity. Fluorescent lamps are susceptible to light output and colour variations during the warm-up period of the lamps. An adequate time period, and the use of closed-loop control, allows the lamps to stabilize before a scanning operation is begun. Feedback opto-detectors, in the transmission and reflection lamp circuits, monitor the light levels and provide the feedback needed for closed-loop control.
White Balance Areas

There are two white-balance areas. One is the transmission white-balance area and the other is the reflection white-balance area. At the white balance area the CCD image sensor is exposed to full illumination where there is a direct view of either the transmission light source, through the platen, or of the white calibration strip for the reflection light-source. The function of these white-balance areas is to provide a reference level for each CCD pixel in white light so that compensation can be introduced for the non-uniformity of illumination.
3-22
Figure 3.5 Transmission illumination
Transmission Illumination
The transmission light-source consists of a single-aperture fluorescent lamp, mounted within the lightbar. The light source provides illumination over a narrow rectangular area covering the full width of the platen. The lightbar has an optical-feedback detector for monitoring the transmission-light level. The height of the lightbar, above the platen surface, allows the optimum image quality performance between scratch rejection and sharpness. The aperture of the lamp must face downward towards the platen surface when the lightbar has been assembled on the scanner.
3-23
Transmission White-balance Area

The transmission white-balance area is a strip of clear glass that is part of the platen area adjacent to the aqua strip. Transmission light is passed to the mirror through the transmission white-balance area.
Reflection Illumination
The two aperture fluorescent lamps are positioned to give the necessary light level and also to prevent shadows appearing from non-flat originals, such as paste ups and textured surfaces. The reflection lamps are covered by the reflection-tray baffle that has slots to allow a path for the light to reach the scan line of the original placed on the fixed platen.
FIXED PLATEN
SCAN DIRECTION
Figure 3.6 Reflection illumination
The reflected image passes through the bottom slot of the reflection tray to reach the angled mirror. Each lamp has an optical feedback detector for monitoring its light level. The reflection tray forms part of the reflection column which is mounted on the main carriage above the mirror. The reflection
3-24
tray is extendable, to allow easy access to the lamps for replacement.
Reflection White-balance Area

The reflection white-balance area is a white strip of plastic fitted to the underside of the main cover at the right-hand end of the platen. Light from the reflection white-balance strip is reflected onto the mirror.
Light Table Illumination

The light table assists the operator in viewing originals placed on the platen area prior to a scanning operation, and also to provide a basic light table for on-line mounting. The platen viewing area is illuminated by two aperture fluorescent lamps that are housed at the front and rear of the light table structure. Light from the lamps is reflected from a profiled reflector and projected upward through a diffuser to produce a uniform level across the whole platen area. The light-table lamps come on when the main carriage is in the parked position and the lid is open.
3.3.3
Platen
The fixed platen provides a suitable support for various types of originals. Any combination of 35 mm to A3 reflection or transmission originals can be arranged on the platen area. If required, transmission originals may be oil mounted on the platen. The mounted originals are held flat relative to the imaging plane at the CCD array. The flatness tolerance limit of 0.5 mm is
3-25
determined by the the depth of focus of the lens at the highest optical magnification setting. The platen is directly supported by four machined pads in the aluminium alloy casting. These pads act as a datum plane for the platen. The fixed platen will support a maximum weight of 4 kg. The optical clear aperture of the platen is 470 mm x 350 mm. An area 350 mm x 15 mm at one end of the platen is reserved for white balance for the transmission mode. Extra care should be taken to ensure that this area is free from dirt and surface scratches. Both sides of the platen glass have an anti-reflection coating. This reduces the effect of any image ghosting which may be caused by any multiple reflections between surfaces. The glass type and coating allows adequate transmission of light, at all visible wavelengths, to achieve the required optical performance of the scanner. The colour performance of the C-550 Lanovia Scanner is not affected by the spectral transmission of the platen glass. The platen has a ringed groove with three locating pots at the left-hand end and three at the rear end. This ringed groove is used to locate the copy holder registration edges or the registration ruler.
Aqua Strip
The function of the aqua strip is to provide a suitable reference point on the platen. Originals should not be placed over the transmission white-balance area during transmission scanning. This aqua strip is also used to locate the various test targets on the platen for alignment and calibration. The aqua strip has graduations marked in centimetres and covers a distance of about 35 cm.
3-26
Copy Holder Registration Edges

There are three edges as follows:
Short registration edge fits over the aqua strip, Long registration edge fits over the rear edge of the platen, Registration ruler fits across the width of the platen.
The registration edges are used to form a right-angle point of reference at which any of the provided copy holders can be accurately positioned. The registration ruler allows the operator to precisely locate an original on the platen. This ruler has both straight line graduations and radial graduations in 10_ elements.
Transmission Format
The maximum transmission scan area is shown in Figure 3.7.
455 mm 25 mm A3 350 mm
Figure 3.7 Transmission format
Reflection Format
The maximum reflection scan area is shown in Figure 3.8.
3-27
470 mm 25 mm A3 + 350 mm
Figure 3.8 Reflection format
3.3.4
Mirror
The function of the mirror is to re-direct the optical path by 90_. The reflecting surface is an aluminium coating on the front face. The mirror has a high quality optical flat finish to ensure good imaging performance.
3.3.5
Lens
A single lens covers the full range of resolutions, from 22.5 lines/mm (580 dpi) to 192 l/mm (4900 dpi). The lens has a fixed aperture setting of f 5.6. The lens has been specifically designed for use with linear CCDs and is targeted mainly for the input scanner industry. It has been designed for an image field length of 72 mm and its magnification range accommodates original sizes from 35 mm to an A3 format. Care has been taken to minimize distortion and in particular the longitudinal and lateral chromatic aberrations.
3-28
Optical Baffles
Optical baffles are mounted on the CCD-mount casting and on the lens-mount casting. These baffles have been coated with a special non-reflective paint to help prevent stray light being reflected from the inside surfaces of the scanner which could fall directly onto the CCD array.
3.3.6
CCD Image Sensor

The CCD (Charge Coupled Device) image sensor is part of the camera head and is horizontally mounted into a socket in the CCD headboard. The CCD image sensor contains three lines of photodiodes (photosites) with integral red (R), green (G), and blue (B) colour filters over each line. Light from the original is imaged via the lens onto the CCD lines which creates charge packets within the photosites. Voltage outputs are obtained by clocking each line out serially through a charge to voltage converter. The three analogue outputs are passed via the CCD headboard to the digitizer board. The CCD is accurately mounted into the camera-head mounting-plate during the factory camera alignment process. It must not be disturbed otherwise a new camera head will need to be fitted.
CCD Description
Each CCD line consists of a linear array of 8000 photosites (see Figure 3.9). When photons fall onto the photosites, electrons are generated which fill the photosite wells. The number of electrons in each well is proportional to the light intensity. To avoid the wells filling up (saturation) and spreading into adjacent wells (blooming), a variable exposure time is used for each colour depending on the maximum light intensity. At the end of the exposure time, the charge packets are transferred to an analogue shift register via the transfer gates.
3-29
Charge packets in the analogue shift-register are clocked serially along and out of the register. The charge packets are fed through a charge to voltage converter and an output amplifier which generates a voltage output. Prior to each charge packet, the charge to voltage converter is reset. This defines an output voltage which is the dark-reference level. When the charge packet is shifted into the charge to voltage converter, a valid video level is generated. The resulting output is a square wave in which the difference between the dark_reference and valid video levels is proportional to the original light intensity. All three lines operate in parallel producing three concurrent analogue outputs. While the analogue shift registers are being clocked out, the photosites are accumulating the charge packets for the next line.
RESET PHIR CHARGE TO VOLTAGE
TRANSFER GATE 2 TG2 TRANSFER GATE 1 TG1
RED CHANNEL
ANALOGUE SHIFT REGISTER PHI1A/B PHI2A/B
ANALOGUE OUTPUT RED
OUTPUT AMP
PHOTO SITES RED
LOG R
RESET PHIR CHARGE TO VOLTAGE
ANALOGUE OUTPUT GREEN
GREEN CHANNEL
OUTPUT AMP ANALOGUE OUTPUT BLUE
RESET PHIR
BLUE CHANNEL
CHARGE TO VOLTAGE
OUTPUT AMP
Figure 3.9 CCD image sensor
3-30
CCD Clocks
The CCD uses the following clocks:
Exposure control clocks, LOGR, LOGG and LOGB for the

red, green, and blue lines. These determine the exposure times to prevent saturation. The exposure times are determined by measuring the light from the white balance strip to ensure that the pixel with the highest level is out of saturation.
Transfer Gates 1 and 2 clocks, TG1 and TG2. These allow the
charge packets to be transferred between the the photosites and the analogue shift registers.
Transport clocks PHI1A, 1B, 2A and 2B. These move the

charge packets along the analogue shift registers into the charge-to-voltage converters.
Reset Clock PHIR. This resets the charge to voltage converter

for each pixel prior to moving the charge packet into it.
3-31
3.4
Electronics
3.4.1 Introduction
The electronics are physically divided into several modules which can be individually tested using diagnostics. The use of modules enables faults to be found and repaired more quickly thereby reducing the cost of replacement in the field. Figure 3.10 shows the electronic modules.
DIGITIZER BOARD CCD HEADBOARD LAMP DRIVER BOARD
RH DISTRIBUTION BOARD DISPLAY BOARD
LH DISTRIBUTION BOARD LAMP DETECTOR BOARDS RFI BOX PSU MAINS SWITCH STANDBY SWITCH SYSTEM BOARD
VIEWED FROM FRONT
Figure 3.10 Electrical module locations within the scanner
There are a number of ancillary components, sensors, interlocks and stepper motors which are connected via distribution boards so that they can be individually replaced. Each ancillary component can also be checked using diagnostics.
3-32
This chapter describes each electronic module functionally. Physical details (e.g. connector pin-out information) are given in Appendix A, the Electrical Reference Data section. The analogue electronics relating to the CCD and headboard are part of the camera. The power circuits driving the illumination systems are located within the lamp-driver module. Minor PCBs are also used for distribution and display panel purposes. All PCBs are connected with either ribbon or flexicables.
3.4.2
Power Supply
The power supply unit converts the AC mains supply into the low-voltage DC supplies required by the electronic modules. The supply uses switch-mode technology and provides four fully-regulated outputs. It has no service adjustments or exchangeable internal parts. Dangerous voltages are present inside the unit, possibly even after disconnection from the supply. Two versions of power supply may be fitted:
The original supply (WA 304) is suitable for mains supplies

of 85 V to 132 V or 176 V to 264 V (it will automatically select the correct input range).
The replacement supply is a Sirius 250 series. It is suitable

for a mains supply of 85 V to 264 V a.c. with a frequency range of 47 to 63 Hz. This PSU is power-factor corrected. The DC-outputs from the power supply are: +5 V at 15 A (minimum 3 A), +24 V at 6 A, +18 V at 500 mA and -12 V at 500 mA. These outputs are used for the following purposes:
+5 V System board logic,
3-33
Power-on LED, Digitizer-board logic, Digitizer fan, On the original system board the +5 V is also used to
generate the 3.3 V supply. On the later Kicker board the +5 V generates the 3.3 and 2.75/2.5 V supplies.
+24 V RFI box fan, Enclosure fan, All stepper motors, Carriage servo-motor, System-board motor-control circuits, Interlock system, Power to lamp-driver module, +12 V regulated supply.
+18 V Analogue circuits on the digitizer board, +11.5 V supply for the digitizer board.
-12 V Analogue circuits on the digitizer board and servo system.
3-34
There are no connections between these supplies within the power supply itself; all ground connections are made within the system board. The power supply contains an over-temperature trip which will disable the unit completely if the cooling fails. This trip will reset on cooling. There is also a remote-switching capability via a separate connector above the output terminals which is connected to the standby switch on the front of the scanner; closing the switch disables the power-supply unit. If the WA 304 PSU is disabled, the output voltages will be low, but not zero. If the later Sirius 250 PSU is disabled the output voltage will be zero. All supplies are protected against short circuit. If the current taken from any output exceeds the maximum, the whole supply will shut down. The PSU will attempt to restart at intervals of a few seconds until the fault is cleared.
3.4.3
CCD Headboard
The CCD headboard is part of the camera sub-assembly and is used to provide the electrical interface to the CCD sensor. The CCD headboard contains the clock drivers which take TTL signals from the digitizer board and produce clocks of the correct voltage levels, rise, and fall times and overlaps required by the CCD sensor. The CCD headboard also buffers the red, green and blue analogue outputs before sending the signals down a flexible cable to the digitizer board. The CCD sensor is mounted into the CCD headboard using a socket. The CCD sensor is accurately clamped onto the CCD mounting plate while the CCD headboard is flexibly attached to it. Both the CCD sensor and the CCD headboard must not be disturbed otherwise the alignment of the scanner will be affected.
3-35
RED GREEN BLUE
VIDEO
RED
VIDEO
GREEN
VIDEO
BLUE
CCD IMAGE SENSOR (see Figure 3.9)
Log G Log R Log B
EXPOSURE CONTROL GREEN EXPOSURE CONTROL RED EXPOSURE CONTROL BLUE PHI1A
PHI1B
PHI2B
TRANSFER GATE-2
PHI2A TRANSFER GATE-1 RESET CLOCK
Figure 3.11 CCD headboard
CCD Clock Drivers

The CCD clock drivers required by the CCD sensor are:
Exposure control clocks for the RGB channels. These are low
to accumulate charge in the photosites.
Transfer Gate 1 and 2 clocks. These clocks are common to all

three channels and are high to transfer charge from photosites to shift registers.
Transport clocks PHI1A, 1B, 2A and 2B. These square-wave

clocks are common to all three channels and they transport the charge down the shift registers.
3-36
Reset clock. This clock is common to all three channels and

is high to reset the charge to voltage converters. Each clock driver comprises a discrete transistor amplifier which produces the correct voltage levels for the CCD image sensor. The rise and fall times of each output are controlled by the output impedance of each driver in conjunction with the capacitance of the CCD input pins.
Output Buffers
The red, green, and blue (RGB) analogue output signals are buffered by emitter followers and series resistors which provide an impedance match to the 30-way flexicable. These allow the signals to be sent to the digitizer board without degradation.
3.4.4
Digitizer Board
The digitizer board (see Figure 3.12 and Figure 3.13) is part of the camera head and it provides the front end analogue electronics for the CCD image sensor. The digitizer board provides clock signals and power to the CCD headboard and receives back the analogue signals from the red, green, and blue CCD stripes. These are converted to digital using an ADC and passed to the system board. The interface to the system board (including power) is via a flexicable. A voltage sensor indicates if one of the incoming power supply rails has failed. A temperature sensor indicates if there is an over-temperature in the vicinity of the camera head.
Operating Modes
The digitizer board can operate in either the normal CCD input mode or in diagnostics modes. In normal CCD mode, the digitizer performs the following functions:
Level shifts each analogue input to around 0 V.

Performs correlated double sampling on each analogue input

i.e. converts the CCD square-wave signals into continuous video signals.
Multiplexes the three colour-channels into sequential RGB

analogue data.
Converts the sequential data into digital form using a 16 bit

ADC.
Passes the data as 2 bytes-per-pixel to the system board. Continuously monitors the power-supply volts and the
temperature.
Distributes signals to the focus and enlargement stepper

motors and to the enlargement datum sensor. In the diagnostics modes, operation is similar to the above except test data is injected via input multiplexers into the three analogue inputs via a diagnostic DAC controlled by the system board. This allows the entire image data path to be checked from the digitizer input through to the system board.
CCD Signal
The CCD generates simultaneous RGB analogue signals, each being a square wave, offset from 0 V. The amplitude of each square wave signal is proportional to incident light intensity. For no light, the signal is at the dark reference-level. As the light level is increased, the square wave switches between the dark-reference level and a valid-video level. The valid-video level is negative relative to the dark-reference level.
Input Multiplexer and Level Shifter - RGB

A square wave similar to the CCD output for diagnostic purposes is generated by chopping between the diagnostic DAC output and 0 V. The input multiplexer selects either the CCD or diagnostic square waves for the three colour channels. The circuit also
3-38
includes level shifters which shifts the CCD dark-reference offsets close to 0 V.
Correlated Double Sampling (CDS)

The wanted video signal is obtained by taking the difference between the valid video signal and the dark reference signal on a pixel by pixel basis. This is done by clamping the dark reference accurately to 0V and then applying a sample/hold during the valid video period. After CDS, the square wave becomes a continuous video signal which is updated at each pixel. CDS is performed in parallel on all three colour channels.
RGB Multiplexer
The three video channels are pixel interleaved using the RGB multiplexer. This selects one channel at a time, using the control signals: MUXRED, MUXGREEN, and MUXBLUE, and passes these analogue signals to the ADC for conversion.
3-39
DIAG DAC 0 V (A) CCD RED INPUT MULTIPLEXER AND LEVEL SHIFT RED CORRELATED DOUBLE SAMPLING
SELECT MUX
CLAMP
SAMPLE
DIAG DAC 0 V (A) CCD GREEN INPUT MULTIPLEXER AND LEVEL SHIFT GREEN CORRELATED DOUBLE SAMPLING
SELECT MUX DIAG DAC 0 V (A) CCD BLUE INPUT MULTIPLEXER AND LEVEL SHIFT BLUE
CLAMP
SAMPLE RGB MULTIPLEXER RGB MUX OUT
SEE Figure 3.13 CORRELATED DOUBLE SAMPLING
SELECT MUX
CLAMP
SAMPLE
MUX RED
MUX GREEN
MUX BLUE
Figure 3.12 Digitizer 1
Analogue-to-Digital Converter (ADC)

The ADC (see Figure 3.13) takes the colour interleaved analogue signals and converts each one to 16 bit resolution. Digital multiplexers are then used to send first the high byte and then the low byte along the interface to the system board. The data transfer rate is at 3.2 MHz or twice the input sampling rate to the ADC.
3-40
Voltage Sensor
A window comparator is used to check that the input supply voltages to the digitizer are within limits. If any supply is outside limits or if the interface cable is not properly connected, a power fail signal is sent back to the system board. The supplies checked are:
+ 18 volts, + 11.5 volts, - 12 volts.
Temperature Sensor
An on-board temperature sensor is used to monitor the operating temperature in the vicinity of the camera head. The sensor is a digital device in which an over-temperature trip point can be programmed from the system board via the serial interface. If the board temperature exceeds the trip point, a temperature fail signal is sent back to the system board. The temperature of the digitizer can also be directly read back by the system board.
Digital Control
The digitizer is controlled from the system board by the following interfaces:
A 3-bit parallel interface which sets up the operating mode. A bi-directional serial interface which is used to write to the
diagnostic DAC, set up the temperature sensor, and read back the board temperature. The pixel transfer rate is determined by a pixel demand clock generated by the system board. This is received by the digitizer which then returns pixel data in byte form with a double speed digitizer clock back to the system board. To correctly time the CCD clocks, multiplexers, CDS and ADC, a high speed clock is required on the digitizer. This is generated by multiplying up the
3-41
1.6 MHz pixel demand clock to 25.6 MHz using a phase lock loop (PLL).
RGB MUX OUT (see Figure 3.12) 16-BIT ADC 16-BIT DATA BUS OUTPUT MULTIPLEXER DATA D 0:7 DIG DATA VALID CLOCK 3.2 MHz 3-BIT MODE CONTROL DIAG DAC
SERIAL INTERFACE
PAL
DIAGNOSTIC DAC
PIXEL DEMAND CLOCK 1.6 MHz
PHASE LOCKED LOOP
25.6 MHz
CCD CLOCKS
VOLTS INPUT
VOLTAGE SENSOR
VOLTS OK
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
TEMP OK
DIGITIZER FAN
ENLARGEMENT DATUM SENSOR
BUFFERED DATUM SENSOR
MOTOR STEPS
ENLARGEMENT STEPPER MOTOR
FOCUS STEPPER MOTOR
Figure 3.13 Digitizer 2
Image Processing (Formatting)

A single programmable logic device (PAL) provides all of the digital timing on the digitizer board. The functions in the PAL are:
Generation of the CCD clocks,

3-42 C-550 Lanovia Scanner
Generation of the clocks for input multiplexer, CDS, RGB

multiplexer, ADC and output multiplexer,
Implementation of 3-bit parallel interface for mode control, Implementation of serial interface, Divide-by-16 used in the PLL, Interface to the temperature sensor.
3.4.5
System Board
The system board, mounted upright in the RFI box at the rear of the pedestal, provides overall control of the scanner. While the system board is a single module, it can be considered as having several functional blocks (see Figure 3.14). The functions of the system board include:
Interfacing with the digitizer board and processing the picture

signal data received.
Controlling the lamps in the scanner via the lamp driver

board.
Controlling the motor drive system within the scanner. Monitoring all sensors and safety interlocks located in the
scanner.
Controlling the data transfers via the single-ended SCSI

interface.
Providing the means to test the scanner through its

diagnostics software.
3-43
DIGITIZER BOARD IMAGE PROCESSOR FIFO (ON KICKER BOARD ONLY) SCSI CONTROLLER SCSI INTERFACE
DIGITIZER CONTROL 68332 CENTRAL PROCESSOR UNIT CLOCK GENERATION AND SYNCHRONIZATION SERIAL RS232 PORT
MOTION
CONTROLLER
SERVO CONTROL
STEPPER CONTROL
INTERLOCKS/ SENSORS
LAMP INTERFACE
SERVO MOTOR
STEPPER MOTORS
INTERLOCKS/ SENSORS
LAMP DRIVER BOARD
Figure 3.14 System board block diagram
The main blocks within the system board are described below:
System Controller
The system-controller block is the intelligent supervisor of the scanner. It receives commands from the peripheral workstation on the single-ended SCSI interface and uses this information to control and drive the electronic sub-systems of the scanner.
3-44
The heart of the system controller block is the 68332 CPU with a 32-bit processing core, running at 20 MHz. The CPU has a built-in-time processor unit which is used to drive the stepper motors. Provided on-board are 2 M of Flash PROM and 2 M of DRAM to run the application and the diagnostics code. The system controller has direct control over the image processor, the SCSI controller, the motion controller, the lamp-driver board, the digitizer board, and the synchronizer block. As a background task, the system controller monitors the environment within the scanner and disables scans if a fault condition or an interlock violation is detected. The monitored fault conditions are over temperature on the system board and the digitizer board and out-of-range supply voltages on the digitizer and the lamp-driver boards. The main communications with the workstation is via the single ended SCSI interface. Commands received on this interface allows the scanner to run application or diagnostics procedures. There is also a serial RS232 communications interface to the system board. This is intended for running a more comprehensive range of diagnostics using the same workstation or a separate terminal.
3-45
WORKSTATION CAMERA IMAGE DATA FLOW SRAM DRAM SRAM
24 8 CAMERA INPUT LATCH 16 DIGITIZER DEBUG LATCH
16
16 SCSI DMA LATCH BYTE SWAP
DIGITIZER
SCSI 16
16 24 IMAGE PROCESSOR (DSP)
16
16
16 16 CPU 8 SYSTEM CONTROLLER DRAM FLASH
Figure 3.15 Scanner image-data flow original system board
3-46
WORKSTATION CAMERA IMAGE DATA FLOW SRAM DRAM
24 8 CAMERA INPUT DOUBLE LATCH 16 DIGITIZER DEBUG LATCH
16 FIFO
DIGITIZER
SCSI 16
16 24 IMAGE PROCESSOR (DSP)
16
16 16 CPU 8 SYSTEM CONTROLLER DRAM FLASH
Figure 3.16 Scanner image-data flow Kicker system board
Image Processor
The Image Processor block receives the image data from the Digitizer. It processes this data and passes it onto the SCSI interface. The main component in this block is the digital signal processor (DSP) which performs all the data transfer and image processing functions, under the direction of the main system-control processor. Program code is loaded into the DSP by the system-control processor through a dedicated host processor port. The DSP then runs the downloaded program. The image processor block on the original system board includes 2 M x 16 DRAM, 128 K x 24 SRAM and 384 K x 16 SRAM, which are used to store and process the image data. On the Kicker board
3-47
the image processor block includes 4 M x 16 DRAM and 512 K x 24 SRAM. Once a scan is initiated, the 16-bit data from the digitizer board is transferred to the image processor in 2 bytes, across an 8-bit bus at the rate of 3.2 MHz. This data is then written to the single 16-bit camera input latch (dual on Kicker), in the order RGBRGB etc. Each time the data is received at the latch, the decode circuit will generate one of three sequential interrupts, IRQA, IRQB, and IRQC, one for each colour. Each interrupt drives a separate DMA channel of the DSP which transfer the data from the camera latch to the memory, thus effectively separating the colours on the fly. The incoming data is then processed by the DSP and written to the 16-bit SCSI DMA latch (256 x 16 bit FIFO on Kicker), to be read by the SCSI controller. On the original system board the DSP runs at 66 MHz whereas Kicker runs at 66 MHz without the dongle and 100 MHz with it. Some of the functions performed by the image processor block are:
Black balance, White balance, Tone correction, Bad-pixel removal, Tri-linear re-alignment, Cropping, Padding, Averaging, Line reversal, A4 C-dot on original board and Kicker board without dongle,
A3 C-dot on Kicker with dongle,
Line-art algorithms, Autofocus.
3-48
During diagnostics, the system controller is capable of injecting test data into the image processor via the digitizer debug latch to test its operation.
Clock Generation and Synchronization

The synchronization block controls the timing of the camera and digitizer board and synchronizes it to the main (scan) carriage motor and to the DSP to ensure that the lines of image data are captured from the original at the correct position in the scan. The synchronizer gives fine control over the line length in terms of the number of pixel clocks and coarser control over the three colour-channel integrate timers to control the amount of light captured by the CCD image sensor. During a scan, it is necessary to keep the line time period of the CCD system synchronized to the carriage feed rate and to the integration timers. This is ensured by generating the CCD clock signals (1.6 MHz pixel clock) and the servo-controller clock (8 MHz motor clock) from the same master clock running at 48 MHz. The clock generator produces a pixel clock and a line clock for the digitizer as well as the three integration control clocks for the CCD image sensor. Once the clock generator is set up, the digitizer board sends data continuously to the DSP. This data is rejected by the DSP, until it is primed by the system controller. The line clocks start each scan line, giving an interrupt to the CPU in the system controller. In this way, the DSP data is synchronized with the incoming data.
SCSI Controller
The SCSI controller block interfaces the scanner and the workstation. The workstation can send application commands, diagnostics commands or download scanner software through the SCSI interface. The scanner can reply with status information or scanned image data.
3-49
The scanner only supports a single-ended 8-bit SCSI interface with synchronous and asynchronous data transfers up to 10 Mbytes/s. The SCSI block is controlled from the system-controller block but receives its data from the image-processor block. On the original system board the 16-bit image data is transferred into the SCSI block from the SCSI DMA latch (see Figure 3.15). On the Kicker board this data is transferred into the SCSI block via the 256 x 16 bit FIFO (see Figure 3.16). This process is controlled by one of the DMA channels on the DSP. On the original board, when the SCSI controller is ready to accept data, it raises an interrupt (IRQD) on the DSP which then writes the image data to the SCSI DMA latch under DMA control. On the Kicker board data transfer works as follows. The output DMAs are enabled during scanning and the DSP writes processed image data into the FIFO as long as there is space available. The data from the FIFO is then read by the SCSI chip and sent to the workstation. Providing that there is available space in the FIFO, the DSP interrupt IRQD is generated, which causes the DSP to write the next pixel to the FIFO, through the DMA process. The SCSI interface has two parallel connectors on the system board. One of these is used for connecting the scanner to the workstation while the other is used for connecting an external terminator.
Motion Control
The system board controls the stepper motors used for the focus, enlargement, and cross-slide drive mechanisms, and a servo motor used for the main carriage drive.
Stepper Motors
The drive for the stepper motors performs the following functions:
3-50
Commutation sequencing. (i.e. quarter stepping for the focus

motor and half-stepping for the X-slide and enlargement motor),
Current control, Short circuit protection, Over-temperature protection for the drive electronics.
Over-travel detectors are not provided for any of the stepper-motor driven mechanisms; they all have mechanical end stops.
MOTOR DRIVE SYSTEM CONTROLLER
PHASE QUADRATURE
X-SLIDE STEPPER MOTOR
STEPPER MOTOR CONTROLLER
STEP(1-4) STEP(10)
DAC DIR
TPU (1) TPU TPU (2) PROFILE GENERATOR ENABLE
BRAKE
STEP(5-8) STEP(12)
DAC DIR
Note: This figure shows only one of the three stepper motors
BRAKE
Figure 3.17 A stepper motor electronic block
The stepper-motor electronics block diagram (see Figure 3.17) shows the main functional blocks and their connections for a single motor. When a move is requested by the system software it passes a requested position, a starting step period and a slewing step period to the timer processor unit (TPU). The TPU outputs two phase-quadrature signals. The phase difference between these signals determines the direction of motion and the period between transitions is the step period.
3-51
VELOCITY
START
STOP TIME 0 RAMP UP SLEW AT CONSTANT VELOCITY RAMP DOWN
During the move, the step period is ramped from the starting-step period to the slewing-step period and then back down again, to finish at the requested position. The stepper-motor controller divides down each step out of the TPU into either a half or quarter step at the motor. The DAC, inside the motor driver, allows fine control of the motor current giving fine control of the motor position. One revolution of the stepper motor takes 400 steps when driven in half-step mode or 800 steps when driven in quarter-step mode. The brake line is pulled active by the resistor when the main cover is open and driven inactive by the main-covers interlock relay when the covers are shut. When the brake line is active +24 V is applied to both sides of the motor-winding setting the motor current to zero and disabling any movement.
Servo Motor
The drive for the servo motor performs the following functions:
Closed-loop position control, Move profile generation, Servo-loop compensation, Current drive and control, Over-travel protection, Short-circuit protection.
3-52
The servo-motor electronics block-diagram (see Figure 3.18) shows the main functional blocks and their connections. The servo controller receives, from the system controller, the target position, acceleration rate, and velocity settings. It uses these parameters to drive the servo-motor leadscrew. The servo motor produces encoder clock pulses ENCA, ENCB and ENCI. The ENCA and the ENCB pulses are used to increment or decrement the actual position register of the servo controller. The actual position is then compared with the desired position to give the error measured in encoder counts. This is then multiplied by a scaling factor and written to the DAC, to give the bipolar demand signal.
DESIRED POSITION
SERVO CONTROLLER
DAC
ANALOGUE COMPENSATOR BIPOLAR DEMAND G(s) +/ 5 V +/12 V CMP DEMAND
ERROR MULTIPLIER
DAC 12BITS
ACTUAL POSITION
ENCI ENCA ENCB
INTERLOCK RELAY
DEMAND MAGNITUDE REF 0 TO +5 V PWM CURRENT CONTROL AMPLIFIER DIR BRAKE
ABSOLUTE VALUE CIRCUIT
SERVO MOTOR ENCODER
DEMAND DIRECTION
SIGN CIRCUIT
FWD LIM DATUM REVLIM
LIMIT SENSOR LOGIC
Figure 3.18 Servo motor electronic blocks
3-53
Bipolar demand is fed to the analogue compensator. This is an active analogue filter which corrects the phase and gain of the servo system to maintain its stability. The compensated demand (CMP Demand) is split into sign and magnitude by the sign and absolute value circuit. The Pulse Width Modulator (PWM) current-control amplifier drives a current proportional to the demand magnitude through the motor winding in the direction indicated by demand direction. The demand magnitude signal is connected to the reference input of the PWM current-control amplifier. The interlock relay disconnects the motor from the driver when:
The lid is opened and the lightbar is fitted or, The main cover is open.
When the motor is disconnected from the driver, it is shorted out by a braking resistor. The de-energized state of this relay is with the motor disabled, forcing it to fail to a safe state. The limit-sensors logic disables motion of the carriage in the outward direction only. If the carriage is on the forward limit forward motion is prevented. If the carriage is on the reverse limit reverse motion is prevented. This protects the machine against running into the mechanical end stops but allows it to reverse drive itself from a limit sensor. The limit-sensor signals are pulled high on the system board making them fail to a safe state.
3.4.6
Lamp Driver Board

The lamp-driver board is mounted within a metal enclosure fixed to the main carriage casting at the rear of the light table. The lamp driver operates from a +24 VDC supply, from the system board, which provides power to all five lamps in the scanner. The interface to the system board, including power, is via a flexicable. The transmission and two reflection lamps can be switched on and off and driven with variable currents which are set from the system board by writing to a DAC. These three lamps also have associated opto-detectors which feed analogue signals back to the lamp driver. These signals are passed to an ADC which converts
3-54
them to digital form. The digital signals are then returned to the system board so that the lamp brightness can be controlled via a software feedback loop.
LAMP DRIVER MODULE
PL1
REFLECTION LAMPS DRIVER
PL2
TRANSMISSION LAMP DRIVER
PL3
LIGHT TABLE LAMPS DRIVER
VARIABLE BRIGHTNESS LAMPS
VARIABLE BRIGHTNESS LAMP
FIXED BRIGHTNESS LAMPS
Figure 3.19 Lamp driver module
The two light-table lamps can be switched on and off but with fixed brightness only. The lamps need to be warmed up prior to use to maintain good brightness and colour stability. To shorten the warm-up time, it is possible to have several lamps on at once with the following rules:
Up to four lamps can be on at once, e.g. two light-table plus

two reflection lamps.
If all five lamps are demanded at once, an interlock within the

lamp driver switches off the reflection lamps.
Lamp Driver Block Diagram

The blocks within the lamp driver board are as follows:
Figure 3.20 shows an overview of all five blocks, Figure 3.21 shows the switched-mode PSU circuit,
3-55
Figure 3.22 shows the system-board interface circuit, Figure 3.23 shows the transmission-lamps driver circuit, Figure 3.24 shows the reflection-lamps driver circuit, Figure 3.25 shows the table-lamps driver circuit.
+320 V +24 V SWITCHED MODE PSU (refer to Figure 3.21) +18 V
SYSTEM BOARD INTERFACE (refer to Figure 3.22)
TRANSMISSION LAMP CIRCUIT (see Figure 3.23)
REFLECTION LAMP CIRCUIT (see Figure 3.24)
LIGHT TABLE LAMP CIRCUIT (see Figure 3.25)
TRANSMISSION LAMP LEVEL TRANSMISSION LAMP ON
SYSTEM BOARD
TRANSMISSION LAMP DETECTOR REFLECTION LAMPS LEVEL
REFLECTION LAMPS ON REFLECTION LAMP 1 DETECTOR DISABLE REFLECTION LAMPS REFLECTION LAMP 2 DETECTOR LIGHT TABLE LAMPS ON
Figure 3.20 Lamp driver block diagram
Lamp Driver Blocks

Input RFI filter.
3-56
Soft inrush current circuit. +5 V and +14 V regulators. Low-voltage monitor which checks that the +24 V input
supply reaches a minimum limit.
Boost converter to generate a floating high voltage

DC-supply for the lamps. Since the supply floats, it reduces the danger if a single point is accidently touched. An isolation barrier separates the low-voltage and high-voltage sides.
+5 V REGULATORS +24 V DC SUPPLY +14 V
INPUT VOLTS OK +320 V +18 V
RFI FILTER
SOFT INRUSH CURRENT CIRCUIT
LOW VOLTAGE MONITOR
FLYBACK BOOST CONVERTER
SOFT START TEMPERATURE MONITOR TEMP OK
Figure 3.21 Lamp driver switched-mode PSU
Temperature monitor which trips out the boost converter if

the board exceeds 75_C. The circuit restarts when the temperature drops back below the limit. brightness.
Dual serial DAC to set transmission and reflection-lamp Serial ADC with 4-channel multiplexer to convert the three
lamp-detector signals to digital form. The fourth channel is used as a loopback via the transmission-DAC output for diagnostic purposes.
Five lamp interlock circuit.
3-57
Voltage controlled oscillators (VCOs) set by the DAC

outputs. The variable-frequency outputs are used to control the lamp currents, the lowest frequency corresponding to maximum lamp current and brightness.
Heater drivers which are used to provide cathode-heating

currents to each lamp which ensures rapid starting.
Ballast circuits which chop the high-voltage supply, generate

a starting voltage and limit the arc current through each lamp.
DAC DATA OUT SERIAL DATA IN DUAL SERIAL DAC 12-BIT REFLECTION LAMPS LEVEL CH1 TRANSMISSION LAMP LEVEL CH0
SERIAL CLOCK
LOOPBACK CH3 SERIAL ADC 12-BIT ADC DATA OUT CH0 TRANSMISSION LAMP ON REFLECTION LAMPS ON LIGHT TABLE LAMPS ON FIVE LAMP INTERLOCK CIRCUIT DISABLE REFLECTION LAMPS CH2 CH1 TRANSMISSION LAMP DETECTOR REFLECTION LAMP 2 DETECTOR REFLECTION LAMP 1 DETECTOR
Figure 3.22 Lamp driver system board interface
3-58
HEATER DRIVER +320 V TRANSMISSION LAMP LEVEL VCO
+18 V SET MAX CURRENT
HALF BRIDGE
BALLAST CHOKE AND CAPACITOR
TRANSMISSION LAMP ON
SWEEP CIRCUIT
TRANSMISSION LAMP DETECTOR
OPTO DETECTOR
LAMP CATHODES
Figure 3.23 Transmission lamp driver
Input RFI Filter

The boost converter and ballast circuits create high levels of ripple current on the +24 V supply which would appear on the flexible cable. To reduce this, a common-mode choke and in-line choke are used to reduce the ripple which reduces RFI emissions from the cable (see Figure 3.21).
Soft Inrush Current Circuit

The main-cover interlock breaks the +24 V supply to the lamp driver. If the cover is closed and the supply reconnected with the power on, the reservoir capacitors on the lamp driver would put a momentary short across the +24 V supply causing the PSU to trip out the +5 V supply. This would cause the system board to reset. To prevent this, the soft inrush current circuit limits the charging current to the reservoir capacitors to a safe limit. In addition, a soft-start circuit on the boost converter limits the current surge when the converter starts up (see Figure 3.21).
3-59
+5 V and +14 V Regulators

These regulators generate +5 V and +14 V supplies from the +24 V input supply. These supplies are used for the DAC, ADC, VCOs and associated amplifiers and comparators (see Figure 3.21).
Low Voltage Monitor

The voltage of the +24 V supply is checked and if below +18 V, a power-fail signal is sent back to the system board via an opto-isolator. Also, the boost converter is disabled if the input voltage is too low. An LED on the board lights if the supply is higher than the threshold.
Boost Converter
A flyback boost converter is used to step up the +24 V supply to +320 VDC. A MOSFET is used to switch the +24 V across an inductor. The current and therefore the flux builds up in the inductor core until the MOSFET is switched off. At this point the flux decays, transferring power to the secondary windings and to an auxiliary winding which generates +320 V and +18 V respectively. The 18 V output is regulated via a switched mode power supply chip while the +320 V output follows the +18 V output by virtue of the turns ratio between them. The +18 V output is used to generate the cathode heating currents while the +320 V output generates the lamp arc currents. An LED on the board lights if the boost converter is generating high voltage).
Temperature Monitor
An analogue temperature chip is used to monitor the temperature of the lamp driver. The output of this is checked with a comparator and the output fed back to the system board via an opto-isolator. A temperature higher than 75_C will be reported as an over-temperature failure. An over-temperature also causes the
3-60
boost converter to shut down. This starts up again if the over-temperature condition is removed (see Figure 3.21).
Serial DAC
The serial DAC (see Figure 3.22) is a single-chip 12-bit device with dual analogue outputs. The DAC is driven from the system board via opto-isolators to maintain good noise immunity. The system board supplies data and clock to the DAC and the data after passing through the DAC shift register is clocked back to the system board to act as a loopback check. The two channels are used as follows:
Channel 0 sets up the current for the transmission lamp, Channel 1 sets up the current for both reflection lamps.
Serial ADC
The serial ADC (see Figure 3.22) is a 12-bit device with four analogue inputs switched via a multiplexer. The same serial lines used for the DAC also control the ADC. The digital data from the ADC is fed back serially to the system board via an opto-isolator. The four channels are used as follows:
Channel 0 is used for the transmission lamp detector, Channel 1 is used for the reflection lamp 1 detector, Channel 2 is used for the reflection lamp 2 detector, Channel 3 feeds back DAC channel 0 as a loopback test.
Five Lamp Interlock Circuit

This circuit (see Figure 3.22) checks to see if there is a demand for all five lamps. If so, the reflection lamps are disabled.
3-61
Voltage Controlled Oscillators (VCO)

To control lamp brightness, three separate VCOs (see Figure 3.23, Figure 3.24, and Figure 3.25) are used for the transmission, reflection, and light table lamps. As the frequency is reduced, the lamp current goes up. The minimum frequency of each VCO corresponds with maximum current which is set up using a potentiometer. The VCO pots are factory preset and should not be changed in the field. The DAC is used to control the transmission and reflection VCOs while the light table VCO is preset and fixed.
Heater Drivers
To heat the cathodes of the lamps, the +18 V supply is chopped and the square wave fed via a heater transformer (see Figure 3.23, Figure 3.24, and Figure 3.25) to the lamp cathodes. The preheating of the cathodes ensures that the lamps will rapidly start.
3-62
HEATER DRIVER +320 V
+18 V SET MAX CURRENT
REFLECTION LAMPS LEVEL
VCO
HALF BRIDGE
REFLECTION LAMPS ON
SWEEP CIRCUIT
DISABLE REFLECTION LAMPS (see Figure 3.22)
LAMP 1 CATHODES LAMP 2 CATHODES
REFLECTION LAMP 1 DETECTOR
OPTO DETECTOR
REFLECTION LAMP 2 DETECTOR
OPTO DETECTOR
Figure 3.24 Reflection lamps driver
Ballast Circuit
There are three ballast circuits (see Figure 3.23, Figure 3.24, and Figure 3.25), one for each of the transmission, reflection, and light-table lamps. The +320 V supply is chopped using a pair of MOSFETS arranged in a half bridge. The square wave is then passed through a ballast choke which limits the square wave current through the lamp. There are five ballast chokes, one for each lamp. In addition, a capacitor across each lamp is used to aid starting. When the lamp is switched on, the frequency of the VCO is swept downwards through the resonance of the ballast choke and capacitor. This causes a high initial voltage across the lamp to ensure efficient starting.
3-63
SET LIGHT TABLE CURRENT +18 V HEATER DRIVER +320 V
VCO FIXED FREQU
HALF BRIDGE
LIGHT TABLE LAMPS ON
SWEEP CIRCUIT
LAMP 1 CATHODES
LAMP 2 CATHODES
Figure 3.25 Light table lamps driver
3.4.7
Sensors Enlargement Datum Sensor

The enlargement-datum sensor (see Figure 3.26) is used to position the enlargement leadscrew drive to a known position at power-up. It is an accurate Hall-effect sensor mounted on the CCD carriage, operated by a metal vane attached to the lens carriage. Errors in the position of this sensor will result in images with the wrong size in one direction only; these errors can be corrected by re-calibration.
Focus Datum Sensor

The focus-datum sensor (see Figure 3.26) is used to position the focus rack-and-pinion drive to a known position at power-up. It is an optical sensor mounted on the X-slide carriage, operated by a
metal vane attached to the CCD carriage. Errors in the position of this sensor may result in preview scans being out of focus, but will not normally affect high-resolution scans as these use autofocus; such errors can be corrected by re-calibration.
PL1 DIGITIZER BOARD ENLARGEMENT DATUM SENSOR
FOCUS DATUM SENSOR
PL7
X-SLIDE DATUM SENSOR
PL6

SK2 X-SLIDE DISTRIBUTION BOARD TRAVERSE DISTRIBUTION BOARD PL3 PL2 SK3 SK4 SYSTEM BOARD
Figure 3.26 Flexicable sensor interconnections
X-Slide Datum Sensor

The X-slide datum sensor (see Figure 3.26) is used to position the X-slide leadscrew drive at a known position at power-up. It is an accurate Hall-effect sensor mounted on the main carriage, operated by a metal vane attached to the X-slide carriage. The datum position is near the middle of the X-slide motion. Errors in the position of this sensor may affect cropping of scans; this can be corrected by re-calibration.
3-65
Main Carriage Datum Sensor

The main-carriage datum sensor (see Figure 3.27) is used to position the main-carriage leadscrew-drive at a known position at power up. It is an optical sensor mounted on the base casting near the park end of the travel, operated by a metal vane attached to the main carriage. This sensor is used in combination with the encoder index pulse to provide an accurate datum position. Errors in the position of this sensor may, under some circumstances, cause gross errors in the alignment of overview scans to the clear area of the platen, which can be corrected by re-calibration.
MAIN COVER INTERLOCK LH DISPLAY BOARD PL1 LID INTERLOCK LH LID INTERLOCK RH MAIN COVER INTERLOCK RH
PL2 PL5 PL3 LH DISTRIBUTION BOARD CARRIAGE REVERSE LIMIT SWITCH CARRIAGE DATUM SENSOR PL4
PL6
ENCLOSURE FAN
PL1
PL4
PL3
RH DISTRIBUTION BOARD
PL5 PL2
PL6
PL1
SYSTEM BOARD (PL1) CARRIAGE FORWARD LIMIT SWITCH MAIN CARRIAGE MOTOR
SYSTEM BOARD (SK1)
Figure 3.27 Ribbon cable sensor interconnections
3-66
Main Carriage Limit Sensors

At each end of travel of the main carriage there is an over-travel sensor. These sensors (see Figure 3.27) disable operation of the electronic drive to the main servo-motor in the outwards direction only. For example, the sensor at the forward end of travel (ie. when the main carriage is moving from right to left) prevents further motion in that direction but allows travel in the reverse direction. This protects the machine against damage in the case of certain fault conditions, while still allowing it to recover itself. The over-travel sensors are optical sensors operated by the same vane on the main carriage that operates the carriage datum sensor.
3.4.8
Interlocks
The interlock system (see Figure 3.28) has been designed to protect the user and service engineer from mechanical and electrical hazards. The scanner has been designed so that all user and field service operations can be carried out without the need to override the interlocks. The interlock system associated with the lid is designed to prevent hazards due to the movement of the transmission lightbar above the platen. It disables the main servo-motor when the lid is open with the lightbar fitted. The interlock system associated with the main cover is designed to prevent hazards from the movement of the scanner mechanisms and the high voltages used to power the fluorescent lamps. It disables all of the motors and the main enclosure fan and removes the DC power from the lamp driver when the cover is open. The interlock system associated with the transmission lightbar prevents high voltages from appearing on the exposed connector face when the lightbar is removed. The safety interlocks operate through two relays fitted to the system board. The left-hand (looking from the back of the scanner) relay interrupts the current to the main servo-motor; the right-hand relay interrupts the 24 V supply to the lamp driver and the main enclosure fan and also disables the stepper-motor drive
3-67
circuits via logic on the system board. The relays have a red indicator to show when they are energised; for both relays the energised state is the state in which the corresponding motors can move.
+24 V MAIN COVER INTERLOCK SWITCHES +24 V
SERVO MOTOR DRIVER
PULL UP TO STEPPER MOTOR BRAKE LINES
TO LAMP AND FANS LEFT HAND RELAY SERVO MOTOR LID INTERLOCK SWITCHES 0V LIGHTBAR INTERLOCK SWITCH 0V RIGHT HAND RELAY +24 V +5 V
Figure 3.28 Interlock system
Two magnetic reed switches, fitted one each side of the main cover and wired in series, supply power from the 24 V supply to both relays. If the cover is open the reed switches are also open and both relays are released. Power to the left-hand relay is also wired through two magnetic reed switches, one on each side of the lid, and a mechanical switch fitted into the transmission lamp support column. For this relay to be energised, as well as the main covers being closed, either both of the lid interlock reed switches must be closed and/or the transmission-lamp column switch must be closed. The column switch is normally closed, and is forced open by the presence of a pin fitted to the transmission bar mounting plate, so that when the bar is present the switch is open. There are current sensing elements within the interlock circuits which enable the control software to monitor the state of the interlock switches, but the operation of the interlocks is completely independent of other circuits on the system board.
3.4.9
Display Board
The display board is mounted to the base casting at the front left of the machine. It provides a visual indication to the operator of the state of the scanner. The board contains three LEDs which are driven by the system board. Current-limiting resistors for the LEDs are on the system board. The display board is connected via a ribbon cable to the LH distribution board and from there via another ribbon cable to the system board. The display bezel which is part of the main cover uses light pipes to overcome problems with mechanical alignment. The functions of the three LEDs, from left to right are as follows:
Green LED for power on indicates +5 V supply present on

the system board. This LED is off in standby mode.
Yellow LED indicates when the scanner is ready and flashes

when busy scanning.
Yellow LED on during power on diagnostics and flashes if

diagnostics fails or flashes if a fault develops during normal operation. All of these LEDs are high intensity types so that they are clearly visible.
3.4.10
Distribution Boards
The distribution boards allow peripheral devices to be easily replaced in the field without disturbing the main wiring. There are four distribution boards in the scanner as follows:
LH distribution board - mounted on the base casting at the

left of the scanner,
RH distribution board - mounted on the base casting at the

right of the scanner,
Main-carriage distribution board - mounted on the main

carriage and is part of a flexicable distribution boards assembly,
3-69
X-slide distribution board - mounted on the X-slide carriage

and is part of the flexicable distribution boards assembly.
LH Distribution Board
This connects via a 15-way ribbon cable to the system board. The devices connected to it are as follows:
Enclosure fan, Display board, Main-cover LH interlock, Main-carriage forward-limit sensor.

PL3 PL4
PL1
PL5 PL2 LH DISTRIBUTION BOARD
PL6
RH Distribution Board
This connects via a 25-way ribbon cable to the system board. The devices connected to it are as follows:
Main-carriage datum sensor, Main-carriage reverse-limit sensor, Main-cover RH interlock, Lid interlocks.
3-70
PL3 PL4
PL5 PL1 PL2 PL6
Flexicable Distribution Boards Assembly

These are part of a complex flexicable assembly which interconnects via other flexicables to the system board. The devices connected to them are as follows:
X-slide motor, X-slide datum sensor, Lightbar interlock, Focus datum sensor.
Figure 3.29 Flexicable distribution boards assembly
3-71
3.5
Motion Control
3.5.1 Main Carriage Drive Mechanism
This mechanism comprises a DC servo-motor, with an attached encoder, which drives a leadscrew via a coupling. The leadscrew nut is clamped to the main carriage by a clamp plate. The leadscrew has a pitch of 8 mm. The servo motor produces 2000 clock pulses per revolution. Encoder Data A and Data B at 90 phase shift produce 8000 clock edges per revolution. This means, that for every encoder step of the motor, the leadscrew gives a linear motion of 1 micron. The main carriage drive has a datum sensor and two limit sensors which have been described earlier. The main carriage is supported by a pair of C bearings (located at the rear of the scanner) and a pair of wheels that are bridged by the differential focus bar (located at the front). The main carriage has a traversing length of about 540 mm, with a maximum velocity of 100 mm/s. In the operating state, there is no direct access to the drive mechanism. However, when access is required the main cover is opened and the interlocks are activated to remove power from the motor circuit.
Main Carriage Sensors

These sensors control the traversing limits and the actual position of the main carriage assembly. The servo motor is disabled if there is no possibility of access to the moving parts. That is when the:
main cover is open, lid is open and the lightbar is fitted.
3-72
Forward Limit Sensor

This sensor is located near to the servo motor and it is an opto-electric device that has its beam cut when the main carriage moves too far forward (i.e. toward the motor end of the main leadscrew) beyond the light-table removal position.
Reverse Limit Sensor

This sensor is another opto-electric device that has its beam cut when the main carriage moves too far back from the datum sensor (i.e. beyond the park position).
Datum Sensor
This sensor is located next to the reverse limit sensor, and is used at power up to find the actual position of the main carriage. The precise datum position is defined by the encoder. However, the datum sensor is needed because the encoder can only define the shaft position within one revolution of the servo motor.
3.5.2
Stepper Motor Control

Commutation sequencing is achieved by decoding two TPU channels inside an ISP to produce a half-step sequence to the stepper-motor driver. The mechanical system has been designed to avoid the use of holding currents to lock motor positions.
Ramping
Ramping has been implemented using the TPU microcode. This gives a maximum number steps in the ramp of 56 and it means that the motor must ramp up to full speed in 56 steps in
full-step mode (quarter of a rev) or 56 half steps in half-step mode (eighth rev). The maximum step rate is determined by the motor torque and the mechanism drag coefficients. Ramping is used when the stepper motor cannot achieve a high enough speed for the mechanism in one step. The maximum speed a mechanism can achieve in one step is called the pull-in speed. The maximum speed a mechanism can achieve when ramped is called the pull-out speed. Ramping is used to accelerate the mechanism from its pull-in speed to the required traversing speed. When the inertia of the motor load is high, the pull-out speed can be a lot higher than the pull-in. The default ramp profile has a constant acceleration rate from a starting rate that is less than the pull-in rate of the mechanism, to a slewing rate that is less than the pull-out rate of the mechanism. Note: To achieve a constant acceleration the acceleration ratio table is not linear. An algorithm to generate the ramp table for a linear acceleration has been implemented.
Software Limits
On power up the carriage will automatically traverse to the home sensor and achieve datum position. From then on the carriage travel limits will be defined by software for the full position range ( 160 mm from centre).
3-74
3.5.3
X-Slide Carriage Drive Mechanism

The X-slide drive mechanism comprises a stepper motor attached to the well of the main-carriage casting. This stepper motor drives a leadscrew via a clamp. The anti-backlash nut of the leadscrew is attached to the side of the X-slide carriage.
Figure 3.30 X-Slide leadscrew backlash nut
The X-slide leadscrew has a pitch of 4 mm. The stepper motor provides 400 steps per revolution of the leadscrew. This means, that for every step of the motor, the leadscrew will give a linear motion of 10 microns. The X-slide drive mechanism has a midpoint datum-sensor fixed to the well of the main-carriage casting. The sensor vane is fitted to the end of the X-slide carriage. This feature ensures that the X-slide drive datum position can be set to an accuracy of within 10 microns (see Section 3.4.7). The X-slide carriage is supported by a pair of C bearings that are located at the right-hand end and a single cam follower that is located at the left-hand end. A guide bar maintains the perpendicular movement. The maximum travel is +/- 12200 steps
3-75
away from the datum position. This translates to +/- 122 mm away from the datum sensor.
DS XSLIDE MOTOR FAST SCAN LENS SLOW SCAN PL6 PL4 DS CCD
SK1 30WAY
X-SLIDE DATUM SENSOR LEADSCREW
ENLARGEMENT DATUM SENSOR
MAIN CARRIAGE DISTRIBUTION BOARD ENLARGEMENT MOTOR
RACK
DIGITIZER
PL1 FAN PL2 PL3
SK1
FOCUS DATUM SENSOR
PL4 SK2 30WAY
FOCUS MOTOR
DS
X-SLIDE DISTRIBUTION BOARD
PL7
MAIN CARRIAGE DISTRIBUTION BOARD
Figure 3.31 Schematic of X-slide carriage interfaces
3.5.4
Enlargement Drive Mechanism

The enlargement-drive mechanism comprises a stepper motor which directly drives a leadscrew via a clamp. The anti-backlash nut is attached to the lens mount (see Figure 3.32). The enlargement leadscrew has a pitch of 4 mm. The stepper motor provides 400 steps per revolution. This means, that for every step of the motor, the leadscrew gives a linear motion of 10 microns.
3-76
Figure 3.32 Enlargement drive
The enlargement-drive mechanism has a datum sensor located just below the CCD baffle. The sensor vane is fitted to the rear of the lens mount. This feature ensures that the enlargement-drive datum can be set to an accuracy of within 10 microns (see Section 3.4.7). The maximum travel of the lens, away from the CCD mount, is 13,600 steps away from the datum position. This translates to 136 mm away from the datum sensor.
Table 3.1 Enlargement resolutions Resolution Horizontal enlargement @ 12 l/mm Vertical enlargement @ 12 l/mm Enlargement resolution Enlargement accuracy Image Quality 20% to 2000% 20% to 2000% 0.1% +/- 0.3%
3-77
3.5.5
Focus Drive Mechanism

The focus-drive mechanism comprises a stepper motor with a pinion meshed to a fixed rack that is fixed to the side of the X-slide carriage casting (see Figure 3.33). The rack is a ground helicoidal stainless-steel item, with a module of 0.4. The stepper motor provides 800 steps per revolution. This means, that for every step of the motor, the rack gives a linear motion of 15.7 microns.
FOCUS MOTOR PINION RACK
PL3
Figure 3.33 Focus drive mechanism
The focus-drive mechanism has a datum sensor fixed to the rear of the left-hand end of the X-slide carriage casting. The sensor vane is fitted to the rear of the CCD mount. This feature ensures that the focus-drive datum can be set to an accuracy of within 15.7 microns (see Section 3.4.7). The maximum focus travel is 15,400 steps away from the datum position. This translates to 241.78 mm away from the datum sensor. Both the CCD mount and the lens mount are traversed along a common camera guide rail which utilizes a linear recirculating ball-bearing system.
3-78
3.6
Structure
3.6.1 Introduction
The structure supporting the unit modules comprises four main load bearing sub-assemblies and several enclosures which cover the unit modules. These unit modules and enclosures are shown in Figure 3.34.
LID MAIN COVER
BASE AND PLATEN SUPPORT
ENCLOSURE FAN FILTER HOUSING STAND STAND COVERS
PEDESTAL
Figure 3.34 C-550 Lanovia scanner structure
3.6.2
Stand
The stand is that part of the structure which makes contact with the floor. The stand has four castors for moving the scanner and two adjustable feet for levelling the scanner when in position. The primary function of the stand is to support the pedestal and base. The stand does not form any part of the EMC protection.
3-79
Two stand covers are provided for an aesthetic effect.
3.6.3
Pedestal
The pedestal is that part of the structure which interfaces between the stand and the base. Its height determines a comfortable working level for the fixed platen. The pedestal does not form any part of the EMC protection. However, the RFI box is connected to an external ground connection through the main switch.
3.6.4
Base
The base is the major part of the structure because it supports all modules except those which are contained in the RFI box. The base has several functions which are as follows:
to support the main carriage guide rails and to maintain their

parallel relationship,
to support the main-carriage assembly which supports and

contains several sub-assemblies,
to support the fixed platen support sub-structure and to

maintain its parallel relationship to the main-carriage guide rails,
to support the main cover and its interlocks, to support the main carriage datum and limit sensors, to support the enclosure fan-filter housing, to house the following major electrical components: main-carriage servo-motor and its cable loom, standby switch and cable loom,
3-80
enclosure fan and cable loom, display board and ribbon cable, LH and RH distribution boards and their ribbon
cables,
50-way and 62-way flexicables.

The base does not form any part of the EMC protection.
Figure 3.35 Base and platen support
3-81
3.6.5
Platen Support
The platen support is that part of the structure which is mounted on to the base. The functions of the platen support are as follows:
to locate and support the fixed glass platen to maintain the

parallel relationship with the main carriage guide rails in both the vertical and horizontal planes,
to locate and support the lid and its interlocks, to provide a load base for the following items: originals and copyholders, 3D objects or bound books up to 4 kg in weight, to provide a load-bearing path through the base, pedestal, and
stand, for any loads placed upon the lid and main cover. The platen support does not form any part of the EMC protection.
3.6.6
Enclosure Fan Filter Housing

This housing encloses the filter which prevents the ingress of dust and dirt through the enclosure fan. Its functions are as follows:
to support a filter of adequate size, to position the filter at an adequate distance from the fan
blades, to ensure consistent cooling for the electrical components housed within the base, and within the main carriage assembly,
to allow for a quick removal of the filter for cleaning or

replacement. The filter housing does not form any part of the EMC protection.
3-82
3.6.7
Main Cover
The main cover encloses the scanning assemblies which are driven by electrical motors. The main cover does not enclose the fixed platen glass. Its functions are as follows:
to form a safety barrier between the operator and all moving

parts that are contained by the base and the main carriage assembly,
to protect the non-load bearing sub-assemblies, to provide the operator with an access path to the reflection
lamps and to the light-table lamps (that are contained underneath the fixed platen) for changing them,
to minimize any light spillage from the internal fluorescent

lamps,
to provide a suitable support for the reflection white-balance

strip,
to provide the customer-service engineer with an easy access

to the unit modules that may need to be replaced during the life of the scanner,
to protect the internal unit modules from the ingress of dust,

dirt, or moisture,
to provide suitable ventilation for the escape of any heat

generated by the internal electrical components. The main cover does not form any part of the EMC protection.
3.6.8
Lid
The lid encloses the lightbar assembly and covers the platen area Its functions are as follows:
to form a safety barrier between the operator and the moving

transmission scanning lightbar,
to minimize any light spillage from the transmission

fluorescent lamp,
to protect the platen glass and to minimize the amount of

falling dust and dirt. The lid does not form any part of the EMC protection.
3-84
4 Unit Replacement Procedures

This chapter provides a detailed description of each replaceable unit and any adjustments required.
4.1
Recommended List of Tools

The following tools may be required for the removal of certain replaceable units.
Range of metric ball-ended hexagonal wrenches (e.g. Allen

keys),
Range of metric open-ended spanners, Crosspoint screwdriver set, Flatpoint screwdriver set, Disposable antistatic wrist strap, Antistatic pliers, Engineers terminal and cable (Laptop PC with terminal
emulation software),
RS232 Terminal diagnostic cable, Digital multimeter with probes, Lightbar alignment target, Lightbar alignment tool, Differential focus target, System calibration target,
Electronic repro slide, Protrusion height ruler, Antistatic cleaning fluid, Repro wipes, Cotton buds, Latex disposable gloves, Squeeze bulb - without brush Lint-free cloth for general cleaning, Sable brush, VT Terminal or laptop, Glass polishing cloth, Selvyt cloth, Supports for the lid and main cover.
4.2
Preparation for Replacement Procedures

The term replacement always relates to the fitment of a new or different unit. This term does not relate to the re-fitment of the same unit as part of a complex replacement procedure. Before performing any of the following replacement procedures, make certain that the correct units and tools are available. Re-fit always relates to the fitment of the existing unit.
4-2
4.3
Replacement Procedures
Certain modules can be accessed and replaced without having to open the main cover. These are as follows:
Light bar assembly, Enclosure fan filter, Stand covers,. Lightbar interlock, RFI box components (modules), Lid assembly and its gas struts.
See Figure 4.1 for the hierarchical menu for reaching the relevant module to be replaced.
LEVEL-0 MODULES Lightbar Assembly Lightbar Interlock Stand Covers Enclosure Fan Filter System Board PSU RFI Box Fan Lid Assembly Mains Switch
Main-Cover Assembly LEVEL-1 MODULES
Reflection White Balance Strip
Standby Switch
Interlocks Sensors
Platen Light Table
Enclosure Fan Mirror
Reflection Column Assembly
LEVEL-2 MODULES
Main Leadscrew Drive
Lamp Driver Module
X-slide Carriage Assembly
Main Carriage Assembly
Figure 4.1 Service tree
4-3
The main cover must be opened before any of the Level 1 modules can be replaced. The light table must be removed before any Level 2 modules can be replaced. Once a faulty component has been identified, follow the relevant instructions to ensure a correct operation of the scanner: 1. Replace the module as described in the following sub-sections of this section. 2. Run terminal diagnostics (see Section 5.4) via the RS232 port to validate the elimination of the fault. 3. Perform the carriage alignment procedures when required (see Section 6.4.2 and Section 6.4.3). 4. Perform the system calibration procedures when required (see Section 6.5). 5. Perform the electronic repro test procedure (see Section 7.6) before handing the scanner back to the customer.
4-4
4.4
Lightbar Assembly
4.4.1 Lightbar
The following preparations must be made. Open the lid.
Removal Procedure
1. Unscrew the lightbar knob. 2. Lift the lightbar assembly and remove it from the interface plate of the reflection column.
Figure 4.2 Lightbar assembly
Replacement Procedure
Note: The term replacement always relates to the fitment of a new or different unit.
4-5
1. Slacken the four caphead screws securing the lightbar interface plate. 2. Fit the replacement lightbar assembly. 3. Loosely secure the lightbar knob. 4. Perform the lightbar alignment procedure (see Section 6.4.2). 5. Fully tighten the lightbar knob. 6. Close the lid.
4.4.2
Transmission Lamp
Figure 4.3 Transmission lamp
4-6
The following preparations must be made. 1. Open the lid. 2. Remove the lightbar assembly (see Section 4.4.1).
Lamp Removal Procedure

1. Turn lightbar assembly over to reveal the transmission-baffle plate. 2. Undo the four slotted captive screws. 3. Remove the transmission-baffle plate. 4. Rotate the lamp to align the electrical contact pins with the exit slots. 5. Lift out the transmission lamp.
Checking, Cleaning and Removing the Diffuser

1. An opal acrylic diffuser is attached to the inside of the transmission baffle. This must be checked for cleanliness and signs of deterioration. 2. With the baffle removed as described in the previous section, inspect the diffuser. 3. If dusty, brush both surfaces with an anti-static brush. 4. If the diffuser has deteriorated, replace it. a) Remove the old diffuser. It is attached with double-sided tape. b) Remove the protective backing from the strips of tape on the new diffuser. c) Attach the diffuser to the inside of the transmission baffle so that the window in the baffle is covered by the diffuser.
4-7
Lamp Replacement Procedure

1. Fit the replacement transmission lamp. Note: Ensure the lamp aperture is facing upward (i.e. toward the transmission-baffle plate). 2. Rotate the lamp to align the electrical contact pins with the entry slots. 3. Re-fit the transmission-baffle plate. 4. Fit the four slotted captive screws. 5. Re-fit the lightbar assembly (see Section 4.4.1). 6. Close the lid.
4.4.3
Transmission Lamp Detector Board
LAMP DETECTOR BOARD
Figure 4.4 Transmission lamp detector board
The following preparations must be made. 1. Open the lid.
4-8
2. Remove the lightbar assembly (see Section 4.4.1). 3. Remove the transmission lamp (see Section 4.4.2).
Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect cable plug. 2. Remove the 2 mm countersunk screw to release the lamp detector board. 3. Remove the plastic screw to release detector board baffle.
1. Fit screw to secure baffle to replacement lamp detector board. 2. Fit countersunk screw to secure replacement detector board. 3. Connect cable plug. 4. Re-fit transmission lamp (see Section 4.4.2). 5. Re-fit transmission baffle plate. 6. Re-fit the lightbar assembly (see Section 4.4.1). 7. Close the lid.
4-9
4.5
Lightbar Interlock
The following preparations must be made. 1. Open the lid. 2. Remove the lightbar assembly (see Section 4.4.1).
Figure 4.5 Lightbar interlock
CAUTION Do NOT attempt to adjust the lightbar interface plate.
Removal Procedure
1. Remove one capscrew retaining the keep plate. 2. Lift out cable connector, with its keep plate, from its slot.
4-10
3. Disconnect two wires from the interlock switch. 4. Remove two screws securing the interlock switch to its keep plate. Note: Retain the keep plate.
1. Fit two screws to secure the keep plate to the replacement switch. 2. Connect two wires to the new interlock switch. 3. Fit keep plate and secure with one capscrew. 4. Re-fit the lightbar assembly (see Section 4.4.1). 5. Close lid.
4-11
4.6
Reflection Tray and Transmission Column

HIGH VOLTAGE CONNECTOR
Figure 4.6 Reflection Tray and Transmission Column
Note: If the high-voltage connector is damaged the reflection-tray and transmission column assembly must be replaced using the procedure described below. The following preparations must be made. 1. Open the lid. 2. Remove the lightbar assembly (see Section 4.4.1). 3. Open the main cover.
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the plate support (6 screws), complete with the platen. 2. Remove the cover from the lamp-driver board. 3. Remove the light table, (see Section 4.16).
4-12
4. Disconnect the transmission and reflection connectors, PL1 and PL2 from the lamp-driver board. 5. Disconnect the 25-way D-type connector, SK1, from the lamp-driver board. 6. Disconnect the earth cable between the column assembly and the lamp-driver board. 7. Remove the two screws at the front of the reflection-lamp driver tray. 8. Remove the four, 5 mm Allen screws from the base of the column. 9. Move the camera head to the front of the scanner by rotating the X-slide leadscrew. 10. Remove the two black wires to the transmission-arm interlock switch from the cable guides cutting the tie-wraps where necessary. 11. Disconnect PL5 from the traverse distribution-board (transmission-arm interlock cable). 12. Lift off the complete reflection-tray and column assembly.
1. Fit the new reflection-tray and column assembly. 2. Tighten the four screws at the base of the column. 3. Connect the transmission-interlock cable to PL5 on the traverse distribution-board. 4. Re-fit the tie-wraps and position the cable under the cable guides. 5. Connect PL1 and PL2 to the lamp-driver board. 6. Connect SK1 to the lamp-driver board. 7. Connect the earth cable from the column assembly.
4-13
8. Check the full camera movement in all directions to ensure that there is no interference to the cables. 9. Re-fit the the light table. 10. Re-fit the plate support and platen. 11. Close the main cover. 12. Re-fit the transmission lightbar. 13. Perform the transmission-bar alignment as described in Section 6.4.2. 14. Remove the transmission lightbar. 15. Open the main cover. 16. Re-fit the transmission lightbar. 17. Align the reflection-tray assembly centrally under the transmission lightbar using the two screws at the rear of the reflection tray and two screws at the front of the tray. If necessary, remove the platen support to measure the alignment. 18. Remove the transmission lightbar. 19. Close the main cover. 20. Re-fit the transmission lightbar. 21. Check the scanner in all modes.
4-14
4.7
Stand Covers
There are no preparations to be performed.
Figure 4.7 Stand covers
Removal Procedure
1. Grasp the stand cover and pull upward to release the four velcro contact-pads.
1. Hold and align the replacement stand cover, then press downward to hold the velcro contact-pads.
4-15
4.8
Enclosure Fan Filter

There are no special preparations to be performed.
Figure 4.8 Enclosure fan filter
Removal Procedure
1. Undo two thumbscrews securing the lift-off hinged cover. 2. Remove cover from hinge points. 3. Unhook filter retainer clip. 4. Remove filter and clean if necessary.
1. Re-fit the cleaned filter or fit a replacement filter. 2. Re-hook the filter retainer clip. 3. Re-fit cover to hinge points.
4-16
4. Locate and finger-tighten the thumbscrews to secure filter cover.
4.9
RFI Box Modules

4.9.1 RFI Box Cover
Note: To disconnect the flexi and ribbon cables from the internal modules, it will be necessary to remove the RFI-box cover. There are no preparations to be performed.
Removal Procedure
Figure 4.9 RFI box - removing cover
4-17
1. Undo two captive screws using a 4 mm hexagonal wrench. 2. Grasp the RFI-box cover, lift and withdraw from the pedestal.
1. Present the replacement RFI-box cover and fit to the pedestal. 2. Secure the two captive screws.
4.9.2
System Board
The following preparations must be made. 1. If possible, save the system calibration data to the Macintosh or a floppy disk using Read Buffer as described in Section 7.3.5. Note: This step can be omitted if a previously saved calibration disk is available for the scanner. 2. Power off the machine at the supply and leave the mains lead connected to earth the machine.
SK1 PL1 SK2 SK3 SK4 SK5
RS232 DIAGNOSTICS
SW1
SCSI ADDRESS
PL2
PL3
SCSI & TERMINATOR CONNECTORS
PSU
Figure 4.10 System board
4-18
3. Remove the RFI box cover (see Section 4.9.1). 4. Put on the disposable antistatic wrist strap.
CAUTION The static energy in your body can destroy sensitive components on the printed circuit board.
CAUTION Do NOT pull on flexicables to remove their connectors. To do so will cause damage.
Removal Procedure
1. Affix the free end of the antistatic strap to a suitable earthing point. 2. Disconnect the SCSI interface cable. 3. Disconnect the SCSI terminator. 4. Remove sem screw, located above the SCSI terminator. 5. Disconnect the RS232 cable (if connected). 6. Remove the 3 mm Allen screw(s), to release the earthing strip of the 50-way flexicable. 7. Disconnect power connector (PL2) from the system board to PSU. 8. Disconnect the five connectors on the top of the RFI box. 9. Remove one sem screw securing system board below power connector PL2.
4-19
10. Remove three sem screws securing the bottom of the system board. 11. Remove three sem screws securing the top of the system board. Note: As these screws are released, hold the bottom of the system board to stop it from falling and pull it forward to ease it away from the RFI box.
1. Position the replacement system board in the RFI box. 2. Re-fit three sem screws to the top of the system board. Note: Do not tighten these screws until all the screws have been fitted. 3. Re-fit three sem screws to the bottom of the system board. 4. Re-fit one sem screw below power connector PL2. 5. Tighten all seven sem screws to secure the system board. 6. Re-connect the five connectors on the top of the RFI box. 7. Re-fit the 4 mm Allen screw to secure the earthing strip of the 50-way flexicable. 8. Re-fit power connector (PL2) from the system board to PSU. 9. Re-fit sem screw located above the SCSI terminator. 10. Re-connect the SCSI terminator. 11. Re-connect the SCSI interface cable. 12. Release the antistatic wrist-strap. 13. Re-fit the RFI box cover. 14. Switch on the system. 15. Use Write Buffer as described in Section 7.3.5 to restore the saved system calibration data from the Macintosh or a floppy disk..
4-20
4.9.3
Dongle for Sprint Operation

A dongle can be fitted to the Kicker system board to enable the Sprint enhancements. In the event of the dongle becoming damaged it will be necessary to return the dongle in order to obtain a replacement.
Removal Procedure
PL10
DONGLE
Figure 4.11 Removing and fitting the dongle
1. Power off the machine at the supply and leave the mains lead connected to earth the machine. 2. Remove the RFI box cover (see Section 4.9.1).
4-21
3. Put on the disposable antistatic wrist strap.
CAUTION The static energy in your body can destroy sensitive components on the system board and the dongle.
4. Carefully remove the dongle from the plug on the system board. See Figure 4.11.
Ensure that the power to the scanner is still off and that you are still wearing the disposable antistatic wrist strap. 1. Fit the dongle to PL10 on the system board, noting the orientation as shown in Figure 4.11. 2. Release the antistatic wrist-strap. 3. Re-fit the RFI box cover. 4. Switch on the system.
4.9.4
PSU and Cable Loom

The following preparations must be made.
CAUTION Make certain that the mains supply plug has been disconnected from the RFI box socket.
1. Isolate the mains power to the scanner.
4-22
2. Remove the mains supply cable from the RFI-box socket. 3. Remove the RFI-box cover (see Section 4.9.1).
Figure 4.12 WA 304 PSU and cable loom
4-23
Figure 4.13 Sirius 250 PSU and cable loom
Removal Procedure
1. Remove two sem screws securing the mains switch safety cover.
4-24
2. Remove plastic cover on the PSU by levering off (WA 304 only). 3. On the WA 304, unscrew the three mains wires from the input to the PSU. On the Sirius 250, pull off the Faston connectors from the filter on the PSU assembly. 4. Disconnect PL2 from the system board. 5. Undo the two sem screws securing the load resistor at the right-hand side of the RFI box (WA 304 only). 6. Cut the appropriate tie-wraps to free the RFI-box fan inline connector cable. 7. Disconnect the RFI-box fan inline connector. 8. Disconnect the standby switch inline connector. 9. Remove the four crosspoint screws from the underside of the RFI box. 10. Remove the PSU with its cable loom.
1. Position the replacement PSU within the RFI box. 2. Re-fit the four crosspoint screws to secure the PSU. 3. Fit and tighten two sem screws to secure the load resistor at the right-hand side of the RFI box (WA 304 only). 4. Connect the standby-switch inline connector. 5. Connect the RFI-box fan inline connector. 6. Connect PL2 to the system board. 7. Fit the tie-wraps to capture the RFI-box fan inline-connector cable. 8. Re-connect the three mains wires to the PSU input. 9. Re-fit the plastic protective cover to the PSU (WA 304 only). 10. Re-fit the mains switch safety cover and secure with two sem screws.
4-25
11. Re-fit the RFI box cover (see Section 4.9.1). 12. Re-connect the mains supply cable.
4.9.5
RFI Box Cooling Fan
INLINE CONNECTOR
Figure 4.14 RFI-box cooling fan
The following preparations must be made. 1. Isolate the mains power to the scanner. 2. Remove the mains supply cable from the RFI-box socket. 3. Remove the RFI-box cover (see Section 4.9.1).
4-26
Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the in-line electrical connector. 2. Cut tie-wrap below the cooling fan. 3. Remove the four machine screws and captive nuts to release the cooling fan. 4. Remove the cooling fan.
1. Position the replacement cooling fan. 2. Re-fit the four machine screws and captive nuts and in turn, tighten them in diagonally opposite pairs. 3. Re-connect the in-line electrical connector. 4. Fit a tie-wrap to suit. 5. Re-fit the RFI-box cover (see Section 4.9.1). 6. Re-connect the mains supply cable.
4.9.6
Main Power Switch

WARNING Make certain the mains supply to the scanner has been isolated.
1. Isolate the mains power to the scanner. 2. Remove the mains-supply cable from the RFI box socket. 3. Remove the RFI box cover (see Section 4.9.1).
4-27
Figure 4.15 Mains power switch
Removal Procedure
1. Remove two screws securing the switch cover. 2. Remove the switch cover. 3. Pull off the electrical wires from their tabs. 4. Squeeze the top and bottom barbs of the switch to allow its easement through the side of the RFI box.
1. Fit the replacement switch.
4-28
2. Push the electrical wires on to their tabs. 3. Re-fit the switch cover. 4. Re-fit the two screws to secure the switch cover. 5. Re-fit the RFI-box cover (see Section 4.9.1). 6. Re-connect the mains-supply cable.
4-29
4.10
Protective Covers and Gas Struts

4.10.1 Lid Gas-Struts
The following preparations must be made. 1. Open the lid. 2. Support the lid in the open position. Note: Support is required to maintain the lid in the open position once both gas struts are removed.
Figure 4.16 Lid gas-struts
Removal Procedure
Note: When the replacement of both gas struts is required, individually remove and replace each to maintain support to the lid.
4-30
Perform this removal procedure and Steps 1 to 4 of the replacement procedure for the first gas strut and then perform both procedures for the second gas strut. 1. +Use a small flatpoint screwdriver to remove the retaining circlip from the upper pin. 2. Release and lower the gas strut until it rests on the main cover. 3. Remove nut from its lower mount and remove the gas strut.
1. Fit replacement gas strut to its lower mount. 2. Fit and tighten nut. 3. Raise gas strut and fit to the upper bracket pin. 4. Fit the retaining circlip. 5. Remove the lid support. 6. Close the lid.
4.10.2
Lid Assembly
The following preparations must be made. 1. Open the lid. 2. Support the lid in the open position. Note: Support is required to maintain the lid in the open position once both gas struts are removed.
4-31
Removal Procedure
1. Use a small flatpoint screwdriver to remove the retaining circlip from the upper pin. 2. Release and lower the gas strut until it rests on the main cover.
Figure 4.17 Lid assembly
3. Unscrew two sem screws securing the upper bracket to the underside of the lid and lower the bracket. 4. Repeat Steps 1 to 3 for the other gas strut. 5. Remove lid assembly.
Note: Support is required to maintain the lid in the open position while both gas struts are being fitted. 1. Position the replacement lid-cover assembly. 2. Align the upper bracket to the underside of the lid. 3. Fit and tighten two sem screws to secure the upper bracket.
4. Raise the gas strut and fit to the upper bracket pin. 5. Fit the retaining circlip. 6. Remove the lid-cover support. 7. Repeat steps 2 to 5 for the other bracket and gas strut. 8. Close the lid.
4-33
4.11
Main Cover
Note: To access the internal parts of the scanner, it is necessary to open the main cover.
Figure 4.18 Opening the main cover
Open Procedure
1. Open the lid. 2. Remove the lightbar assembly (see Section 4.4.1). 3. Use a coin to twist and release the two latches of the main cover. Note: Make sure the lid is closed before opening the main cover. 4. Close the lid. 5. Lift the main cover to open.
4-34
Close Procedure
1. Close the main cover. 2. Open the lid. 3. Use a coin to twist and secure the two latches of the main cover. 4. Power on the scanner and workstation. 5. Check that the application software has initiated a reset of the scanners characteristics. 6. Fit the lightbar assembly (see Section 4.4.1). 7. Close the lid.
4.11.1
Reflection White-Balance Strip

There are no special preparations to be performed.
REFLECTION WHITE BALANCE STRIP
Figure 4.19 Reflection white-balance strip
4-35
Note: This self-adhesive strip is fitted to the underside of the main cover and is used to reflect the light from the Reflection lamps. The main cover has four markers produced in the mould. Two of the markers indicate the top and bottom extremes and the other two equidistant markers are centrally sited on the right.
Removal Procedure
1. Using a spatula, lift off the old white-balance strip. 2. Discard the removed strip. 3. Using isopropyl alcohol, remove any residual adhesive substances.
1. Place a thumbnail between the strip and its backing. 2. Lift off 25 mm of the backing and present the top edge to the top marker. 3. Make certain the strip is correctly aligned. 4. Apply pressure to the top edge, and gradually peel the backing as the strip is laid. 5. Make certain the strip is correctly positioned within its four markers. 6. Apply firm pressure to the surface of the strip to ensure it is correctly fixed.
4-36
4.11.2
Main-Cover Gas-Struts
The following preparations must be made. 1. Open the main cover (see Section 4.11). 2. Support the main cover in the open position.
Removal Procedure
Figure 4.20 Main-cover gas-struts
1. Unscrew two crosspoint screws securing the upper bracket to the underside of the main cover. 2. Lower the gas strut until it rests on the base structure. 3. Use small flatpoint screwdriver to remove the retaining circlip.
4. Remove the gas-strut pin and retain with the upper bracket. 5. Remove nut from the base structure end and remove the gas strut from its lower mounting plate. 6. Repeat Steps 1 to 5 for the other gas strut (if required to be removed).
1. Fit replacement gas strut to its lower mounting plate. 2. Fit and tighten nut. 3. Fit the upper bracket and the gas-strut pin. 4. Fit the retaining circlip. 5. Raise the gas strut to align the upper bracket with the underside of the main cover. 6. Fit two crosspoint screws to secure the gas strut to the main cover. 7. Repeat Steps 1 to 5 for the other gas strut (if removed). 8. Remove the main cover support. 9. Close the main cover (see Section 4.11).
4.11.3
Main-Cover Assembly
The following preparations must be made. 1. Open the main cover (see Section 4.11). 2. Support the main cover in the open position.
4-38
Figure 4.21 Main cover removal
Removal Procedure
1. Unscrew two crosspoint screws securing the upper bracket to the underside of the main cover. 2. Lower the gas strut until it rests on the base structure. 3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the other gas strut. 4. Remove the main cover support. 5. Close the main cover (see Section 4.11). 6. Remove the two hex bolts, one from each each end of the main cover. 7. Lift off the main cover with help from a second person.
1. Fit replacement main cover with help from a second person.
4-39
2. Fit and tighten the two hex bolts to secure the main cover. 3. Open the main cover (see Section 4.11). 4. Support the main cover in its open position. 5. Raise the gas strut to align the upper bracket with the underside of the main cover. 6. Fit two crosspoint screws to secure the gas strut to the main cover. 7. Repeat Steps 5 and 6 for the other gas strut. 8. Remove the main cover support. 9. Close the main cover (see Section 4.11).
4-40
4.12
Moving the Main Carriage

On power up, the software boot program automatically resets the main carriage to stop at the datum position. During certain removal and replacement procedures, it will be necessary to re-position the main carriage both before and after the mains supply has been isolated. There are three methods of moving the main carriage.
4.12.1
Workstation Diagnostics Method

This method must be performed before the mains supply has been isolated. 1. From the workstation display, see Figure 4.22, open the C-550 Lanovia Scanner Diagnostics folder.
2. Launch the C-550 Lanovia Scanner Diagnostics icon to obtain the workstation diagnostics display.
Figure 4.22 Workstation diagnostics display
3. Select the Scanner command from the Configuration menu (see Figure 4.23).
4-41
Figure 4.23 Carriage positions menu
4. Choose one of the following options: a) Park to re-position the carriage to the right-hand datum end. b) Camera Service to re-position the carriage at the left-hand end. c) Transit Fixing to re-position the carriage at a mid-point location.
4.12.2
Terminal Diagnostics Method

This method must be performed before the mains supply has been isolated. 1. Connect the RS232 serial cable to the diagnostics port, on the side of the RFI box. 2. Connect the VT100/laptop to the RS232 serial cable. 3. Power up the terminal to obtain the Main menu. 4. Select the mech service menu. 5. Choose one of the following options: a) camera_service - to re-position the carriage at the left-hand end. b) park - to re-position the carriage at the right-hand datum end. c) transit_fixing - to re-position the carriage at a mid-point location.
4-42
Figure 4.24 Mech - service menu
4.12.3
Mechanical Method
Figure 4.25 Moving the main carriage
This method shall be performed only when the mains power to the scanner has been isolated. 1. Grasp the main leadscrew and rotate it toward the front to move the carriage toward the left.
4-43
2. Grasp the rear right-hand corner of the main carriage and carefully apply sufficient pressure to move the carriage to a desired position on the left of its default position.
4-44
4.13
Safety Interlocks
4.13.1 Main Cover Interlocks
The following preparations must be made. 1. Position main carriage for Camera Service (see Section 4.12). 2. Open the main cover (see Section 4.11). 3. Remove seven self-tap screws to release the cable cover-plate. Note: It is only necessary to access the interlock-cable connector on the RH distribution board.
51 mm 51 mm 51 mm
Figure 4.26 Main cover interlocks
Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the appropriate interlock-switch cable, either from:
PL5 at the RH distribution board, or
4-45
PL3 at the LH distribution board.

2. Cut tie-wraps securing the cable loom. 3. Undo nut retaining the interlock switch. 4. Remove the interlock switch.
1. Fit the replacement interlock switch. 2. Adjust protrusion height (51 mm nominal above the machine face of the base casting) of switch (see Figure 4.26). 3. Connect the interlock switch cable, either to:
PL3 at the LH distribution board or PL5 at the RH distribution board.

PL3 PL4 PL3 PL4
PL5 PL1 PL5 PL2 LH DISTRIBUTION BOARD RH DISTRIBUTION BOARD PL6 PL1 PL2 PL6
4. Fit new tie-wraps. 5. Replace, if removed, cable cover-plate and secure with seven self-tap screws. 6. Close the main cover (see Section 4.11). Note: On power up, the interlock relay can be heard clicking, if the protrusion height has been correctly set, as the cover is raised.
4-46
4.13.2
Lid Interlocks
Note: Both of these interlocks are connected by a common cable loom which connects to PL6 at the RH distribution board. The following preparations must be made. 1. Position main carriage for Camera Service (see Section 4.12). 2. Open the main cover (see Section 4.11). 3. Remove seven self-tap screws securing the cable cover-plate.
4.5 mm
Figure 4.27 Lid interlocks
Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect PL6 to release the lid interlock-switch cable, from the RH distribution board.
4-47

PL3 PL4
PL5 PL1 PL2 PL6
2. Cut the tie-wraps securing the cable loom. 3. Undo nut retaining each interlock switch. 4. Remove both interlock switches.
1. Connect the lid interlock-switch cable, to PL6 at the RH distribution board. 2. Lay cable loom in the base well and secure with tie-wraps as required. 3. Fit the replacement interlock switch. 4. Adjust the protrusion height (4.5 mm nominal above the platen support module) of each switch (see Figure 4.27). 5. Fit the cable cover-plate and secure with seven self-tap screws. 6. Close the main cover (see Section 4.10). Note: On power up, the interlock relay can be heard clicking, if the protrusion height has been correctly set, as the cover is raised.
4-48
4.14
Platen
The following preparations must be made. 1. Position main carriage for Park (see Section 4.12). 2. Open the main cover (see Section 4.11).
Figure 4.28 Platen
Removal Procedure
1. Remove four crosspoint machine screws. 2. Lift the platen of its support mounts.
1. Fit replacement platen to the support mounts. Note: Make sure the platen is correctly positioned. 2. Fit and tighten four crosspoint machine screws. 3. Perform an overview scan of the entire platen.
4-49
4. If black lines appear around any of the edges perform the following calibration tests:
Carriage, X-slide, Enlargement, Offsets.
4-50
4.15
Reflection Lamps Assembly

4.15.1 Reflection Lamps
Note: An unbalanced pair of lamps, due to age or different batches, may cause variations in the quality of light. Always change both lamps to minimize any light variations. The following preparations must be made. 1. Position main carriage for Park (see Section 4.12). 2. Open the main cover (see Section 4.11).
CAUTION Do NOT attempt to adjust the reflection column interfaces. To do so will affect optical alignment.
REFLECTION TRAY BAFFLE
Figure 4.29 Reflection lamps assembly
4-51
Removal Procedure
1. Loosen the two outer thumbscrews. 2. Pull out the reflection-lamp tray to gain access to the inner lamp. 3. Loosen the two inner thumbscrews to release the tray baffle. 4. Remove the reflection-tray baffle. 5. Rotate the inner reflection lamp and remove from its holders. 6. Rotate the outer reflection lamp and remove from its holders.
LAMP DETECTOR BOARDS
Figure 4.30 Reflection lamp replacement
1. Fit and rotate the replacement inner lamp to secure it in its holders. Note: The aperture of each lamp must face toward the upper slot, in the tray baffle (see Figure 4.29), to allow the illumination of the underside of the platen.
4-52
2. Fit and rotate the replacement outer lamp to secure it in its holders. 3. Re-fit the reflection-tray baffle. Note: Make sure the cutout (see Figure 4.29) is facing the front of the scanner. 4. Tighten the two captive thumbscrews. 5. Close the reflection-lamp tray. 6. Finger-tighten the two outer thumbscrews. 7. Close the main cover (see Section 4.11).
4.15.2
Reflection Lamp Holders

The following preparations must be made. 1. Remove both reflection lamps (see Section 4.15.1).
Removal Procedure
1. Free the lamp holder from its support bracket. 2. Using a very small screwdriver push it up next to the wire on the inside to release each wire from the holder. They are held in by spring pressure.
1. Push the two wires into the replacement holder, making sure they are being correctly gripped. Note: Make sure the outer (red) insulation is well pushed into the lamp holder. 2. Fit the replacement holder into its support bracket. 3. Re-fit both reflection lamps (see Section 4.15.1).
4-53
4.15.3
Reflection Lamp Detector Boards

Note: Each reflection lamp has its own detector board. The following preparations must be made. 1. Remove both reflection lamps (see Section 4.15.1).
Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the relevant detector-board connector. 2. Remove countersunk screw to release the lamp-detector board. 3. Remove screw to release detector-board baffle.
1. Fit screw to secure baffle to replacement lamp-detector board. 2. Fit countersunk screw to secure replacement detector board. 3. Connect the detector-board connector. 4. Re-fit reflection lamps (see Section 4.15.1).
4.15.4
Mirror
4-54
DOWELS
Figure 4.31 Mirror
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the two hexagon wrench caphead screws, securing the mirror support casting to the main carriage. Note: Mirror bolts are accessible through the central slot of the reflection-lamp assembly. 2. Lift the mirror support casting off the two support posts. Note: The support casting sits on a round post at the rear and a diamond-shaped post at the front.
1. Position the replacement mirror by engaging the two dowels in the main-carriage casting. 2. Re-fit and secure the two hexagon wrench caphead screws, to secure the mirror support casting to the main carriage. 3. Close the main cover (see Section 4.11). 4. Perform the lightbar alignment procedure (see Section 6.4.2).
4-55
5. Perform the differential focus alignment procedure (see Section 6.4.3). 6. Perform system calibration procedures (see Section 6.5). 7. Perform electronic repro test procedures (see Section 7.6).
4-56
4.16
Light Table Assembly

Note: It is convenient to remove the light table to access the hidden modules. The following preparations must be made.
WARNING Hazardous voltages exist behind the lamp driver module cover. Make certain that the mains supply plug has been disconnected from the RFI box socket.
PL1
PL2
PL3
PL4
SK1
Figure 4.32 Light table assembly
1. Position main carriage for Camera Service (see Section 4.12).
4-57
2. Open the main cover (see Section 4.11). 3. Remove screw to release rear cover-plate from lamp-driver module.
Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect PL3 from the lamp-driver board. 2. Remove 2 sem screws from the rear. 3. Remove 2 sem screws from the front. 4. Lift the light table from the main carriage.
1. Position the light table on the main carriage. 2. Loosely re-fit 2 sem screws at the rear. 3. Loosely re-fit 2 sem screws at the front. 4. Tighten all sem screws when the light table is correctly fitted. 5. Re-connect PL3 to the lamp-display board. 6. Re-fit the lamp-driver module cover and secure with screw. 7. Close the main cover (see Section 4.11).
4.16.1
LT -Lamps
Note: An unbalanced pair of lamps, due to age or different batches, may cause variations in the quality of light. Always change both lamps to minimize any light variations.
4-58
The following preparations must be made. 1. Position main carriage for Camera Service (see Section 4.12). 2. Open the main cover (see Section 4.11).
Figure 4.33 LT lamps removal
Removal Procedure
1. Rotate the rear lamp and remove from its holders. 2. Rotate the front lamp and remove from its holders.
1. Fit and rotate to secure the rear replacement lamp in its holders. Note: Make sure the aperture of each lamp is facing toward the light table. 2. Fit and rotate to secure the front replacement lamp in its holders. 3. Close the main cover (see Section 4.11).
4-59
4.16.2
LT-Lamp Holders
The following preparations must be made before removing this part from the scanner. 1. Position main carriage for Camera Service (see Section 4.12). 2. Open the main cover (see Section 4.11). 3. Remove both lamps (see Section 4.16.1). 4. Remove screw to release rear cover plate from lamp-driver module.
Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect PL3 from the lamp-driver board. 2. Cut the tie-wrap close to the lamp holder. 3. Free the lamp holder from its support bracket. 4. Using a very small screwdriver, push it up next to the wire on the inside to release each wire from the holder. They are held in by spring pressure.
1. Push the two wires into the replacement holder, making sure they are being correctly gripped. Note: Make sure the outer, red, insulation is well pushed into the lamp holder. 2. Fit the replacement holder into its support bracket. 3. Re-connect PL3 to the lamp driver board. 4. Re-fit screw to secure rear cover plate to lamp-driver module. 5. Close the main cover (see Section 4.11).
4-60
4.17
Lamp Driver Module

WARNING Hazardous voltages exist behind the lamp driver module cover. Make certain that the mains supply plug has been disconnected from the wall socket.
1. Position main carriage for Camera Service (see Section 4.12). 2. Open the main cover (see Section 4.11). 3. Remove the light table (see Section 4.16).
PL1 PL2 PL3 PL4
SK1
Figure 4.34 Lamp driver module
4-61
CAUTION Do NOT pull on flexicables to remove their connectors. To do so will incur damage.
Removal Procedure
1. Move the X-slide carriage to the front of the scanner (see Section 4.20.1). Note: This step is performed to gain an easier access to the lamp-driver flexicable clamp and its securing screws. 2. Remove one screw to release the lid of the lamp-driver module.
PL1
PL2
PL3
PL4
SK1
3. Remove PL1 from the reflection-column connector. 4. Remove PL2 from the lightbar connector. Note: PL3 was disconnected during the removal of the light-table assembly. 5. Remove the two captive screws and disconnect SK1. 6. Pull out the wiring looms carefully. 7. Remove two clamp screws from the 37-way flexicable connector, to release the PL4 clamp plate. 8. Remove earth screw from flexicable. 9. Disconnect PL4. 10. Pass the PL4 flexicable carefully through the base slot of the lamp-driver module. 11. Remove two sem screws securing the lamp-driver module.
4-62
12. Remove lamp-driver module from the main carriage.
1. Position the replacement lamp-driver module. 2. Re-fit two sem screws to secure lamp-driver module to the main carriage. 3. Thread the PL4 flexicable carefully through the base slot of the lamp-driver module. 4. Re-connect PL4. 5. Re-fit the PL4 clamp. 6. Re-fit two clamp screws to the 37-way flexicable connector. 7. Position the wiring looms carefully. 8. Re-connect SK1. 9. Re-fit two captive screws to secure SK1. 10. Re-connect PL2 to the lightbar connector. 11. Re-connect PL1 to the reflection-column connector. 12. Re-fit earth screw to secure flexicable. 13. Re-fit screw to secure the lid of the lamp-driver module. Note: PL3 will be re-connected during the re-fitment of the light-table assembly. 14. Re-fit the light table (see Section 4.16). 15. Close the main cover (see Section 4.11).
4-63
4.18
Base and Structure Modules

4.18.1 Flexicable - 50-Way
The following preparations must be made. 1. Position main carriage for Camera Service (see Section 4.12). 2. Open the main cover (see Section 4.11). 3. Remove the light table (see Section 4.16). 4. Remove the RFI-box cover (see Section 4.9.1). 5. Move the X-slide carriage to the front of the scanner (see Section 4.20.1.
Removal Procedure
1. Remove sem screw securing the 50-way flexicable earth to the traverse distribution board. 2. Disconnect the 50-way flexicable plug from the traverse distribution board. 3. Lay flat the 50-way flexicable. 4. Remove the three sem screws to release the 50-way and 62-way well plate. 5. Move the carriage assembly to the Park position. 6. Remove two sem screws to release the 50-way flexicable from the well-plate in the base and structure assembly.
4-64
TRAVERSE DISTRIBUTION BOARD
Figure 4.35 Flexicables: 50-way and 62-way
7. Remove sem screw securing 50-way earth to the RFI box. 8. Remove two clamp screws from 50-way flexicable plug, at the system board. 9. Disconnect the 50-way flexicable plug from the system board. 10. Withdraw the 50-way flexicable carefully.
1. Feed and position the replacement 50-way flexicable. 2. Re-connect the 50-way flexicable plug to the system board. 3. Re-fit two clamp screws to secure 50-way flexicable plug, at the system board. 4. Loosely re-fit sem screw to secure 50-way earth to the RFI box.
4-65
5. Loosely re-fit two sem screws to secure the 50-way flexicable to well-plate in the base and structure assembly. 6. Loosely re-fit the three sem screws to secure the 50-way and 62-way well plate. 7. Re-connect the 50-way flexicable plug to the traverse distribution board. 8. Move carriage assembly to the Camera Service position. 9. Loosely re-fit sem screw to secure the 50-way flexicable earth to the traverse distribution board. 10. Check the alignment of all flexicables to avoid any distortion or any potential wear points. 11. Tighten all loose sem screws. 12. Re-fit the light table (see Section 4.16). 13. Re-fit the RFI box cover (see Section 4.9.1). 14. Close the main cover (see Section 4.11).
4.18.2
Flexicable - 62-Way
The following preparations must be made. 1. Position main carriage for Camera Service (see Section 4.12). 2. Open the main cover (see Section 4.11). 3. Remove the RFI box cover (see Section 4.9.1). 4. Remove the light table (see Section 4.16). 5. Move the X-slide carriage to the front of the scanner (see Section 4.20.1).
4-66
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the sem screw securing 50-way flexicable earth to the main-carriage distribution board. 2. Disconnect 50-way plug from the main-carriage distribution board. 3. Lay flat the 50-way flexicable. 4. Disconnect 62-way plug from the traverse distribution board. 5. Move the carriage assembly to the Park position. 6. Remove three sem screws to release the 62-way flexicable from the well-plate in the base and structure assembly. 7. Remove two clamp screws from 62-way connector, at the top of the RFI box. 8. Disconnect 62-way plug from the system-board socket. 9. Withdraw the 62-way flexicable.
CAUTION Do NOT tighten sem screws until all flexicables have been re-installed and correctly aligned in their supports.
4-67
To do so can cause later damage while the flexicables are moving in response to the carriages.
1. Feed and position the replacement 62-way flexicable. 2. Re-connect 62-way plug to system-board socket, at the top of the RFI box. 3. Re-fit two clamp screws to secure the 62-way plug. 4. Loosely re-fit three sem screws to secure the 62-way flexicable to well-plate in the base and structure assembly. 5. Re-connect 62-way plug to the traverse distribution board. 6. Re-connect the 50-way flexicable. 7. Loosely re-fit sem screw to secure the 50-way flexicable earth to the main-carriage distribution board. 8. Check the alignment of all flexicables to avoid any distortion or any potential wear points. 9. Tighten all loose sem screws. 10. Re-fit the light table (see Section 4.16). 11. Re-fit the RFI box cover (see Section 4.9.1). 12. Close the main cover (see Section 4.11).
4.18.3
Flexicable Distribution Boards Assembly

The following preparations must be made. 1. Position main carriage for Camera Service (see Section 4.12).
4-68
2. Open the main cover (see Section 4.11). 3. Remove the light table (see Section 4.16). 4. Remove the RFI box cover (see Section 4.9.1). 5. Move the X-slide carriage to the front of the scanner (see Section 4.20.1).
Figure 4.36 Flexicable distribution boards assembly
Removal Procedure
1. Remove two clamp screws securing the PL4 flexicable to the lamp-driver board. Note: The lamp-driver cover plate was removed during the light table removal procedure.
4-69
2. Disconnect PL4 flexicable. 3. Remove earth sem screw securing 50-way flexicable. 4. Remove 50-way flexicable plug. 5. Lay back 50-way flexicable. 6. Remove 62-way flexicable plug. 7. Lay back 62-way flexicable. 8. Disconnect PL7 to release the focus-datum sensor. 9. Disconnect PL6 to release the X-slide datum sensor. 10. Disconnect PL5 to release the lightbar interlock. 11. Disconnect PL4 to release the X-slide stepper motor. 12. Remove three remaining sem screws to release the traverse distribution board.
X SLIDE DISTRIBUTION BOARD
FOCUS DATUM PL7 SENSOR
DIGITIZER BOARD X-SLIDE DATUM SENSOR PL6 X-SLIDE STEPPER MOTOR LIGHTBAR INTERLOCK PL4 PL5 TRAVERSE DISTRIBUTION BOARD 50-WAY 62-WAY
SYSTEM BOARD
LAMP DRIVER BOARD
13. Disconnect SK2 flexicable. 14. Remove four 3 mm Allen screws to release the X-slide distribution board and flexicable support tray.
4-70
15. Withdraw the flexicable distribution-boards assembly.
PL1
SK2
SUPPORT TRAY
CAUTION Do NOT tighten sem screws, except for securing trays, until all flexicables have been re-installed and correctly aligned in their supports. To do so can cause later damage while the flexicables are moving in response to the carriages.
1. Feed and position the replacement flexicable distribution-boards assembly. 2. Re-fit and tighten four 3 mm Allen screws to secure the X-slide distribution board and flexicable support tray. 3. Re-connect the digitizer flexicable at SK2.
4-71
4. Loosely re-fit three sem screws to secure the traverse distribution board to the support tray. 5. Re-connect X-slide datum sensor at PL4. 6. Re-connect lightbar interlock at PL5. 7. Re-connect X-slide stepper motor at PL6. 8. Re-connect focus-datum sensor at PL7. 9. Re-connect the 62-way flexicable plug on the traverse distribution board. 10. Re-connect the 50-way flexicable plug on main-carriage distribution board. 11. Loosely re-fit sem screw to the 50-way flexicable earth. 12. Re-connect PL4 flexicable to the lamp-driver board. 13. Re-connect the lamp-driver flexicable earth and clamp screws securing the PL4 flexicable to the lamp-driver board. 14. Check the alignment of all flexicables to avoid any distortion or any potential wear points. 15. Tighten all loose sem screws. 16. Re-fit the light table (see Section 4.16). 17. Re-fit the RFI box cover (see Section 4.9.1). 18. Close the main cover (see Section 4.11).
4.18.4
Main Carriage Datum Sensor

The following preparations must be made. 1. Position main carriage for Camera Service (see Section 4.12). 2. Open the main cover (see Section 4.11). 3. Remove seven self-tap screws to release the cable cover-plate.
4-72

PL3 PL4
PL5 PL1 PL2 PL6
Figure 4.37 Main carriage datum and reverse limit sensors
Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect PL3 from the RH distribution board. Note: The datum sensor is on the left of the end-stop sensor, when looking in the well from the front. 2. Use a crosspoint screwdriver to remove self-tapping screw from the left sensor. 3. Remove sensor cable from the cable tidies in the well. 4. Withdraw the sensor and its cable.
1. Position the replacement sensor and its cable. 2. Re-fit self-tapping screw to secure the left sensor. 3. Re-fit sensor cable in the cable tidies. 4. Connect PL3 to the RH distribution board. 5. Re-fit cable cover-plate and secure with seven self-tap screws.
4-73
6. Close the main cover (see Section 4.11).
4.18.5
Main Carriage Reverse Limit Sensor

Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect PL4 from the RH distribution board (see Figure 4.37). Note: This limit sensor is on the right of the datum sensor, when looking in the well from the front. 2. Use crosspoint screwdriver to remove the self-tapping screw from the right sensor. 3. Remove sensor cable from the cable tidies in the well of the base assembly. 4. Withdraw the sensor and its cable.
1. Position the replacement sensor and its cable. 2. Re-fit self-tapping screw to secure the right sensor. 3. Fit the new sensor cable into the cable tidies in the well of the base assembly.
4-74

PL3 PL4
PL5 PL1 PL2 PL6
4. Connect PL4 to the RH distribution board. 5. Re-fit cable cover-plate and secure with seven self-tap screws. 6. Close the main cover (see Section 4.11).
4.18.6
Main Carriage Forward Limit Sensor

PL3
PL4
PL1
PL6
Figure 4.38 Main carriage left-end limit sensor
4-75
Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect PL4 from the LH distribution board. 2. Use a crosspoint screwdriver to remove self-tapping screw from the sensor. 3. Cut tie-wraps to free the sensor cable. 4. Withdraw the sensor and its cable.
1. Position the replacement sensor and its cable. 2. Re-fit self-tapping screw to secure the sensor. 3. Fit tie-wraps to secure the sensor cable. 4. Connect PL4 to the LH distribution board. 5. Close the main cover.
4.18.7
Standby Switch
Removal Procedure
1. Pull off the two fast-on connectors from the switch. 2. Squeeze the two barb, one at each end, and push the body of the switch downward through its mounting plate.
4-76
Figure 4.39 Standby power switch
1. Fit the replacement switch. 2. Fit the two fast-on connectors. 3. Re-fit cable cover-plate and secure with seven self-tap screws. 4. Close the main cover (see Section 4.11).
4.18.8
Standby Switch Cable

4-77
2. Open the main cover (see Section 4.11). 3. Remove the RFI box cover (see Section 4.9.1). 4. Remove seven self-tap screws to release the cable cover-plate.
Removal Procedure
5. Disconnect the standby switch plug. Note: The standby switch cable is situated in front of the 15-way ribbon cable, on top of the RFI box. 6. Pull off the two fast-on connectors from the standby switch terminals. 7. Remove cable from the cable tidies in the well. 8. Withdraw standby switch cable.
1. Fit the replacement standby switch cable in the cable tidies. 2. Connect the two fast-on connectors to the standby switch terminals. 3. Connect the standby switch plug to the system-board socket on top of the RFI box. 4. Fit tie-wraps to suit. 5. Re-fit cable cover-plate and secure with seven self-tap screws. 6. Close the main cover (see Section 4.11). 7. Re-fit the RFI box cover (see Section 4.9.1).
4-78
4.18.9
Display Board
Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect PL1 from the display board. 2. Squeeze, in turn, each pair of barbs and ease the board off its four Nylon standoffs.
1. Fit the replacement display board. 2. Re-connect PL1 to the display board. 3. Close the main cover (see Section 4.11).
4.18.10 Display Board Ribbon Cable

Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect PL1 at the display board. 2. Unclip the 10-way ribbon cable from the cable clips.
4-79
3. Disconnect PL2 from the LH distribution board. 4. Withdraw 10-way ribbon cable.
PL3 PL4
PL1
PL6
Figure 4.40 Display board
1. Position the replacement 10-way ribbon cable. 2. Connect cable plug to PL2 on the LH distribution board. 3. Connect PL1 to the display board. 4. Fit 10-way ribbon cable in the cable clips. 5. Close the main cover (see Section 4.11).
4.18.11 LH Distribution Board

4-80

PL3 PL4
PL1
PL5 PL2
PL6
Figure 4.41 LH distribution board
Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect PL1, PL2, PL3, PL4, and PL6. Note: PL5 is a spare connector. 2. Squeeze, in turn, each pair of barbs and ease the board off its four Nylon standoffs.
1. Fit the replacement board to its four Nylon standoffs. 2. Re-connect PL1, PL2, PL3, PL4, and PL6. 3. Close the main cover (see Section 4.11).
4.18.12 LH Ribbon Cable

4-81
3. Remove the RFI box cover (see Section 4.9.1).
Removal Procedure
1. Unclip and disconnect PL6 from the LH distribution board. 2. Unclip the ribbon cable. 3. Move carriage to the Camera Service position. 4. Remove seven self-tap screws to release the cable cover-plate. 5. Remove two clamp screws securing the 25-way cable plug. Note: The LH ribbon cable is situated to the right of the 15-way ribbon cable, on top of the RFI box. 6. Disconnect the 25-way ribbon cable plug from the system board. 7. Withdraw 25-way ribbon cable from the well.
1. Position the replacement LH ribbon cable. 2. Connect the 25-way ribbon cable plug to the system-board socket. 3. Move carriage to the Park position. 4. Connect PL6 to the LH distribution board. 5. Re-clip the ribbon cable. 6. Move carriage to the Camera Service position. 7. Re-fit cable cover-plate and secure with seven self-tap screws. 8. Close the main cover (see Section 4.11). 9. Re-fit the RFI box cover (see Section 4.9.1).
4-82
4.18.13 RH Distribution Board

Removal Procedure
1. Unclip and disconnect PL1. Note: PL2 is a spare connector. 2. Disconnect PL3, PL4, PL5, and PL6. 3. Squeeze, in turn, each pair of barbs and ease the board off its four Nylon standoffs.
PL3 PL4
PL5 PL1 PL2 PL6
Figure 4.42 RH distribution board
1. Fit the replacement board to its four Nylon standoffs. 2. Re-connect and clip PL1.
3. Re-connect PL3, PL4, PL5, and PL6. 4. Re-fit seven self-tap screws to secure the cable cover-plate. 5. Close the main cover (see Section 4.11).
4.18.14 RH Ribbon Cable

The following preparations must be made. 1. Position main carriage for Camera Service (see Section 4.12). 2. Open the main cover (see Section 4.11). 3. Remove the RFI box cover (see Section 4.9.1). 4. Remove seven self-tap screws to release the cable cover-plate.
Removal Procedure
1. Unclip and disconnect PL1 from the RH distribution board. 2. Unclip 15-way ribbon cable. 3. Remove two clamp screws securing the 15-way cable plug. Note: The RH ribbon cable is situated to the left of the 25-way ribbon cable, on top of the RFI box. 4. Disconnect the 15-way ribbon cable plug from the top of the system board. 5. Withdraw 15-way ribbon cable from the well.
1. Position the replacement RH ribbon cable. 2. Connect the 15-way ribbon cable plug to the system-board socket.
3. Connect PL1 to the RH distribution board. 4. Re-clip the ribbon cable. 5. Re-fit seven self-tap screws to secure the cable cover-plate. 6. Close the main cover (see Section 4.11). 7. Re-fit the RFI box cover (see Section 4.9.1).
4.18.15 Enclosure Fan

PL3 PL4
PL1
PL6

Removal Procedure
Figure 4.43 Enclosure fan
1. Remove the enclosure fan filter (see Section 4.8). 2. Disconnect PL1 from the LH distribution board. 3. Remove three nuts, with a 3 mm spanner, securing the mounting plate.
4-85
4. Remove the mounting plate with the fan from the A/V mounts. 5. Remove four screws, with a 5 mm hexagon wrench, to remove the fan from its mounting plate.
1. Fit the replacement fan to the mounting plate and secure with four screws. 2. Fit the mounting plate with the fan to the A/V mounts. 3. Fit and tighten the three 5 mm nuts to secure the mounting plate. 4. Connect PL1 to its socket on the LH distribution board. 5. Re-fit the enclosure fan filter (see Section 4.8). 6. Close the main cover (see Section 4.11).
4-86
4.19
Main Leadscrew Assembly

4.19.1 Leadscrew Nut Clamp Plate
Note: This item is not a replaceable unit, however, it is necessary to remove it to free the main carriage from its leadscrew. The following preparations must be made. 1. Position main carriage for Camera Service (see Section 4.12). 2. Open the main cover (see Section 4.11). 3. Remove the light table (see Section 4.16). 4. Re-position the main carriage to a suitable mid-point by mechanically turning the leadscrew (see Section 4.12.3).
Figure 4.44 Leadscrew nut clamp plate
4-87
Removal Procedure
1. Use a 10 mm spanner to release lock nut. 2. Undo M6 grub screw to release the clamp plate. 3. Lift out the leadscrew-nut clamp plate.
1. Re-fit the leadscrew-nut clamp plate. Note: Make sure the slot of the clamp plate is seated behind the bolt, that the fork is entrapping the leadscrew nut, and the nut flange is located in the step of the bracket. 2. Finger-tighten the M6 grub screw. 3. Push main carriage toward the servo motor, as near as possible to the bearing block, without touching the the end stop.
END STOP BEARING BLOCK
4. Release and lock the M6 grub screw a second time. 5. Fit 3 mm key and further tighten the M6 grub screw by one full turn. 6. Use a 10 mm spanner to tighten the lock nut. 7. Re-fit the light table (see Section 4.16). 8. Close the main cover (see Section 4.11).
4-88
4.19.2
Main Carriage Leadscrew

The following preparations must be made. 1. Remove leadscrew clamp-plate (see Section 4.19.1).
Removal Procedure
REGISTER FACE
COUPLING SCREWS (2 OFF)
M4 PANHEAD SCREWS
Figure 4.45 Main carriage leadscrew
1. Slacken the two screws on the end of the coupling nearest to the leadscrew drive. 2. Remove three M4 panhead screws and three flat washers from the bearing block. 3. Remove two M6 caphead screws to release the right-hand end-bearing bracket. 4. Grasp both ends of the leadscrew and carefully ease it out of its coupling and bearing bracket. 5. Gently lay the released end of the leadscrew in the well. 6. Lift up the end-bearing bracket and carefully remove it from the leadscrew drive. 7. Gently lay the right-hand end of the leadscrew in the well.
4-89
8. Push main carriage toward the servo motor, as near as possible to the bearing block, without touching the end stop. 9. Grasp the right-hand end of the leadscrew, lift and carefully withdraw it toward the right-hand end.
CAUTION Be careful to avoid any contact with the base and structure or any other components.
1. Grasp the right-hand end of the replacement leadscrew, present and carefully insert it toward the left-hand end. 2. Gently lay the leadscrew in the well. 3. Fit the leadscrew drive to the end-bearing bracket. Note: Do not fix the end-bearing bracket at this time. 4. Push main carriage to a suitable mid-point. 5. Grasp both ends of the leadscrew and carefully present it to the bearing bracket and to the leadscrew coupling.
CAUTION Be careful to avoid any compression of the leadscrew coupling.

6. Position the bearing block in the well of the base and push it hard up against the register face (see Figure 4.45), and tighten the two M6 caphead securing screws. 7. Fit and secure three panhead screws and three flat washers to the bearing block.
4-90
8. Tighten two caphead screws on the coupling nearest to the leadscrew drive. Note: Make sure that the coupling is NOT compressed. 9. Re-fit the leadscrew clamp-plate (see Section 4.19.1). 10. Re-fit the light table (see Section 4.16). 11. Close the main cover (see Section 4.11). 12. Open the lid. 13. Perform the system calibration tests (see Section 6.5). 14. Perform the electronic repro test (see Section 7.6).
4.19.3
Main Leadscrew Motor

The following preparations must be made. 1. Remove the RFI box cover (see Section 4.9.1). 2. Move the main carriage to Park position (see Section 4.12).
Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect leadscrew motor cable from top of RFI box. 2. Cut the three tie-wraps. 3. Withdraw the motor cable loom from the base well. 4. Slacken two caphead screws on the coupling nearest to the leadscrew motor. 5. Position a 3 mm hex-headed driver through one of the two special access holes in the coupling-bearing bracket opposite the motor end and remove the first screw securing the motor. 6. Repeat Step 4 and remove the second screw securing the motor.
4-91
Figure 4.46 Main leadscrew motor and coupling
7. Grasp the body of the leadscrew motor and carefully ease it out of its coupling and bearing bracket.
1. Grasp the body of the leadscrew motor and carefully present it to the bearing bracket and coupling.
CAUTION Be careful to avoid any compression of the leadscrew coupling.

2. Position a 3 mm hex-headed driver through one of the two special access holes in the coupling-bearing bracket opposite the motor end and re-fit the first screw securing the motor. 3. Repeat Step 2 and re-fit the second screw securing the motor. Note: Make sure the coupling is not compressed.
4-92
4. Lay out the motor cable loom in the base well. 5. Connect the leadscrew-motor cable to top of RFI box. 6. Fit three tie-wraps to secure the cable loom. 7. Re-fit the light table (see Section 4.16). 8. Close the main cover (see Section 4.11). 9. Open the lid. 10. Perform the system calibration tests (see Section 6.5). 11. Perform the electronic repro test (see Section 7.6).
4.19.4
Main Leadscrew Coupling

The following preparations must be made. 1. Remove the main leadscrew motor (see Section 4.19.3). 2. Remove the Main leadscrew (see Section 4.19.2).
Removal Procedure
3. Remove the leadscrew coupling.
1. Lay replacement leadscrew coupling in the coupling-bearing bracket. Note: Make sure the 6 mm coupling faces the leadscrew and the 8 mm coupling faces the motor. 2. Re-fit the main leadscrew (see Section 4.19.2). Note: Make sure the coupling is pushed as far as possible onto the leadscrew.
4-93
3. Re-fit main leadscrew motor (see Section 4.19.3). 4. Re-fit leadscrew clamp-plate (see Section 4.19.1). 5. Re-fit the light table (see Section 4.16). 6. Close the main cover (see Section 4.11). 7. Open the lid. 8. Perform the system calibration tests (see Section 6.5). 9. Perform the electronic repro test (see Section 7.6).
4.19.5
C-Bearing Assembly
The following preparations must be made. 1. Position main carriage for Park (see Section 4.12). 2. Power down the scanner. 3. Remove the main cover assembly (see Section 4.11.3). 4. Remove the three M5 caphead screws to release the rear cover plate. 5. Remove leadscrew clamp-plate (see Section 4.19.1).
Figure 4.47 C-bearing assembly
4-94
Removal Procedure CAUTION Do not use metallic materials to support the main carriage.
1. Remove one C-bearing clamp screw. 2. Use a suitable hardwood block to support the main carriage. Note: While both C-bearings should be replaced as a balanced pair, remove only one bearing at a time. Leave the other bearing to help support the main carriage with the hardwood block, until the new bearing has been fitted. 3. Slide the bearing out of the bearing block, move to end of guide and remove.
Replacement Procedure CAUTION Use a new pair of bearings to avoid differences in tolerance and wear. Special care must be taken to ensure each bearing is correctly set up while securing it.
1. Slide a replacement bearing over one end of guide into the bearing block, ensuring that the positioning recess is toward the clamp-screw hole.
4-95
2. Correctly locate the C-bearing in the bearing block by inserting a 2.5 mm Allen key into the retaining-screw hole to locate the positioning recess on the C-bearing. 3. Fit the screw to clamp C-bearing. Do not over-tighten. 4. Follow the removal procedure to remove the other C-bearing, and follow the replacement procedure to fit new bearing.
POSITIONING RECESS
ALLEN KEY
Figure 4.48 C-bearing alignment
5. Re-fit leadscrew clamp-plate (see Section 4.19.1). 6. Re-fit the three M5 caphead screws to secure the rear cover plate. 7. Re-fit the main-cover assembly (see Section 4.11.3). 8. Open the lid. 9. Perform the system calibration tests (see Section 6.5). 10. Perform the electronic repro test (see Section 7.6).
4.19.6
Fit Front Transit Fixing

1. Retrieve the front transit fixing, the M8 buttonhead screw, and the two M6 caphead screw from the well of the base assembly.
4-96
2. Position the transit fixing (see Figure 4.49) and loosely fit the two M6 caphead screws.
CAUTION Do not tighten these screws.

3. Re-position the main carriage, as required, by mechanically turning the leadscrew (see Section 4.12.3) to align the threaded hole with the transit fixing. 4. Place shims under the front wheel bearings. 5. Fit the M8 buttonhead screw through the transit fixing and into the threaded hole on the side of the main carriage. 6. Using a 5 mm Allen key to tighten the M8 screw, and secure the front transit fixing to the main carriage.
CAUTION Make sure the transit fixing is fully butted to the main carriage.
7. Use a 5 mm key to tighten the two M6 caphead screws to secure the transit fixing to the base assembly.
4.19.7
Remove Front Transit Fixing

1. Remove the two M6 caphead screws to loosen the transit fixing. 2. Slacken the M8 buttonhead screw. 3. Withdraw the front transit fixing.
CAUTION Place all screws with the transit fixing in a safe place.
4.19.8
Main Carriage Wheel Bearings

Two variants of the carriage have been made. The earlier type had two wheels, the later type has only one.
Two-Wheel Carriage
CAUTION Use a matched pair of wheels to avoid differences in tolerance and wear.
1. Position main carriage for Camera service (see Section 4.12). 2. Open the main cover (see Section 4.11). 3. Remove the light table (see Section 4.16). 4. Position main carriage for Transit fixing.
TRANSIT FIXING
Figure 4.49 Main carriage wheels
4-98
CAUTION Do NOT attempt to adjust the differential focus module. To do so will change the delicate alignments.
Removal Procedure
1. Fit front transit fixing to support the main carriage (see Section 4.19.6). 2. Undo and remove wheel nut with 10 mm spanner. 3. Remove flat washer. 4. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for the other carriage wheel.
1. Fit flat washer over carriage wheel boss. 2. Fit and tighten wheel nut with 10 mm spanner. 3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the other carriage wheel. 4. Remove front transit fixing from the main carriage (see Section 4.19.7). 5. Re-fit the light table (see Section 4.16). 6. Close the main cover (see Section 4.11). 7. Perform the diff_focus alignment procedure (see Section 6.4.3). 8. Perform the electronic repro test (see Section 7.6). 9. Close the main cover (see Section 4.11).
4-99
One-Wheel Carriage
The following preparations must be made. 1. Position main carriage for Camera service (see Section 4.12). 2. Open the main cover (see Section 4.11). 3. Remove the light table (see Section 4.16). 4. Position main carriage for Transit fixing.
Figure 4.50 Main carriage wheel
Removal Procedure
1. Fit front transit fixing to support the main carriage (see Section 4.19.6). 2. Undo and remove wheel nut with 13 mm spanner. 3. Remove flat washer.
4-100
1. Fit flat washer over carriage wheel boss. 2. Fit and tighten wheel nut with 13 mm spanner. 3. Remove front transit fixing from the main carriage (see Section 4.19.7). 4. Re-fit the light table (see Section 4.16). 5. Close the main cover (see Section 4.11). 6. Perform the diff_focus alignment procedure (see Section 6.4.3). 7. Perform the electronic repro test (see Section 7.6). 8. Close the main cover (see Section 4.11).
4.20
X-Slide Carriage Assembly

This assembly carries the camera head, CCD mount, digitizer module, lens mount, focus motor, enlargement motor and drive and almost everything else, including sensors. The X-slide carriage uses a motorized leadscrew to move bi-directionally between the front and rear of the scanner, depending upon the position of the copy on the platen. The lens mount uses a motorized pinion to move bi-directionally - left to right - along a fixed rack and is mounted on the X-slide carriage. The CCD mount uses a motorized pinion to move bi-directionally - left to right - along a rotating leadscrew and is mounted on the X-slide carriage.
4-101
4.20.1
Moving the X-Slide Carriage

On power up, the software boot program automatically resets the X-slide carriage to rest at the datum position which is at the midpoint of its traversing range.
Figure 4.51 Moving the X-slide carriage
During certain removal and replacement procedures, it will be necessary to re-position the X-slide carriage while the mains supply has been isolated. The acceptable method of moving the X-slide carriage, without causing any problems, is as follows:
Grasp the X-slide leadscrew and clockwise rotate it to move

the carriage toward the front.
4.20.2
Moving the Lens Mount

On power up, the software boot program automatically resets the lens mount to rest at its datum position which is at the left-hand end of the enlargement leadscrew.
4-102
During certain removal and replacement procedures, it will be necessary to re-position the lens mount while the mains supply has been isolated. The acceptable method of moving the lens mount is as follows:
Grasp the enlargement leadscrew and rotate it toward the

front to move the lens mount toward the left.
Figure 4.52 Moving the lens mount
4.20.3
Moving the CCD Mount

On power up, the software boot program automatically resets the CCD mount to rest at its datum position which is at the left-hand end of the focus rack. During certain removal and replacement procedures, it will be necessary to re-position the CCD mount while the mains supply has been isolated. The acceptable method of moving the CCD mount is as follows:
Carefully push the CCD mount to a desirable position.
4-103
Figure 4.53 Moving the CCD mount
4.20.4
X-Slide Carriage
CAM FOLLOWER BRACKET
RAIL GUIDE
Figure 4.54 X-slide leadscrew nut
2. Open the main cover (see Section 4.11). 3. Remove the light table (see Section 4.16). 4. Move the X-slide carriage toward the centre (see Section 4.20.1).
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the digitizer SK2 flexicable connector. 2. Disconnect PL7 from the X-slide distribution board to release the focus datum sensor cable. Note: Do not cut the tie-wrap. 3. Remove the four caphead screws, springs and standoffs to release the digitizer flexicable support tray and X-slide distribution board. 4. Remove the three caphead screws to release the X-slide leadscrew nut. 5. Push the X-slide carriage toward the rear. Note: Movement should be just sufficient for the carriage to clear the leadscrew nut. 6. Remove the two caphead screws to release the front X-slide bearing block. 7. Remove the two caphead screws to release the rear X-slide bearing block. 8. Grasp the X-slide carriage, lift carefully, move slightly to the left to allow the cam follower bracket to clear its rail guide (see Figure 4.54), and then withdraw the carriage away from the right-hand bearings and leadscrew. Note: The above step is performed from the front of the scanner. 9. Place the X-slide carriage on a suitable surface. Note: The surface should be in a position where the carriage will not suffer from any probable damage.
4-105
CAUTION Special care must be taken to ensure each bearing is correctly set up while securing it.
1. Grasp the X-slide carriage and position it over the bearings and leadscrew, ensuring the cam-follower bracket is under the guide rail. 2. Re-fit and tighten two caphead screws to secure the rear X-slide bearing block. Note: See Figure 4.55 to correctly align each bearing block.
Figure 4.55 X-slide bearing alignment
3. Re-fit tighten two caphead screws to secure the front X-slide bearing block. 4. Pull the X-slide carriage toward the front.
4-106
Note: Movement should be just sufficient for the carriage to connect with the leadscrew nut. 5. Re-fit and tighten the three caphead screws to secure the leadscrew nut. 6. Re-fit and tighten the three caphead screws, springs, and standoffs to secure the digitizer flexicable support-tray. Note: Make sure the flexicable is correctly aligned. 7. Re-fit PL7 to connect the focus datum-sensor cable. 8. Re-connect SK2 to the digitizer. 9. Re-fit the light table (see Section 4.16). 10. Close the main cover (see Section 4.11). 11. Open the lid. 12. Download the system-calibration data from the floppy disk which is supplied with the replacement X-slide carriage. The data comprises information on bad pixels and the CCD type. Use the Write Buffer procedure in Section 7.3.5 to download the data. 13. Perform only the following system calibration tests:
Carriage, X-slide, Enlargement, Offsets, Copyholder (only if required).

See Section 6.5. 14. Perform the electronic repro test (see Section 7.6).
4-107
4.20.5
X-slide Carriage Bearings Assembly

The following preparations must be made. 1. Remove the X-slide carriage (see Section 4.20.4).
Removal Procedure
1. Remove six hex-drive caphead screws to release the X-slide carriage guide bar assembly. 2. Slide both bearings off the released guide bar assembly.
Figure 4.56 X-slide carriage bearing on guide bar assembly
CAUTION Use a matched pair of bearings to avoid differences in tolerance and wear.
4-108
Note: The guide bar assembly has three shaped cutouts for locating dowels on the main carriage casting. 1. Fit both replacement bearings to the guide bar assembly. Note: Make sure the stepped shoulder of each bearing faces the lens.
DOWEL
Figure 4.57 X-slide guide bar alignment
2. Position the X-slide carriage guide bar assembly into the main carriage casting. 3. Re-fit six hex-drive caphead screws to secure the X-slide carriage guide-bar assembly. Note: Make sure the shaped cutout of the guide-bar assembly faces the dowels and that the rail edge is in contact with all three dowels. The stepped shoulder of each bearing faces the end of the X-slide carriage. 4. Re-fit the X-slide carriage (see Section 4.20.4). 5. Re-fit the light table (see Section 4.16). 6. Close the main cover (see Section 4.11). 7. Open the lid.
4-109
8. Perform the system calibration tests (see Section 6.5). 9. Perform the electronic repro test (see Section 7.6).
4.20.6
Digitizer Board Cover Plate

Note: This item is not a replaceable part, but it must be removed to access other parts which are replaceable. The digitizer fan is fixed to this cover plate. The following preparations must be made. 1. Position main carriage for Camera Service (see Section 4.12). 2. Open the main cover (see Section 4.11). 3. Remove the light table (see Section 4.16).
PL1 PL4 PL2 PL3 SK2
Figure 4.58 Digitizer board cover plate
Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect PL4 to release the digitizer fan cable.
4-110
2. Remove the two 5 mm nuts securing SK2. 3. Slacken the two side screws and remove the digitizer-board cover-plate.
1. Re-fit the digitizer-board cover-plate. 2. Tighten the two screws to secure the digitizer cover-plate. 3. Re-fit the two 5 mm nuts to secure SK2. 4. Re-connect PL4. 5. Re-fit the light table (see Section 4.16). 6. Close the main cover (see Section 4.11).
4.20.7
Digitizer Fan
Figure 4.59 Digitizer fan removal
Note: This fan is fixed to the digitizer cover-plate.
4-111
The following preparations must be made. 1. Remove the digitizer-board cover-plate (see Section 4.20.6).
Removal Procedure
1. Remove two screws and nuts to release the digitizer fan from the cover plate. 2. Withdraw the digitizer fan.
1. Position replacement digitizer fan on the cover plate. 2. Re-fit and tighten the two screws and nuts to secure the fan. 3. Re-fit the digitizer cover plate (see Section 4.20.6).
4.20.8
Digitizer Board
The following preparations must be made. 1. Remove the digitizer-board cover-plate (see Section 4.20.6). 2. Put on the disposable antistatic wrist strap.
CAUTION The static energy in your body can destroy sensitive components on the printed circuit board.
4-112
Figure 4.60 Digitizer board
CAUTION Do NOT pull on flexicables to remove their connectors otherwise damage may occur.
Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect SK2 and lay flat the digitizer flexicable. 2. Disconnect SK1 ribbon cable from its socket inside the right-hand end of the digitizer housing. 3. Grasp digitizer board and, with care, lift it to allow the standoffs to clear their slots and gently pull to release it. 4. Remove and retain the four standoffs.
4-113
1. Re-fit the four standoffs to the replacement digitizer board. 2. Present and engage the standoffs on the replacement digitizer board to the respective slots in the housing and lower the board to capture the standoffs. 3. Re-connect SK1 ribbon cable. 4. Re-fit digitizer-board cover-plate (see Section 4.20.6). 5. Re-connect SK2 flexicable. 6. Remove the disposable antistatic wrist strap. 7. Re-fit the light table (see Section 4.16). 8. Close the main cover (see Section 4.11).
4.20.9
Focus Motor Rack

The following preparations must be made. 1. Position main carriage for Camera Service (see Section 4.12). 2. Open the main cover (see Section 4.11). 3. Remove the light table (see Section 4.16). 4. Centralize CCD mount on the focus motor rack (see Section 4.20.3).
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the two recessed machine screws. 2. Remove the focus motor rack.
4-114
Figure 4.61 Focus motor rack alignment
Replacement/Alignment Procedure
1. Position the replacement focus motor rack. Note: Make sure the teeth of the rack are pointing forward. 2. Loosely re-fit the two machine screws. 3. Move the CCD mount to position the pinion of the focus motor near to the left-hand screw. Note: Remember to allow clearance for the hexagon wrench. 4. Grasp the back of the rack and pull forward to meet the pinion. 5. Tighten the left-hand screw. 6. Move the CCD mount to position the pinion of the focus motor near to the right-hand screw. Note: Remember to allow clearance for the hexagon wrench. 7. Grasp the back of the rack and pull forward to meet the pinion. 8. Tighten the right-hand screw. 9. Re-fit the light table (see Section 4.16). 10. Close the main cover (see Section 4.11).
4-115
4.20.10 Focus Motor and Cable Loom

The following preparations must be made. 1. Position main carriage for Camera Service (see Section 4.12). 2. Open the main cover (see Section 4.11). 3. Remove the light table (see Section 4.16). 4. Move lens mount to the extreme right of enlargement leadscrew (see Section 4.20.2). 5. Move CCD mount to the extreme left of the focus rack (see Section 4.20.3). 6. Remove the focus motor rack (see Section 4.20.9).
FOCUS MOTOR PINION RACK
PL3
Figure 4.62 Focus motor
Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect PL3 to release the focus-motor cable from the lower left-hand socket on the digitizer board. 2. Remove two caphead screws from beneath the CCD mount.
4-116
3. Carefully disengage the focus-motor cable loom from under the CCD mount. 4. Grasp the focus motor and ease it forward to clear the CCD mount.
1. Position cable loom of the replacement focus motor. 2. Present replacement focus motor to the CCD mount. 3. Re-fit two caphead screws to secure the focus motor to the CCD mount. 4. Re-connect PL3 to the lower left-hand socket on the digitizer board. 5. Replace focus-motor rack (see Section 4.20.9). 6. Re-fit the light table (see Section 4.16). 7. Close the main cover (see Section 4.11).
4.20.11 Focus Datum Sensor and Cable Loom

The following preparations must be made. 1. Position main carriage for Camera Service (see Section 4.12). 2. Open the main cover (see Section 4.11). 3. Remove the light table (see Section 4.16). 4. Move lens mount to its extreme left-hand end of its leadscrew (see Section 4.20.2). 5. Move CCD mount to its extreme right-hand end of the rack (see Section 4.20.3). 6. Disconnect SK2 and lay flat the digitizer cable.
4-117
Figure 4.63 Focus datum sensor
Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect PL7 to release the focus sensor cable from the X-slide distribution board. 2. Remove crosspoint self-tapping screw to release the focus sensor. 3. Cut tie-wraps to release sensor cable. 4. Withdraw the focus datum sensor from its alignment slot.
1. Position the replacement focus-datum sensor and its cable. 2. Re-fit self-tapping screw to secure the focus-datum sensor. 3. Fit the replacement focus sensor into its alignment slot. 4. Fit new tie-wraps to secure the sensor cable. 5. Re-connect PL7 to X-slide distribution board. 6. Re-connect SK2 to the digitizer board. 7. Re-fit the light table (see Section 4.16).
8. Close the main cover (see Section 4.11).
4.20.12 Enlargement Datum Sensor and Cable Loom

The following preparations must be made. 1. Position main carriage for Camera Service (see Section 4.12). 2. Open the main cover (see Section 4.11). 3. Remove the light table (see Section 4.16). 4. Move lens mount to its extreme left-hand end of its leadscrew (see Section 4.20.2). 5. Move CCD mount to its extreme right-hand end of the rack (see Section 4.20.3).
Figure 4.64 CCD baffle and enlargement sensor
Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect PL1 to release the enlargement datum-sensor cable from the digitizer board.
4-119
2. Remove one, and loosen the other, caphead screw of the CCD-baffle located in front of the camera head. Note: One screw is at the front and the other is diametrically opposite at the rear. 3. Remove the CCD baffle. 4. Remove two crosspoint self-tapping screws to release the enlargement sensor from the CCD mount. 5. Carefully withdraw the cable loom from below the digitizer module.
1. Position the replacement enlargement datum-sensor and its cable loom. 2. Re-fit and tighten two crosspoint self-tapping screws to secure the enlargement sensor. 3. Clean the CCD-window (see Section 8.3.6). 4. Re-fit the CCD baffle. 5. Re-fit one, and tighten both caphead screws of the CCD baffle. 6. Connect PL1 to the upper socket on left-hand side of the digitizer board. 7. Re-fit the light table (see Section 4.16). 8. Close the main cover (see Section 4.11).
4.20.13 Enlargement Leadscrew

4-120
2. Open the main cover (see Section 4.11). 3. Remove the light table (see Section 4.16). 4. Move lens mount to the mid-point of its leadscrew length (see Section 4.20.2). 5. Move CCD mount to its extreme right-hand end of the rack (see Section 4.20.3).
Figure 4.65 Enlargement leadscrew and clamp
Removal Procedure
1. Slacken caphead screw on the enlargement-leadscrew clamp. 2. Remove three caphead screws to release the leadscrew nut. 3. Move lens mount to the extreme end of its leadscrew length (see Section 4.20.2). 4. Carefully withdraw the enlargement leadscrew from its clamp.
4-121
1. Carefully, present the replacement leadscrew to the enlargement-leadscrew clamp. 2. Move lens mount to meet its leadscrew nut. 3. Re-fit three caphead screws to secure the leadscrew nut. 4. Align the outer edge of the clamp with the end of the leadscrew and set a 1 mm gap between the clamp and the casting face. 5. Tighten caphead screw to secure the enlargement-leadscrew clamp. 6. Re-fit the light table (see Section 4.16). 7. Close the main cover (see Section 4.11).
4.20.14 Enlargement Leadscrew Clamp

The following preparations must be made. 1. Position main carriage for Camera Service (see Section 4.12). 2. Open the main cover (see Section 4.11). 3. Remove the light table (see Section 4.16). 4. Remove the enlargement leadscrew (see Section 4.20.3).
Removal Procedure
1. Remove enlargement-leadscrew clamp from the pinion of the enlargement motor.
4-122
1. Fit replacement enlargement-leadscrew clamp to the enlargement-motor pinion. 2. Re-fit enlargement leadscrew (see Section 4.20.3). 3. Re-fit the light table (see Section 4.16). 4. Close the main cover (see Section 4.11).
4.20.15 Enlargement Motor and Cable Loom
PL2
Figure 4.66 Enlargement motor and cable loom
The following preparations must be made. 1. Position main carriage for Camera Service (see Section 4.12). 2. Open the main cover (see Section 4.11). 3. Remove the light table (see Section 4.16). 4. Move the lens mount to its extreme right (see Section 4.20.2). 5. Move the CCD mount to its extreme left (see Section 4.20.3).
4-123
6. Disconnect PL2 to release the enlargement motor cable from the digitizer board. 7. Remove the enlargement-leadscrew clamp (see Section 4.20.14).
Removal Procedure
1. Remove two caphead screws from the front of the CCD mount. 2. Grasp enlargement motor and ease it toward the left-hand end to clear the CCD mount.
1. Present replacement enlargement motor to its CCD mount. 2. Re-fit two caphead screws to secure the enlargement motor to its CCD mount. 3. Re-fit the enlargement-leadscrew clamp collar (see Section 4.20.14). 4. Re-connect PL2 to the middle connector on the left-hand side of the digitizer board. 5. Re-fit digitizer-board cover plate (see Section 4.20.6). 6. Re-fit the light table (see Section 4.16). 7. Close the main cover (see Section 4.11).
4.20.16 Cam Follower

Note: This item is located on the underside of the X-slide carriage at the CCD mount end. The following preparations must be made. 1. Position main carriage for Camera Service (see Section 4.12).
4-124
2. Open the main cover (see Section 4.11). 3. Remove the light table (see Section 4.16). 4. Remove the X-slide carriage (see Section 4.20.4).
Figure 4.67 Cam follower
Removal Procedure
1. Provide suitable soft mounts to support the upturned X-slide carriage. 2. Place upturned X-slide carriage on soft mounts. 3. Remove the two M4 screws to release baseplate. 4. Remove keep nut to release cam follower from baseplate.
1. Fit replacement cam follower to the baseplate. Note: Ensure that the cam follower backplate is perpendicular to direction of travel.
4-125
2. Re-fit and tighten keep nut to secure cam follower to baseplate. Note: Do not over-tighten the keep nut. 3. Re-fit the two M4 screws to secure baseplate. 4. Re-fit the X-slide carriage (see Section 4.20.4). 5. Re-fit the light table (see Section 4.16). 6. Close the main cover (see Section 4.11).
4-126
4.21
X-slide Leadscrew Assembly

4.21.1 X-slide Datum Sensor and Cable Loom
The following preparations must be made. 1. Position main carriage for Camera Service (see Section 4.12). 2. Open the main cover (see Section 4.11). 3. Remove the light table (see Section 4.16). 4. Position the X-slide carriage at the front (see Section 4.20.1).
PL6
Figure 4.68 X-slide datum sensor and cable loom
Removal Procedure
1. Remove two crosspoint screws to release the sensor. 2. Move the lens mount to access the cable connector. 3. Slacken three crosspoint screws to ease the captive cable tidies. Note: Do not cut these cable tidies.
4-127
4. Cut tie-wraps as necessary. 5. Disconnect PL6 to release the X-slide datum sensor cable from the main-carriage distribution board. Note: This board is located under X-slide distribution board and under the CCD mount. 6. Remove the X-slide datum sensor and cable loom.
1. Position the replacement X-slide datum sensor and its cable loom. 2. Re-fit two crosspoint screws to secure the sensor. 3. Connect PL6 to the main carriage distribution board. 4. Ease the cable under the three cable tidies. 5. Tighten three crosspoint screws to capture cable tidies. 6. Fit tie-wraps as required. 7. Re-fit the light table (see Section 4.16). 8. Close the main cover (see Section 4.11).
4.21.2
X-slide Leadscrew
The following preparations must be made. 1. Position main carriage for Camera Service (see Section 4.12). 2. Open the main cover (see Section 4.11). 3. Remove the light table (see Section 4.16). 4. Move the X-slide carriage to the front (see Section 4.20.1).
4-128

LENS STEPPER MOTOR CLAMP
LEADSCREW LEADSCREW NUT
Figure 4.69 X-slide leadscrew
Removal Procedure
1. Slacken caphead screw on the X-slide leadscrew clamp. Note: Do not remove this screw. 2. Remove three caphead screws to release the X-slide leadscrew nut. Note: This is the triangular nut situated on the X-slide carriage as viewed from the front. 3. Push X-slide carriage toward the rear to free the leadscrew nut. 4. Carefully withdraw the X-slide leadscrew with nut.
1. Fit replacement leadscrew to the X-slide motor clamp.
4-129
2. Pull X-slide carriage toward the front to capture the leadscrew nut. 3. Re-fit three caphead screws to secure the X-slide leadscrew nut. 4. Tighten caphead screw on the X-slide leadscrew clamp. 5. Re-fit the light table (see Section 4.16). 6. Close the main cover (see Section 4.11).
4.21.3
X-slide Leadscrew Motor and Cable Loom

PL4
Figure 4.70 X-slide leadscrew motor and cable loom
The following preparations must be made. 1. Position main carriage for Camera Service (see Section 4.12). 2. Open the main cover (see Section 4.11). 3. Remove the light table (see Section 4.16).
4-130
4. Move the X-slide carriage to the front (see Section 4.20.1). 5. Move CCD mount to the right (see Section 4.20.3).
Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect PL4 from the main-carriage distribution board. 2. Cut tie-wraps as required. 3. Ease cable loom from the captive cable clips. 4. Slacken caphead screw on the X-slide leadscrew clamp. Note: Do not remove this screw. 5. Slacken the two caphead screws release the X-slide leadscrew motor from the motor bracket. 6. Ease the motor free of its clamp.
1. Re-fit and tighten the two caphead screws to secure the X-slide leadscrew motor to the motor bracket. 2. Fit motor to the leadscrew clamp. 3. Tighten the caphead screw to secure the clamp. 4. Connect PL4 to the main carriage distribution board. 5. Re-fit the light table (see Section 4.16). 6. Close the main cover (see Section 4.11).
4-131
4.21.4
X-slide Leadscrew Clamp

The following preparations must be made. 1. Position main carriage for Camera Service (see Section 4.12). 2. Open the main cover (see Section 4.11). 3. Remove the light table (see Section 4.16). 4. Move the X-slide carriage to the front (see Section 4.20.1).
Removal Procedure
1. Slacken caphead screw on the X-slide leadscrew clamp. Note: Do not remove this screw. 2. Slacken the two caphead screws securing the baseplate of the X-slide leadscrew motor. 3. Ease the clamp free of both the motor and leadscrew.
1. Position the replacement X-slide leadscrew clamp. 2. Fit clamp to both the X-slide motor and its leadscrew. 3. Tighten the two caphead screws to secure the baseplate of the X-slide leadscrew motor. 4. Tighten the caphead screw to secure the clamp. 5. Re-fit the light table (see Section 4.16). 6. Close the main cover (see Section 4.11).
4-132
5 Terminal Diagnostics
This chapter provides a description of the terminal diagnostic procedures for the C-550 Lanovia Scanner.
5.1
Overview
The terminal diagnostics are a series of tests that are performed by an authorized field (customer) service engineer using a VT100 compatible terminal. Terminal diagnostics have the full range of tests which are performed on the scanner via an RS232 cable connected to the scanners diagnostic port. The scanner diagnostics have the following features:
The diagnostic user interface uses the same principle of

hierarchical menus as other Fujifilm diagnostics software.
Soak tests can be performed on all or sub-sets and failed tests

can be repeated.
An error-message logging facility allows groups of tests to be

run unattended. Results can then be viewed later.
The amount of information reported by each test can be

increased or decreased using a Verbose flag.
Self-test routines are activated on power up (see

Section 5.2.1).
When all of the diagnostic tests are run by the soak

command, these tests are sequenced so that the first test to FAIL will indicate a faulty unit.
5-1
Note: Subsequent failures may be due to the first problem detected by the soak test. Eliminate the first problem by replacing the faulty unit and then re-run the soak test. The terminal diagnostics program is divided into four main menus (see Figure 5.1).
Main Menu
Elec / Optics / Mech /
See Section 5.5
See Section 5.9
See Section 5.10
Setup /
See Chapter 6
Figure 5.1 Menu Map for the scanner
The electronic tests, under Elec/, provide a series of tests for the system board, the digitizer board, and the lamp-driver board. The optics tests, under Optics/ , provide a series of tests for the stability of the scanning illumination and for checking the uniformity of illumination at the CCD image sensor. The mechanical tests, under Mech/, provide a series of tests for all the electro-mechanical sub-assemblies. The setup tests, under Setup/ , provide a series of utilities for the alignment and calibration of the scanner. Most of these terminal diagnostic tests are also available on the workstation diagnostics display.
5-2
5.2
Power-up Sequence
5.2.1 Power-on Tests
When the system is powered up, it will automatically run through a series of tests prior to its readiness to scan. Most of the diagnostic tests can be re-run from the menus, however, some tests (e.g. the ram and eprom tests) are only tested during the power-on sequence. Not all of the available tests are run at power-up. The results of these tests are made available for display by the workstation application software. The power-up sequence and movement between the three system modes; boot code, diagnostics, and the application is as follows:
POWER UP STANDBY SWITCH OK BOOT UP OK FATAL ERROR DISPLAYS AN ERROR CODE AND REBOOTS POST DIAGs OK/NON FATAL ERROR YES VT100 CONNECTED? NO RESTART
TERMINAL DIAGNOSTICS appl [return]
APPLICATION SYSTEM
Figure 5.2 Power-up and software access diagram
5-3
In the event of a fatal error, the POSTs will not terminate, but will halt the sequence and write an error message to the VT100 emulation window and activate a flashing fault LED on the display panel (see Table 5.1). After displaying the code, the system will attempt to re-boot as a test to clear the fault.
Table 5.1 Flashing fault-lamp modes # Flashes ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Description of Failure See Table B.2 RAM test failure. Flash memory test failure. ISP test failure. IMR test failure. Interrupt test failure. SCSI test failure. CS0 test failure.
When all three LEDs are on and communication with the CPU (e.g. via the SCSI or RS232 cable) is not possible, the system board cannot run POST. Note that during the POSTs the lamps will be struck to help evaporate any mercury on the lamp filaments.
5-4
5.3
Terminal Diagnostics User Interface

This facility allows a customer support technician to investigate faults more comprehensively than by the workstation diagnostics method and can test systems even when the SCSI operations have been affected.
5.3.1
The Terminal Diagnostics Display VT100 Emulation Operation

An emulation window may be viewed on any server, whether it is a workstation or a terminal. The procedures required to display the window are described below.
Access on a Macintosh/PC
1. Start the terminal emulator (e.g. kermit/terminal). 2. Set up for: 9600 baud, 8-data bits, 1-stop bit, no parity, and no flow control. 3. Power-up the scanner. The diagnostic program on the scanner starts.
The VT100 Display

The VT100 terminal display is identical, regardless of the platform on which the window is running. The top line of the screen indicates the program title. Below this is a box which shows the current menu and the command group available at this level. The prompt and all user input appears in the bottom line of the screen. The prompt changes to indicate the current sub-menu.
5-5
Figure 5.3 Terminal diagnostics opening screen
The diagnostics software is based on hierarchical menus. Options available at any time are restricted to groups. The members of each group are related logically within the hierarchy.
Entering Commands
There are two types of command:
those which directly select tests or utilities, those which select another group (or sub-menu) of
commands. When these are entered the screen is redrawn with the new group displayed. These commands have the suffix / . The commands which are currently available (except global commands which are available at any time) are displayed on the screen.
5-6
5.3.2
Global Commands
Global commands do not appear in the menu structure and so are not displayed at the top of the screen. Global commands can be entered regardless of the current menu position. The global commands along with the menu items available for the current menu level can be listed by typing help [Return] or [?]. Global commands are listed in the table below. To select a command, type its name, followed by [Return] or [Enter]. The global commands and their functions are shown Table 5.2. All diagnostics commands are case independent. For example, HELP, help or HeLp, all select the same command. Diagnostics commands can be abbreviated. For example, to select the Help command you can enter h, he, hel or help. If several commands begin with the same letters, then sufficient letters must be typed to make the selection unique. For example if there are two commands, help and hello and he is entered, the system responds with a command entry error. To select the Hello command you must enter at least hell. Some commands can be modified by adding subsidiary commands. For example, if soak soe is entered, the soak command is modified so that it Stops On an Error. Certain commands require responses to questions. Other commands require extra data to be entered, this data is usually but not always in the form of numbers.
5-7
Terminal Diagnostics Table 5.2 Global commands
Global Command
break monitor / rlog flog repeat showlog loadscript star runscript showscript listscripts delete zeroscripts record verbose appl help ? soak <item name> stats enable <item name> disable <item name> find <item name> path temp_stamp time_stamp evt/ ../ quit/
Function
A forced break point for debugging. Enters the monitor menu. Sets the RAM log. Sets the FLASH log. Executes the command string count times. Displays the contents of a file. Loads a named script file from FLASH to RAM. Enables/disables the rotating star activity indicator. Executes currently loaded named script file. Shows the current script file. Lists those scripts stored in FLASH. Deleted named script from FLASH Erases all script files from FLASH. Records the command lines into a script file. Selects the level of messages for display. Quits diagnostics and enters the application. Lists all menu items currently available, and displays details about tests. Lists all menu items currently available, and displays details about tests. Soak a test or submenu of tests. Shows the current status of the system. Enables individual tests or submenus for soak testing. Disables individual tests or submenus that were enabled for soak testing. Locates an item within the menu structure. Displays the current menu path. Puts temperature data from system and digitizer board sensors into error messages. Puts time data into error messages. Enters the evt menu. Returns cursor to parent menu. Returns the cursor to parent menu.
5-8
Command Line Editing

As an aid to the user, the recorder diagnostics keep a history of the last ten commands entered. Recall and editing of any of these commands is possible.
To move through the history of the commands use the Y or

B cursor keys.
To edit a line use the [delete] key to remove characters, then

type in the new characters.
To remove all characters from a line press A. To execute a command that has been recalled press [Return].
Soak Test Operation

The soak command will run all tests that are soak enabled in all sub-menus below the current level. Tests and sub-menus that are soakable are indicated by an S suffix to the command name. If the S is emboldened, the test is enabled. If the S not emboldened, the test is not enabled. To soak all soakable tests and sub-menus, use the soak command. By selecting soak soe the diagnostics will run each soakable test once and will stop when an error occurs. To soak more than once, use soak x where x is the required number of repetitions. To soak an individual test or sub-menu, enter soak x name, where x is the name of the test or sub-menu and name is the number of repeats. To select the stop-on-error code use the suffix soe. For example, soak 10 soe initiates a soak on all enabled tests 10 times and the tests will stop on any error. To stop a soak test press [Ctrl] and c.
5-9
If a soak test fails and the stop-on-error (SOE) flag has been set, then a message is displayed on the monitor:
** An error stopped the soak test! [test name]
where [test name] is the name of the test which failed. To select the loop-on-error code use the suffix loe. For example; soak 10 loe initiates a soak on all enabled tests 10 times and the tests will loop indefinitely on any error. The enable command enables soak tests. Individual tests can be enabled. For example; enable test3 enables command Test3 for soak testing. If enable all is entered then every command in all sub-menus will be enabled. The disable command disables soak tests. Individual tests can be disabled. For example; disable test3 disables command Test3 for soak testing. If disable all is entered then every command in all sub-menus will be disabled. Test results can be logged to RAM, or FLASH, for subsequent examination. Commands available are:
rlog on - tests logged to RAM enabled, rlog off - tests logged to RAM disabled, rlog clear - clears the rlog buffer.
Note: The flog commands are similar for FLASH. Time information can be optionally added to the error log using the command time_stamp. Temperature information may be also added to the error log using the command temp_stamp.
Verbose Command
The verbose command controls the messages which appear during soak tests.
5-10
On its own, this command reports the status of the Verbose function (on or off). Use verbose on and verbose off to switch the function on and off respectively.
When Verbose is on, all messages are displayed and messages

beginning with **, --, ++ and ^^ are logged to RAM (if RAM logging is enabled). Note: Only error messages (indicated with **) are logged to FLASH.
When Verbose is off, only error messages are displayed and

logged to RAM or FLASH. Note: For troubleshooting, always select the Verbose ON option.
5.3.3
Standard Monitor Commands

Table 5.3, Table 5.5, and Table 5.4 lists the monitor commands for the scanner.
Monitor Mode Operation

Within the diagnostics menu there is a global command, monitor, which selects the diagnostics monitor for the scanner. It allows low-level access to system hardware with facilities such as memory-access routines. The diagnostics monitor operates in a similar way to the diagnostic menu system. Commands are entered by typing the command name followed by
[Return] exactly the same way as for the diagnostics menu.
The same rules of menu searching and abbreviation handling that apply to the menu system are used.
5-11
A history stack of commands and command line editing are also supported. Type help for general information. Type help command_name for specific help.
Table 5.3 Standard monitor commands Command dmem verify smem sverify cmem compare search servo / stepper / tauto .. / Function Read from a memory location. Read from a memory location and check that the memory location contains the desired pattern. Set memory to a specified value. Write to a memory location and verify that the write occurred. Copies one area to another area of memory. Compare two blocks of memory. Search an area of memory with the desired pattern. Displays a list of servo motor commands. Displays a list of stepper motor commands. Toggles (enables/disables) automatic startup of application. Returns cursor to the previous menu.
5-12
Servo Motor Commands

This contains a number of commands to drive the servo motor.
Table 5.4 Servo motor test commands Test Name datum hi lo error stats Test No. 104 Status Soakable User Exec User Exec User Exec User Exec Description Initializes the servo motor and performs the datum procedure to park the main carriage. Defines the high-speed control-port settings. Defines the low-speed control-port settings. Defines the positional-error tolerance. Reports the statistics of the three sensors; the main carriage datum sensor, the forward limit sensor and the reverse limit (park) sensor. Enables/disables servo motor simulation mode. Defines the current position of the main carriage with respect to its datum position. Stops any current movement of the main carriage. Three options are offered: Smoothly, Abruptly, or Turnoff. Removes power supply to the servo motor. Changes the status of acceleration and velocity of the servo motor, and positions the main carriage. Reports position of the main carriage. Can be used to set a desired position. Range of desired positions is between 0 and 540000. Reports the current position of the main carriage. Initializes the servo motor. Pauses any keyboard/script processing for a specified number of seconds. Waits for the servo motor to stop any rotation before giving control back to the keyboard. Returns cursor to the previous menu (same as quit).
simulation home stop
User Exec User Exec User Exec
off goto desired
User Exec User Exec User Exec
pos init delay wait .. /
User Exec User Exec User Exec User Exec User Exec
Note: These tests will fail if the interlocks are activated. To move the Server motor using the Monitor mode: 1. Open a terminal window. 2. Launch the Terminal diagnostics by powering on the scanner.
5-13
3. Type mon [Return]. 4. Press the Spacebar, taking note of the warning given. 5. Type servo [Return]. 6. Type init [Return] to initialise for the servo motor. 7. Type datum [Return] to send the servo motor to datum. 8. To drive the motor to a specified position, type goto pos=xxxxxx, where = a space and xxxxxx is a value
between 0 and 545000.
CAUTION Do not exceed the values given, or damage may occur to the scanner. If the motor drives up to the end-stops and continues to drive an unusual noise will be heard from the motor. Switch off the scanner and re-boot.
If any command fails it may be necessary to re-initialise and reset the datum. You can use the pos command to give a positon read-out and sensors to check the sensor state, but the display is not in real time.
5-14
Stepper Motor Commands

This contains a number of commands to drive the three stepper-motors.
Table 5.5 Stepper motor test commands Test Name datum * sensors * simulation * off delay # wait * Test No. 63/64/65 Status User Exec User Exec User Exec User Exec User Exec User Exec Description Performs a datum procedure on the specified stepper motor. Reports current state and statistics of a selected sensor (* = 1, 2, or 3). (none = all). Enables/disables the simulation mode for a selected motor (* = 1, 2, or 3). (none = all). Turns OFF the power supply to a specified stepper motor. Pauses any keyboard/script processing for a specified number (#) of seconds. Waits until the specified stepper motor has stopped before giving control back to the keyboard. (* = 1, 2, or 3). (none = all). Stops a specified stepper motor quickly, and then turns OFF its power supply (* = 1, 2, or 3). (none = all). Stops a specified stepper motor in a controlled manner (* = 1, 2, or 3). (none = all). To re-initialize the motor, run its datum test. Initializes the specified motor to allow the entry of acceleration/decelerate profiles. Displays current position of a specified motor. Initializes a specified stepper motor with the default acceleration/deceleration profile. Moves the selected carriage to a specified position (e.g. X-slide carriage, focus mount, or CCD mount). Moves the selected carriage by a specified number of steps (+ or -). Records the state and statistics of a specified stepper motor. -reset will re-set the status. -zero will set the stats counters to zero. -nostat disables the output path for the statistical information. Returns cursor to the previous memory (same as quit).
halt * stop *
User Exec User Exec
init * pos default goto step stat * -reset stat * -zero stat * nostat .. /
User Exec User Exec User Exec User Exec User Exec User Exec User Exec User Exec User Exec
5-15
Note: There are three datum sensors, three stepper motors, and a simulation state for each motor which can be either enabled or disabled. * = a number to represent the following options: when * = 1 the enlargement motor or its datum sensor is selected. when * = 2 the focus motor or its datum sensor is selected. when * = 3 the X-slide motor or its datum sensor is selected. when a number is not specified then all three motors are operated. Note: These tests will fail if the interlocks are activated. To move a stepper motor using the Monitor mode: 1. Open a terminal window. 2. Launch the Terminal diagnostics by powering on the scanner. 3. Type mon [Return]. 4. Press the Spacebar, taking note of the warning given. 5. Type stepper [Return]. 6. To initialise the Enlargement motor, type: init 10.3333noaccel [Return], where = a space. To initialise the Focus motor, type:
init 20.3333noaccel [Return].
To initialise the X-slide motor, type: init 30.4444noaccel [Return]. 7. To send the Enlargement motor to datum, type: datum1 [Return]. To send the Focus motor to datum, type: datum2 [Return]. To send the X-slide motor to datum, type: datum3 [Return].
5-16
8. To drive the motor to a specified position, the Enlargement motor 13500 steps from datum for example, type goto 113500;wait [Return]. The Enlargement motor will begin to move 13500 steps from datum. Control will not be returned to the keyboard until the motor gets there. As an alternative, nowait can be entered and control will return to the keyboard immediately. Maximum values are as follows:
Enlargement motor: 0 to 13600, Focus motor: 0 to 15400, X-slide motor: 10000 from datum.
CAUTION Do not exceed the values given, or damage may occur to the scanner. If the motor drives up to the end-stops and continue to drive an unusual noise will be heard from the motor. Switch off the scanner and re-boot.
If any command fails it may be necessary to re-initialise and reset the datum. You can use the pos command to give a positon read-out and sensors to check the sensor state, but the display is not in real time.
5.3.4
Display Utilities
Certain global commands (see Table 5.2) allow logs to be displayed on a terminal.
5-17
Terminal Diagnostics Table 5.6 Display logs menu Test Name showlog showscript Status User Exec User Exec Description Shows showlog records. Shows current script file.
5-18
5.4
Terminal Diagnostic Tests

These tests are organized into a number of menus that reflect the architecture of the scanner. At the top level, the tests are organized into the following menus:
electronic: These test the circuit boards of the system. optics: mech setup
These test the optical paths of the scanner (see Section 5.9). These test the mechanical assemblies of the system (see Section 5.10). These utilities allow the scanner to be mechanically aligned and calibrated (see Chapter 6).
The electronic tests further divided into sections.
system board tests:
See Section 5.5 which are further sub-divided into CPU tests, System tests and MCB tests, See Section 5.6,
digitizer board tests: utilities:
lamp driver board tests: See Section 5.7,

See Section 5.8.
5-19
Terminal Diagnostics Elec

cpu_test / sys_brd / scsi_tests / dsp_tests / sync_tests / mcb_brd / dig_brd / basic / function / See Table 5.7 See Table 5.9 See Table 5.10 See Table 5.11 See Table 5.12 See Table 5.14 See Table 5.15 See Table 5.16 See Table 5.17
lamp_brd / utils /
Figure 5.4 Elec/menu tree
5-20
5.5
System Board Tests

5.5.1 Introduction
The system board tests divide the C-550 Lanovia Scanner system into a group of functional blocks. The functional blocks are as follows:
Control processor unit (CPU), SCSI control unit, Digital signal processor (DSP) unit, Synchronization unit, Motion controllers.
5.5.2
CPU Tests
These fundamental tests ensure the command processor unit (CPU) is running and they also ensure that the remaining diagnostic tests can be run. The cpu_test menu provides the following functions:
Simple UART and power-up indication test, DRAM memory register based test, FLASH memory register based checksum test, Interrupt tests, Tests the ISP port, Control status register test, Interrupt mask register test,
The simple UART, and FLASH memory register based checksum tests are only run at power-up.
5-21
cpu_test Menu Path

Elec/cpu_test
Table 5.7 CPU_test menu Test Name cs_0 isp digitizer_if icr cvr L1_reg L2_reg imr int mem_dram addr_dram temp_status temp_sensor .. / Test No. 25 26 28 47 48 80 81 27 52 60 61 49 50 Soakable User Exec Status Soakable Soakable Soakable Soakable Soakable Soakable Soakable Soakable Soakable Soakable Description Checks the control register space. Checks the in-situ-programming (ISP) port. Checks the digitizers interface port. Checks the DSPs interface port. Checks the DSPs interface port. Checks data bus operation for lamp register 1 Checks data bus operation for lamp register 2 Checks the CPUs interrupt mask register. Checks for correct responses to the external interrupts Checks the DRAM memory (see note below). Checks the DRAM addressing (see note below). Checks and, if required, sets the hysteresis limits of the temperature sensor. Checks the operation of the temperature chip and its sense bit on the system board. Returns cursor to the parent menu (same as quit).
Note: These checks only test a part of the DRAM.
5-22
5.5.3
Sys_brd Tests
The sys_brd menu has four sub-menus which checks the following to ensure they are correctly functioning:
the SCSI interface, the DSP, the synchronizer, the motor control interface.
Table 5.8 Sys_brd tests Test Name scsi_tests / dsp_tests / sync_tests / Description See Table 5.9 See Table 5.10 See Table 5.11
SCSI_Tests
These diagnostic tests ensure that the SCSI controller is working correctly. Note: The SCSI output is not tested in this group. The control logic has the diagnostic features added to allow:
Ability to reset the SCSI controller. Data bus and address bus tests on the SCSI controller. The SCSI controllers flags can be tested by emptying and
filling the SCSI FIFO and checking the status of the flags. SCSI diagnostics are only available through the terminal diagnostics port.
5-23
scsi_tests Menu Path

Elec/sys_brd/scsi_tests
Table 5.9 SCSI_tests Test Name abus dbus reset flags .. / Test No. 51 5 6 7 Status Soakable Soakable Soakable Soakable Description Tests the address bus on the SCSI controller Tests the data bus on the SCSI controller Resets the SCSI controller Tests operation of the SCSI controller buffer flags.
User Exec Returns cursor to the previous menu (same as quit).
DSP_Tests
The digital signal processor (DSP), along with the SCSI interface, comprise the image path section of the system board. The DSP handles all autobalance, image processing, and formatting of the image data before sending it to the workstation via the SCSI interface. The DSP can perform its own diagnostics when it receives the appropriate instructions from the CPU. The DSP assists in the synchronizer diagnostics and tests the DMA transfers between the DSP and the SCSI chip.
5-24
dsp_tests Menu Path

Elec/sys_brd/dsp_tests
Table 5.10 dsp_tests Test Name reset 16sram dram16 24sram x_input y_input x_output y_output byteswap oscillator (*) line_sync (*) blue_integrate (*) Test No. 8 9 10 11 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Status Soakable Soakable Soakable Soakable Soakable Soakable Soakable Soakable Soakable Soakable Soakable Soakable Description Tests the system boards ability to reset and download code into the dsp. Tests the DSPs 16-bit SRAM. Tests the DSPs 16-bit DRAM. Tests the DSPs 24-bit SRAM. Tests the DMA transfers into the DSP x-memory stacks. Tests the DMA transfers into the DSP y-memory stacks. Tests the DMA transfers from the DSPs x-memory stacks to the SCSI chip. Tests the DMA transfers from the DSPs y-memory stacks to the SCSI chip. Tests the DMA transfers from DSP to the SCSI chip using the byteswap facility. Checks the DSPs crystal frequency. Measures the line counter mark-to-space ratio on a signal from the synchronizer Tests the synchronizers integration timer for the blue CCD and measures the mark-to-space ratio. Tests the synchronizers integration timer for the red CCD and measures the mark-to-space ratio Tests the synchronizers integration timer for the green CCD and measures the mark-to-space ratio Measures the mark-to-space ratio of the valid_video synchronization signal. Measures the mark-to-space ratio of the start-of-line synchronization signal. Returns cursor to the previous menu (same as quit) .
red_integrate (*) green_integrate (*)
22 21
Soakable Soakable
valid_video (*) start_of_line (*) .. /
23 24 -
Soakable Soakable User Exec
Note: Some of the above tests will fail if the digitizer board is either faulty or not connected.
(*) This symbol indicates synchronizer tests.
5-25
Sync_Tests
This control unit provides synchronization of the data acquisition with the main carriage traversing mechanism. The diagnostics features are:
Stuck bits to be tested on the read/write bits of the registers, Generation of interrupts in poll mode, Measuring of following signals via the DSP, While the tests are listed here, they actually reside in DSP
diagnostics:
Line synchronizer, Start of scan line, Integration times, Valid video.
sync_tests Menu Path

Elec/sys_brd/scsi_tests
5-26
Terminal Diagnostics Table 5.11 Sync_tests Test Name line red_green blue_control addr_sync poll_int .. / Test No. 1 2 3 46 4 Status Soakable Soakable Soakable Soakable Soakable User Exec Description Checks the data bus to the line-count register. Checks the data bus to the red_green integration register. Checks the data bus to the blue integration, prescaler, and valid_video register. Checks the valid_video timing and synchronization. Tests the ability of the pixel counters to generate an interrupt request by polling the interrupt bit. Returns cursor to the previous menu (same as quit).
Note: The sync_tests on the system board do not test the complete operation. See Table 5.10 for the other synchronizer tests.
5-27
5.5.4
Mcb_brd Tests
The mcb_brd tests check the functioning of the motor control interface circuits to ensure they are functioning correctly. The motor controllers are the interface between the drive circuits and the cpu. Motion control is a separate circuit located on the system board. Testing is at 2 levels:
the electronic interface between the processor and the mcb,

and
the functional testing of each motor assembly.

Note: The functional tests are available in the mech/ tests section (see Section 5.10). There are additional facilities for exercising the motors, but these are not required for diagnosing faults with the system. These facilities are available from the standard monitor commands (see Table 5.3).
mcb_brd Tests Menu Path

Elec/mcb_brd
Table 5.12 mcb_brd tests
Test Name Test No.

s_enable_reg mode_reg reset_servo data_reg control_reg 76 77 82 78 79
Status
Soakable Soakable Soakable Soakable Soakable
Description
Tests the data bus of the stepper enable register. Tests the data bus of the stepper mode register. Checks that the servo controller can be reset. Tests the data bus of the servos data port. Tests the data bus of the servo controllers control register.
5-28
5.6
Digitizer Board Tests

5.6.1 Introduction
The digitizing system diagnostics is considered as two elements:
the digital control electronics, the analogue electronics.

The digital control aspects are tested as part of the basic tests. These include interface and data path tests of the circuit. The analogue electronics are tested by the functional tests. These use special diagnostic modes of operation by injecting analogue signals into the digitizer input and testing whether or not they have been correctly processed.
5.6.2
Digitizing System
The digitizer board is part of the scan head and it provides the front end analogue electronics for the CCD sensor. The digitizer provides clock signals and power to the CCD headboard and receives back the analogue signals from the red, green and blue stripes. These are converted to digital form and passed to the system board. The interface to the system board (including power) is via a single 30-way ribbon cable. A voltage sensor indicates if any of the incoming power supply rails have failed. A temperature sensor gives a pass/fail indication of board over-temperature of the digitizer/scan head.
5-29
5.6.3
Dig_brd Tests
The dig_brd menu has two sub-menus which check that the power and functions of the digitizer board are functioning correctly.
Table 5.13 Dig_brd tests Test Name basic / function / Description See Table 5.14 See Table 5.15
Basic Tests Menu Path

Elec/dig_brd/basic
Table 5.14 Basic tests
Test Name reset_digi power pll temp_status mode calibrate pipeline .. /
Test No. 29 30 31 110 32 33 -
Status Soakable Soakable Soakable Soakable Soakable Soakable Soakable User Exec
Description Resets the digitizer circuits. Checks power supply to digitizer board. Checks synchronization of the PLL with the system clock. Checks the temperature limits and status bit to ensure they are within tolerances. Checks the serial link to the digitizer and also checks for a correct operation of the digitizer modes. Sets the offset between the two ADCs. Tests the data path from the digitizer. Returns cursor to the previous menu (same as quit) .
5-30
Function Tests Menu Path

Elec/dig_brd/function
Table 5.15 Function tests Test Name reset_digi temp_sensor adc1_stuck adc2_stuck gain_offset ratio red_gain_offset green_gain_offset blue_gain_offset linearity noise freerun diagdac offdac .. / Test No. 35 40 41 42 36 43 44 45 37 39 34 72 71 Status Soakable User Exec Soakable Soakable Soakable Soakable Soakable Soakable Soakable Soakable Soakable User Exec User Exec User Exec User Exec Description Resets the digitizer circuits. Checks digitizers temperature sensor chip. Checks the adc1 to system bus operation. Checks the adc2 to system bus operation. Checks the dac gain and its offset response from the ADC circuit. Checks the gain ratio between the two ADCs. Checks the gain and offset for the red channel and also for any x-talk on the green and blue channels. Checks the gain and offset for the green channel and also for any x-talk on the red and blue channels. Checks the gain and offset for the blue channel and also for any x-talk on the red and green channels. Checks the ADC for its linearity response from the digitizer. Checks the noise level of the ADC. Factory utility for setting up the digitizer. Factory utility for setting up the digitizer. Factory utility for setting up the digitizer. Returns cursor to the previous menu (same as quit).
5-31
5.7
Lamp Driver Board Tests

5.7.1 Introduction
The lamp driver board contains the necessary circuitry to drive the 5 lamps in the system (one transmission, two reflection, and two light table lamps). The transmission and reflection lamps can be dimmed, and they also have optical detection circuitry to maintain a constant illumination, despite the effects of aging and variable temperature. These tests check the interfaces to the lamp driver board. They also check that the lamps light, and behave normally. The lamp driver board is diagnostically checked for the following:
Connected to power supply, Power supply reaches a minimum limit, Board is operating within its temperature range, Interface to system board is working, Transmission and reflection lamps will correctly light at
different dimmer levels,
All five lamps cannot be switched on at once.
5-32
Lamp_brd Tests Menu Path

Elec/lamp_brd
Table 5.16 lamp_brd utilities and tests Test Name lamp_power board_temp check_dac dac_adc_loop tx_on Test No. 88 89 90 91 Status Soakable Soakable Soakable Soakable User Exec Description Checks power supply to lamp driver board. Checks board temperature is within limits. Test to write a user defined value to the DAC. Checks operation of serial DAC loopback. Switches ON the transmission lamp. 12-bit hex values entered in DAC. Incorrect entry then defaults are taken. Switches OFF the transmission lamp. Switches ON the reflection lamps. 12-bit hex values entered in DAC. Incorrect entry then defaults are taken. Switches OFF the reflection lamps. Switches ON the light table lamps. Switches OFF the light table lamps. Writes a value to the DAC. Reads ADC for the selected channel. Checks operation of the transmission lamp. Checks operation of the reflection lamps. Switches ON all lamps and checks that both reflection lamps switch OFF. Runs tx_check and rx_check alternately with light table lamps on. Intended for use only in the stress chamber.
tx_off rx_on
User Exec User Exec
rx_off lt_on lt_off write_dac read_adc tx_check rx_check all_lamps stress_tests /
92 93 94 -
User Exec User Exec User Exec User Exec User Exec Soakable Soakable Soakable Soakable
Note: Some of the above tests will fail if the opto-mechanical interlocks are activated.
5-33
5.8
Utilities
5.8.1 Introduction
This section will allow the user to examine the state of the system sensors.
Utilities Menu Path

Elec/utils
Table 5.17 Utils menu Test Name mtr_sens lmp_sens sys_sens Description Displays the status of the motors and sensors (see Figure 5.5). Displays the status of the lamps (see Figure 5.6). Displays the status of the system (see Figure 5.7).
Note: Type control c to exit the display.
Figure 5.5 Terminal view of the mtr_sens display
5-34
Figure 5.6 Terminal view of the lmp_sens display
Figure 5.7 Terminal view of the sys_sens display
5-35
5.9
Optics Tests
Note: Optical tests should be only performed after the electronic tests have been performed.
5.9.1
Introduction
These tests check the optical components of the system to make sure they are functioning correctly. Unlike the electronic tests no single part of the optical system can be tested in isolation, so if the service engineer finds a failure, a visual inspection will identify the cause. Note: To avoid unusual problems make sure the optical components are free of dust and fingerprints.
Optics Menu Path

optics
Table 5.18 Optics tests Test Name diff_check tx_stability rx_stability Test No. 116 96 97 Status User Exec User Exec User Exec Description Factory test for checking field curvature of lens at all resolutions. Diff_focus test target required. Similar to rx_stability, but for the transmission lamp and its detector board. Tests the reflection lamps and their detector boards. Makes sure the illumination of the CCD image sensor is sustained at a fixed level for a five minute period. For factory use only. Checks the uniformity of the transmission illumination of the CCD image sensor at two different resolutions. Also checks for dirt in the white balance area of the platen. Similar to tx_profile, but for uniformity of the reflection illumination. Checks the status of CCD noise to make sure it is lower than the specified threshold.
tx_profile
112
Soakable
rx_profile ccd_noise
113 115
Soakable Soakable
5-36
5.10
Mechanical Tests
Note: Mechanical tests should be performed only after the electronic tests have passed.
5.10.1
Introduction
These tests check the mechanical assemblies for a correct operation. Each assembly consists of mechanical components (leadscrews, bearings etc.) and electrical/electronic components (motors, sensors etc.). In the event of a failure it is up to the service engineer to identify the failing component by a visual inspection. The lightbar, lid, and main cover must be fitted and closed before these tests are performed. Activated safety interlocks will prevent the operation of all motors, and the tests will abort. Tests on any of the interlocked mechanisms can fail if the safety interlocks are activated. The following states must exist for these sensors to be operable:
Main cover fitted at all times while the scanner is powered

up.
When the lightbar is fitted, the lid must be closed. When the lightbar has been removed, the lid may be either
open or closed.
5-37
Mech Menu Path

Mech
Table 5.19 Mechanical tests Test Name focus_chk enlrg_chk Test No. 83 84 Status Soakable Soakable Description Checks the focus motor control circuits to ensure the CCD mount can be correctly driven. Checks the enlargement motor control circuits to ensure the lens mount can be correctly driven. Checks the X-slide motor control circuits to ensure the X-slide carriage can be correctly driven. Checks the encoder and servo motor control circuits to ensure the main carriage can be correctly driven. Checks the servo motor torque and its leadscrew drag to ensure the main carriage can be precisely positioned. Checks the operation of the forward and reverse limit sensors to ensure the main carriage stops correctly. Not for Field use. Not for Field use. To access the service sub-menu
x slide_chk
85
Soakable
carriage_chk
86
Soakable
leadscrew_chk
87
Soakable
endstop_chk
105
Soakable
life_test ess_test_menu / service /
102 -
User Exec Soakable User Exec
5-38
5.10.2
Service Menu
This menu has three utilities for positioning the main carriage before performing a unit replacement procedure.
Service Menu Path

Mech/Service
Table 5.20 Service tests Test Name camera_service park transit_fixing Test No. 107 108 109 Status User Exec User Exec User Exec Description Moves the main carriage to the table lamps change position. Moves the main carriage to its park position. Moves all motors to their transit fixing positions
5-39
5-40
6 Alignments and Calibrations

This chapter provides a detailed description of the setup test menus, special alignments and field service calibrations.
6.1
Overview
The C-550 Lanovia Scanner alignment and calibration procedures can be only performed once the systems have passed all terminal diagnostics tests (see Chapter 5). The alignment procedures have been provided to assist the service engineer in making certain mechanical adjustments to the scanning system. The calibration procedures record in non-volatile memory some of the characteristics of the CCD image sensor for later use by the system software.
Camera Alignment
The alignment of the CCD mount to its lens mount is performed at the factory on a special rig.
Carriage Alignment
This section explains the preparations and procedures for performing the two tasks.
6-1
They are the:
light_bar procedure. diff_focus procedure.
System Calibration
This section explains the preparations and procedures for performing the following tasks:
main carriage datum, X-slide datum, enlargement and focus calibration, start of scan offsets, bad pixel elimination, copy holder registration edges calibration.
C-dot SP Calibrations
This section describes the calibration procedures required when the scanner is to be used to scan images to be processed using the C-dot SP application:
Sharpness platen calibration for images up to a maximum size

of A4. This calibration must be run at 36 and 45 lines/mm resolution.
Swathe platen calibration for images up to a maximum size of

A3, when running C-scan with Sprint. Note: If C-scan with Sprint is to be run, both of these calibrations must be performed.
6-2
6.2
Test Films
There are four types of test film, each having been designed to suit a particular procedure.
Lightbar Alignment Target (75524070), Engineers Calibration Chart (75522450), (see Figure 6.1).
This includes: the Differential Focus Target, the System Calibration Target, including the Magnification bars and the Zig-zag Strip, the Bad Pixel Elimination Target, Clear area for Transmission White-balance, Position guides, Electronic Repro Target.
ZIG-ZAG STRIP POSITION GUIDES
ELECTRONIC REPRO TARGET BAD PIXEL ELIMINATION TARGET MAGNIFICATION BARS
CLEAR AREA FOR TRANSMISSION WHITE BALANCE
DIFFERENTIAL FOCUS TARGETS
SYSTEM CALIBRATION TARGET
Figure 6.1 Engineers Calibration Chart
6-3
C-dot Scanner Calibration Target for sharpness calibration,

Part No. 7A002580.
Swathe Scanning Calibration Target, Part No. 7A013510.

Each film is viewed in transmission mode.
CAUTION The emulsion side of the test films can be easily scratched. A seriously scratched film will cause the calibration program to fail. Do not bend the films.
6-4
6.3
Setup Introduction
Following the replacement of modules, Set-up procedures may have to be run.
6.3.1
Setup Menu Path

Main/Setup The setup menu has three sets of tests.
Table 6.1 Setup Menu Tests Test Name scan-head carriage calibrate Description For factory use only See Table 6.2 See Table 6.3
Note: Some of the above tests will fail if the scanner has developed any faults, or if the targets are dirty or poorly positioned.
6-5
6.4
Carriage Alignment
6.4.1 Carriage Menu Introduction
This section is concerned with two alignment procedures. They are the:
light_bar alignment. diff_focus alignment.

These alignment procedures are used to ensure the lightbar is aligned with the CCD camera, and that any differential focus errors are minimized.
Carriage Tests Menu Path

Main/Setup/carriage
Table 6.2 Carriage tests Test Name light_bar diff_focus Test No. 103 73 Status User Exec User Exec Description Checks the alignment of the lightbar with the ccd path. Checks for any misalignment between the main carriage and the CCD path.
6.4.2
Light_bar Alignment
This program is designed to analyse any variations to the path of the scan head, to ensure the lightbar is correctly aligned. This test must be run before the diff_focus test. The lightbar should be re-aligned when the following occur:
a new or different lightbar is being fitted,

the existing lightbar has been knocked and caused

misalignments (e.g. dark edges appear at the edges of the scan).
Lightbar Alignment Target

Note: In addition to the normal purchasing method, this target can be obtained free by downloading a TIFF image from the internet and printing the file to film. The image is attached to a document on the Fujifilm private internal Web Server: Service Information Team / Service Information Online / Tech Info Databsase / C-550 Lanovia / C-550 lightbar alignment target. The destination is password protected. This target is a thin strip of film with a bow tie (e.g. two inwardly pointing triangles) symbol at each end. "A "A
Figure 6.2 Lightbar alignment target, 75524070
Each bow tie ("A) is aligned to the aperture of the lamp and is affixed with a suitable piece of adhesive tape to the circumference of the transmission lamp.
6-7
Figure 6.3 Alignment target fitted to the lightbar
Preparation
To perform these precise adjustments, it is important that the preparation tasks are correctly completed before the alignment procedure is undertaken. 1. Open the lid. 2. Remove the lightbar assembly. 3. Place the lightbar alignment target on the transmission-lamp (see Figure 6.3). 4. Slacken the four cap-head screws to loosen the capture of the interface plate to the reflection-column casting as shown in Figure 6.4.
6-8
CAP-HEAD SCREWS
Figure 6.4 Location of interface plate adjustment screws
5. Re-fit the lightbar assembly. 6. Close the lid. 7. Ensure that the transmission lamp has turned off (wait if necessary), then run the terminal diagnostics (see Section 5.4).
Alignment Procedure
1. Access setup/carriage menu. 2. Select the light_bar command. Note: The program records an alignment value for both sides of the lightbar. 3. Adjust the position of the interface plate (Figure 6.4).
6-9
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 until front and rear of the lightbar is within 10 points (with a maximum difference of 20) of its maximum reading. Note: The typical maximum reading is 350 points. 5. Tighten the two cap-head screws on the open side of the lightbar. 6. Remove the lightbar assembly. 7. Tighten the other two cap-head screws. 8. Re-fit the lightbar assembly. 9. Repeat Step 2 to confirm alignment conformance. 10. Remove the lightbar alignment target from the transmission lamp. The calibration is now complete. The calibration data should be saved to a secure location. This procedure is described in Section 6.7.
6.4.3
Diff_Focus Alignment
Differential focus adjustment involves the precise setting of the main carriage to correct any alignment errors between the scan head and the main carriage. The procedure used depends on the type of carriage fitted:
For a two wheel carriage, adjustment is made with the

differential focus bar. This is located on the front of the main carriage. It links the two wheel assemblies (see Figure 6.6).
For a one-wheel carriage, adjustment is made with the

adjusting screw mounted on the carriage-wheel mounting (see Figure 6.7). For both types the Engineers Calibration Chart, which includes the Differential Focus Targets, must be mounted on the platen. See Figure 6.5.
6-10
DIFFERENTIAL FOCUS TARGETS
Figure 6.5 Engineers Calibration Chart on platen
The following preparations must be made before adjusting this part of the scanner. 1. Open the lid. 2. Place the Engineers Calibration Chart on the platen (see Figure 6.5). 3. Close the lid.
Adjustment Procedure for Two-wheel Carriage

1. Access the diff_focus test program. e.g. setup/carriage 2. Run the diff_focus test. 3. Read and note the test result (maximum error permitted is 2.5). 4. Access the mech/service menu. 5. Run the camera_service program to position the main carriage at the left-hand end (reverse) its traverse range.
6-11
6. Operate the standby switch to isolate power to the scanner. 7. Remove the lightbar assembly. 8. Open the main cover.
WARNING Do not override the safety interlocks.

9. Remove the light table (see Section 4.16).
CAUTION The differential focus bar must not be adjusted while the nut clamp plate is still tight on the main leadscrew.
10. Release the main leadscrew-nut clamp-plate (see Section 4.19.1). 11. Release locking grub-screw in each wheel pivot nut. 12. Adjust the differential bar, by the number of turns reported in Step 3 (Figure 6.6). Note: One full turn of the differential focus bar is equal to 1 mrad. A clockwise direction makes the reading more negative and a counterclockwise direction makes the reading more positive.
6-12
MORE POSITIVE
LOCKING GRUB-SCREW
MORE NEGATIVE
Figure 6.6 Differential focus bar
13. Lock the locking grub screws in each wheel pivot nut. 14. Lock the main leadscrew nut clamp-plate (see Section 4.19.1). Note: The clamp screw should be tightened one full turn beyond the point when the thread was first engaged. 15. Re-fit the light-table assembly (see Section 4.16). 16. Close the main cover (see Section 4.11). 17. Re-fit the lightbar assembly. 18. Close the lid. 19. Operate the standby switch to power up the scanner. 20. Note any logged reports about the module status. 21. Run mech/carriage test to ensure that no problems have been introduced. 22. Repeat Steps 1. to 20. until the diff_focus errors have been minimized. 23. Remove the engineers calibration chart from the platen.
6-13
Adjustment Procedure for One-wheel Carriage

1. Access the diff_focus test program. e.g. setup/carriage 2. Run the diff_focus test. 3. Read and note the test result (maximum error permitted is 2.5). 4. Access the mech/service menu. 5. Run the camera_service program to position the main carriage at the left-hand end (reverse) its traverse range. 6. Operate the standby switch to isolate power to the scanner. 7. Remove the lightbar assembly. 8. Open the main cover.
WARNING Do not override the safety interlocks.

9. Remove the light table (see Section 4.16).
CAUTION The adjusting screw must not be adjusted while the nut clamp plate is still tight on the main leadscrew.
10. Release the main leadscrew-nut clamp-plate (see Section 4.19.1). 11. Release lock nut on the adjusting screw. 12. Turn the adjusting screw by the number of turns reported in Step 3 (see Figure 6.7).
6-14
Note: One full turn of the adjusting screw is equal to 1 mrad. A clockwise direction makes the reading more negative and a counterclockwise direction makes the reading more positive.
ADJUSTING SCREW MORE NEGATIVE
MORE POSITIVE
Figure 6.7 Adjusting screw
13. Tighten the lock nut on the adjusting screw.
6-15
14. Lock the main leadscrew nut clamp-plate (see Section 4.19.1). Note: The clamp screw should be tightened one full turn beyond the point when the thread was first engaged. 15. Re-fit the light-table assembly (see Section 4.16). 16. Close the main cover (see Section 4.11). 17. Re-fit the lightbar assembly. 18. Close the lid. 19. Operate the standby switch to power up the scanner. 20. Note any logged reports about the module status. 21. Run mech/carriage test to ensure that no problems have been introduced. 22. Repeat Steps 1. to 20. until the diff_focus errors have been minimized. 23. Remove the engineers calibration chart from the platen. The calibration is now complete. The calibration data should be saved to a secure location. This procedure is described in Section 6.7.
6-16
6.5
System Calibration
6.5.1 Calibrate Menu Introduction
System diagnostics and alignment procedures must be complete before any calibration process is performed. The platen area must be clean, the lightbar fitted, the system calibration test target positioned correctly, and the lid closed. Note: If a test result fails, re-check the target for cleanliness, scratches and its placement on the platen. Also check that the platen, transmission white-balance area and mirror are clean. This software consists of procedures to calibrate the following items:
Carriage and X-slide datum. Enlargement focus positions, and chromatic aberration.
Note: These position calibrations are dependent on completion of the carriage and X-slide datum calibrations.
Start of scan offsets.

Note: These offset calibrations are dependent on completion of the focus and enlargment calibrations.
Bad (CCD) pixel mapping. Copy-holder registration-edges calibration.

Note: The calibration of the registration edges is dependent upon completion of the enlargement and focus calibration. Each procedure writes its findings to the system calibration log. Invoking all will automatically run the complete calibration processes sequentially except for the copyholder registration (which requires the engineers calibration chart to be removed from the platen) and bad-pixel mapping.
6-17
Calibrate Tests Menu Path

Main/Setup/calibrate
Table 6.3 Calibrate tests Test Name carriage xslide enlargement offsets all bad_pix max_bad add_bad remove_bad copyholder Test No. 67 69 68 70 Status User Exec User Exec User Exec User Exec User Exec User Exec No User Exec User Exec Remote Description Main carriage datum position calibrated X-slide carriage datum position calibrated. Datum positions for the lens mount and ccd mount are calibrated Start-of-scan offsets calibrated. All of the above tests are composited into an automatic calibration program. Bad pixels identified and mapped for elimination For Factory use only Manually add a specified pixel to the bad pixel map. For factory use only. Manually remove a specified pixel from the bad pixel map. For factory use only. Sets the position of the registration bars. Can also be performed from the Calibrate top-level Application Diagnostics menu, see Section 6.5.9. Enables a search for copyholders each time the scanner lid is closed. Can also be performed from the Calibrate top-level Application Diagnostics menu, see Section 6.5.10. As copy_enable but disables the search. For Factory use only For Factory use only For Factory use only Specifies the CCDs wafer size. See information below.
copy_enable
Remote
copy_disable cal_ccd pos_coeffs neg_coeffs wafer size
Remote No No No User Exec
Note: Some of the above tests will fail if the safety interlocks are activated. CCD data is stored in FLASH. The wafer size depends on the type of CCD in use and must be setup accordingly:
4 inch wafer CCDs:

wafer_size must be set to 4,
6 inch wafer CCDs:

wafer_size must be set to 6. System software Version 1.2 or higher is required to support 6 inch CCDs.
If a field replacement of the system board, system board PROMs or the X-slide carriage is performed, or new firmware is installed, the CCD settings are affected as follows:
If new firmware is downloaded and this is the only change,

then there is no need to set up the CCD parameters as they will remain unchanged.
If new PROMs are fitted or the system board or X-slide

carriage are replaced, then the data must be updated as described in the appropriate replacement procedures.
6.5.2
System Calibration Target Areas

These target areas are included in the engineers calibration chart as shown in Figure 6.1. The chart is placed on the platen at the right-hand edge of the glass abutting to the transmission white-balance area as shown in Figure 6.8.
6.5.3
Main Carriage Datum

This procedure determines the position of the main-carriage datum sensors.
Procedure
1. Type carriage at the cursor position. 2. Press [Return].
6-19
3. Wait for the result of the calibration procedure.

ZIG-ZAG STRIP
MAGNIFICATION BARS
SYSTEM CALIBRATION TARGET
Figure 6.8 Placement of Engineers Calibration Chart
The calibration is now complete. The calibration data, which is in the Flash memory, should be saved to a secure location. This procedure is described in Section 6.7.
6.5.4
X-slide Carriage Datum

This procedure determines the position of the X-slide datum sensor.
Procedure
1. Type xslide at the cursor position. 2. Press [Return].
6-20
3. Wait for the result of the calibration procedure. The calibration is now complete. The calibration data should be saved to a secure location. This procedure is described in Section 6.7.
6.5.5
Enlargement & Focus Calibration

This procedure builds a table of chromatic aberration, enlargement-motor position, and default focus-motor position for each supported optical resolution. Note: This calibration procedure will take about 30 minutes to complete.
Procedure
1. Type enlargement at the cursor position. 2. Press [Return]. 3. Wait for the result of the calibration procedure. The calibration is now complete. The calibration data should be saved to a secure location. This procedure is described in Section 6.7.
6.5.6
Start of Scan Offsets

This procedure builds a table of (x,y) positioning errors for each supported optical resolution at a number of X-slide carriage positions.
Procedure
1. Type offsets at the cursor position.
2. Press [Return]. 3. Wait for the result of the calibration procedure. The calibration is now complete. The calibration data should be saved to a secure location. This procedure is described in Section 6.7.
6.5.7
Bad (CCD) Pixel Elimination

Some pixels perform worse than others. This procedure detects those bad pixels which must be eliminated to diminish their effect on the quality of the scan. Note: It is not recommended that this procedure is used when replacing the X-slide carriage. Factory-determined bad-pixel location data will be supplied on a floppy disk which comes with the carriage.
Procedure
1. Type ccd at the cursor position. 2. Press [Return]. 3. Wait for the result of the calibration procedure. The calibration is now complete. The calibration data should be saved to a secure location. This procedure is described in Section 6.7.
6.5.8
All
This procedure, with the exception of the copyholder registration edge calibration procedure, will sequentially process each of the other calibration procedures. Note: Do not use this procedure unless the engineers calibration chart is available.
6-22
Procedure
1. Type all at the cursor position. 2. Press [Return]. 3. Wait for the result of the calibration procedure. The calibration is now complete. The calibration data should be saved to a secure location. This procedure is described in Section 6.7.
6.5.9
Registration Bar Calibration

This calibration procedure is only required for installations where copymounts or copyholders are to be used.
SHORT REGISTRATION BAR
C-SCAN LONG REGISTRATION BAR FOR USE WITH COPYHOLDERS
EARLY C-SCAN LONG REGISTRATION BAR DO NOT USE FOR THIS CALIBRATION
Figure 6.9 Registration bars
1. Position the registration bars on the platen, locating the lugs on the base of the bars in the holes provided. Ensure that the area underneath the window in the short registration bar is clean. See the following drawing.
6-23
WINDOW
Figure 6.10 Fitting registration bars to platen
2. To take up the free play in locating holes, push the bars outwards from the platen centre, in the direction of the arrows as shown above. 3. Close the top lid. 4. Locate the Diagnostics application in the C-scan / C-scan Plus folder and double-click it to start the launch.
6-24
5. Open the Diagnostics folder.
6. Open the Mac folder and select Diagnostics . The Diagnostics application opens.
7. From the Calibrate menu, choose Run.
8. The Scanner Calibrations windows appears. Click the Calibrate option to expand the display.
6-25
9. Select the copyholder option. Note that you cannot use the Select button to select this option, you must click the menu entry, copyholder.
10. Click OK to complete the selection.
11. The Scanner Calibration window appears. If the scanner is not already selected, select the Scanner on ID.... box for the scanner to be calibrated.
12. Click the Clapper Board icon to start the calibration.
6-26
During the calibration the message next to the selected scanner displays Running . When completed successfully the message displays Passed. If the calibration fails: a) Clean the area of the platen under the window in the short register bar. Also check that the window area is unobstructed. b) Check that the register bars are correctly installed. c) Repeat the calibration by clicking the Clapper Board icon. d) If the calibration fails again, contact your vendor. 13. When the procedure is successfully completed, click the Hand icon to close the window.
14. Quit the Diagnostics application. The scanner will reboot automatically.
6-27
The calibration is now complete. The calibration data should be saved to a secure location. This procedure is described in Section 6.7.
6.5.10
Copyholder Search Enable/Disable

When using copyholders it is necessary to perform a search for copyholders mounted on the platen. This search is performed each time the scanner lid is closed. If copyholders are not used there is no reason for this scan and the search function can be disabled. The function can be switched from the Terminal Diagnostics or from the top-level menu of the Application Diagnostics. To enable or disable copyholders using the Application Diagnostics, follow the procedure described in the previous section, but when the test selection is made choose copy_enable or copy_disable , as required.
Note that the scanner will not respond to the change in status until it has been rebooted.
6-28
6.6
C-dot SP Calibrations
If the customer intends using C-dot SP to process C-dot images captured on a C-550 Lanovia scanner it will be necessary to perform two sharpness calibration procedures, using the C-dot Scanner Calibration Target. The purpose of these calibrations is to ensure that the sharpness of images captured is uniform across the X-direction width of the scanner. The calibrations are run at resolutions of 36 lines/mm and 45 lines/mm. See Sections 6.6.1 and 6.6.2. You also need to perform the swathe-scanning calibration procedure. This procedure ensures accurate stitching of images when the image width exceeds 220 mm. See Section 6.6.3.
6.6.1
C-dot Platen Calibration for Sharpness at 36 Lines/mm

Note: This calibration is required once only unless certain replacements have been performed. It will be necessary to repeat the calibration if the camera is replaced. It will also be necessary if the system board is replaced and the calibration data has not been saved. Before you start:
Locate the test target. This is supplied in the upgrade pack. The scanner firmware must be Version 3.0 or later. The workstation diagnostics must be Version 3.2 or later. Ensure that the transmission lamp is warmed up for about
5 minutes before the calibration is started. To perform the calibration: 1. Locate the short registration bar on the platen. 2. Place the C-dot Scanner Calibration Target on the platen so that it butts against the short registration bar. Ensure that the grey panel covers the whole of the platen height.
6-29
TOP
C-DOT SCANNER CALIBRATION TARGET
BOTTOM
Figure 6.11 C-dot scanner calibration target on platen
3. Place the A3 cover glass over the target. (If you attempt to perform this procedure without the short registration bar in place, you must ensure that the cover glass and target do not cover the white balance area.) 4. Open the C-scan application folder on the Macintosh attached to the scanner.
6-30
WHITE BALANCE AREA
5. Open the Diagnostics folder. 6. Open the Diagnostics application. The tool bar appears as shown below.
7. From the top-level Calibrate menu, choose Run.
The Scanner Calibrations window appears.
8. Click Copydot to select the copydot menu.
6-31
9. Click Scanner36 to select the option.
10. Click OK to display the Scanner Calibration window.
6-32
11. Ensure that the appropriate Scanner ID has been selected. Click the appropriate box if required.
13. Click the Stop icon to close the Scanner Calibration window.
6-33
6.6.2
C-dot Platen Calibration for Sharpness at 45 Lines/mm

This procedure is identical to that described in the previous section, except that you need to choose scanner45 from the copydot menu in the Scanner calibrations window.
6.6.3
Swathe Scanning Calibration

Note: This calibration is required once only unless certain replacements have been performed. It will be necessary to repeat the calibration if the camera is replaced or the X-slide datum calibration has been performed. It will also be necessary if the system board is replaced and the calibration data has not been saved. Before you start:
Locate the test target. This is supplied in the upgrade pack. The scanner firmware must be Version 3.0 or later. The workstation diagnostics must be Version 3.2 or later. Ensure that the transmission lamp is warmed up for about
5 minutes before the calibration is started. To perform the calibration: 1. Locate the short registration bar on the platen.
6-34
2. Place the Swathe Scanning Calibration Target on the platen:
ensure that the black lines are against the top and left
edges of the platen, just touching the black platen surround,
ensure that the test target does not cover the transmission
white-balance area,
also ensure that the text is right reading as viewed from

above.
BLACK LINES
SWATHE SCANNING CALIBRATION TARGET
Figure 6.12 Swathe scanning calibration target on platen
3. Place the A3 cover glass over the target. (If you attempt to perform this procedure without the short registration bar in place, you must ensure that the cover glass and target do not cover the white balance area.) 4. Open the C-scan application folder on the Macintosh attached to the scanner.
6-35
5. Open the Diagnostics folder. 6. Open the Diagnostics application. The tool bar appears as shown below.
7. From the top-level Calibrate menu, choose Run.
6-36
The Scanner Calibrations window appears.
8. Click Copydot to select the copydot menu.
9. Click platen to select the option.
6-37
10. Click OK to display the Scanner Calibration window.
11. Ensure that the appropriate Scanner ID has been selected. Click the appropriate box if required.
6-38
During the calibration the message next to the selected scanner displays Running . When completed successfully, the message displays Passed. If the calibration fails: a) Check the position on the platen: Are all the arrows just touching the edge of the platen and not under or overlapping the platen edge? Are both cross-hairs exactly 175 mm from the top edge of the platen? If the target is skewed the calibration will fail.
175 mm
CROSS-HAIRS
Figure 6.13 Swathe scanning calibration target on platen showing cross-hairs
b) Clean the area of the platen under the window in the short registration bar. c) Check that this area is unobstructed by either the film or the cover glass. d) Check that the A3 cover glass is scrupulously clean, especially the area of glass covering the pattered area of the target. e) Repeat the calibration by clicking the Clapper Board icon.
6-39
f) If the calibration fails again, contact your vendor. 13. Click the Stop icon to close the Scanner Calibration window.
6-40
6.7
Saving Calibration Data to a Secure Location

Data from calibrations is held on the system board. Should the system board fail this data will be lost and the recovery time will be delayed while all calibrations are repeated. To minimize the effect of such a failure it is recommended that the calibration file is copied to a secure location such as a Macintosh or a remote disk. 1. Choose Read Buffer from the Buffers menu.
2. In the Save As window, enter the name of the destination file, (cal file for example) and specify an appropriate destination.
6-41
3. Click Save.
The Read Buffer window opens with Calibration selected by default in the Buffer ID menu.
4. Select the scanner, if not already selected. 5. Click the Clapper Board icon to start reading the buffer data.
The calibration file in the destination folder is updated.
6-42
6. Click the Stop icon to close the Read Buffers window.
7. Select Quit from the File menu to exit the diagnostics.
8. For added security it is recommended that if the calibration file was copied to the scanner Macintosh the file should also be copied to a floppy disk and stored in a safe place away from the scanner.
6-43
6-44
7 Workstation Diagnostics
This chapter provides descriptions and procedures for using the workstation diagnostics.
7.1
Introduction
The workstation diagnostics are used by both the customer and the field service engineer. Diagnostic operations are controlled by software loaded on a workstation connected by a single-ended SCSI cable to the C-550 Lanovia Scanner. The workstation has integrated diagnostic software for many of the maintenance functions of the scanner.
7-1
7.2
Launching the Diagnostics Application

1. Open the C-scan application folder.
2. Open the Diagnostics folder.
3. Open the Diagnostics application. The tool bar appears as shown below.
7-2
Up to seven scanner log boxes appear as shown below.
The diagnostic tests allow up to seven C-550 Lanovia scanners to be tested simultaneously. Each scanner log box will display the test results for each scanner whose SCSI ID appears in the windows title bar. For example, Scanner 0 log box will display the test results for the scanner whose SCSI ID is 0.
7-3
7.3
Workstation Diagnostics Menus

You can select the following sub-menus from the top-level menu.
7.3.1
File Menu
Save As
Select this option to save and name a copy of the active scanner log box. Use a non-default filename.
Print
Select this to print a selected log file.
7-4
Print Preview
Select this to display a selected log file in print-out format.
Print Setup
Selects a printer and printer connection.
Verbose
Select to obtain detailed error messages in the scanner log box.
Temperature Readings
Adds the scanner temperature reading to any error message received from one of the diagnostics tests.
Clear Logs
Clears all text from all of the error logs. It also adds a time stamp to each of the newly created files.
Quit
Select this to exit the C-550 Lanovia Workstation Diagnostics.
7-5
7.3.2
View menu
The View menu allows you to show or hide the toolbar and the status bar. When selected, the Toolbar appears at the top of the screen. It has icon buttons for most of the common diagnostics commands. For more information on the Toolbar, see Section 7.4. When selected, the Status bar appears at the bottom of the screen. It describes the purpose of a selected option and also how much time has elapsed during a test.
7.3.3
Window Menu
The Window menu offers the following commands, which enable you to arrange multiple views of multiple documents in the application window.
7-6
Arrange Icons
This option has no effect in the Macintosh environment.
Scanner 0 - 6
The C-550 Lanovia Diagnostics displays a list of the scanner log windows at the bottom of the Window menu. A check mark appears in front of the document name of the active window. Choose a log from the list to make its window active.
7.3.4
Configuration Menu
The Configuration menu allows you to interrogate a scanner that is connected to the SCSI bus.
7-7
Rescan
Select this option to make the system check all seven SCSI addresses for the presence of a C-550 Lanovia scanner. [F9] on the keyboard also selects this function.
Scanner 0 - 6
Each of the Scanner options access the following sub-menus:
Details
Obtains information about the scanner at this SCSI ID.
7-8
7-9
Carriage Positions
Locates the main carriage and scan head in certain pre-defined positions.
Park
This moves the main carriage to its right-hand (datum) position. (This is its normal position when not scanning.) This position is required when changing the reflection lamp.
Camera service
This moves the main carriage to its left-hand position. This position is required when changing the light-table lamp.
Transit fixing
This moves the main carriage to its central position to allow for the removal or replacement of certain transit fixings.
7-10
7.3.5
Buffers Menu
The scanner has a number of buffer areas that can be downloaded from, or uploaded to, the workstation. The scanner application system code will require updating as new releases are generated and issued to customers. These updates are normally performed by the customer. The relevant information for these activities is available in the Users Guide. However, there are other buffer areas of the system that may be needed by the service engineer. These can be:
uploaded from the system board to the workstation, or downloaded from the workstation to the system board.
Uploading/downloading operations are performed using commands available from the Buffers menu.
Load Code
Use this command to open the Download Code dialog box which is used to download a new release of the scanner application system, or boot system, to the assigned place in the scanners memory. The software download procedure is described in Section 7.7.
Write Buffer
Use to open the Write Buffer dialog box. Refer to Section 7.3.6 for details about the content of each type of SCSI buffer.
7-11
CAUTION To maintain system integrity, some SCSI buffers cannot be overwritten with the Write Buffer command.
This option allows data such as the Calibration File to be written to the scanner after the system board is replaced. To write calibration data to a scanner: 1. Choose Write Buffer from the Buffers menu.
2. A directory dialog box appears which allows the selection of the file which is to be written to a scanner.
7-12
3. Click Open . The Write Buffer dialog box opens.
4. In the Write Buffer dialog box, check a box in the Selected Scanners display to select the destination scanner. 5. Choose the appropriate buffer identity (Calibration in this example) from the Buffer ID menu. 6. Click the Go button.
When the file has been written to the scanner a Complete message will appear to the right of the selected checkbox in the Selected Scanners display. 7. Exit by clicking the Stop tool button.
7-13
Read Buffer
Use to open the Read Buffer dialog box. Refer to Section 7.3.6 for details about the content of each type of SCSI buffer. This option allows data such as Calibration File data to be saved so that it can quickly be re-installed, when the system board is replaced, for example. Unless Calibration data is saved before the system board is removed the data will be lost. It is recommended that this data be saved to disk during installation, as a security measure. To save Calibration file data: 1. Choose Read Buffer from the Buffers menu.
7-14
Note: The destination of the Calibration file is selected automatically. 2. In the Save as box, enter a file name for the Calibration file you are to save. It is suggested that you use the naming convention: # cal file. 3. Click Save. The Read Buffer dialog box opens.
7-15
4. Choose the Buffer data type from the Buffer ID menu, (Calibration in this case). 5. In the Selected Scanners display, check the box next to the the scanner from which you are saving the the data. 6. Click the Go button.
When the file has been saved a Complete message will appear to the right of the selected checkbox in the Selected Scanners display. 7. Exit by clicking the Stop tool button.
7-16
It is recommended that this file is copied to floppy disk and that the disk stored in a safe place. The Calibration file will be found in the C-scan 3.1 Diagnostics C-550 Lanovia Mac folder. It can be read using BBEdit.
7.3.6
SCSI Buffers
The identities of the SCSI buffers are shown in Table 7.1.
Scanner Application System

Contains the scanning application and diagnostics system code. The scanner application system buffer can be only updated choosing Load Code from the Buffers menu.
DRAM Area
Accesses the DRAM area on the system board.
Boot System
Runs the initial Power On Self-Tests (POSTs). On a successful completion, the scanner application system is validated and if OK, is run. The boot system exists, to allow SCSI downloads to take place even if there is no valid scanner application system in the flash memory.
7-17
The scanner boot system buffer can be only updated using the Load Code command from the Buffers menu.
Table 7.1 SCSI Buffer identities
ID #
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Description
Scanner application system. Not Used. DRAM area. Boot system. Not Used. Not Used. Not Used. Not Used. Calibration data. Reserved. Scanner application system log. Diagnostics FLASH log. Diagnostics RAM log. Not Used. Not Used. Not Used. Scripts buffer. Reserved. Reserved. Reserved. Reserved. Statistical data.
Access
Read Read/Write Read Read/Write Read/Write Read/Write Read/Write Read/Write Read/Write
Type
Binary Binary Binary Text Text Text Text Text Text
Location
Flash DRAM Flash Flash Flash Flash DRAM Flash Flash
Calibration Data
Contains all data generated from running the calibration procedures described in Chapter 6. The data can be read using a simple text editor, such as simple text (Macintosh), or Notepad (PC).
7-18
Note: This must be saved on installation to store on the Macintosh and a floppy disk, as it will be required if the system board is changed.
CAUTION Corrupting the calibration data will seriously affect the scanners ability to work to its specification.
Scanner Application System Log

Information on all detected errors, or system crashes, can be found in this buffer. This information can be uploaded to the workstation for off-line analysis. The data can be read using a simple text editor.
Diagnostics FLASH Log

During terminal diagnostics, the output can be directed to a FLASH log using the flog command. This information can be uploaded to the workstation for off-line analysis. The data can be read using a simple text editor.
Diagnostics RAM Log

During terminal diagnostics, the output can be directed to a RAM log using the rlog command.
7-19
This information can be uploaded to the workstation for off-line analysis. The data can be read using a simple text editor.
Scripts Buffer
This buffer contains all system scripts. Scripts are used to combine individual tests into a composite test to more fully exercise the scanner. As an alternative to generating scripts directly on the scanner scripts can be uploaded to the workstation, edited, and downloaded back to the scanner for execution. The data can be read using a simple text editor.
CAUTION When creating scripts, avoid using the name STARTUP. The startup script, if present, is run as part of the scanner application system power-up sequence.
Statistical Data
Contains statistical information about the system. This data can be uploaded to the workstation for future analysis.
7-20
7.3.7
Tests Menu
The Tests menu allows you to select either the diagnostic tests, the electronic repro tests, or soak tests.
Diagnostic Tests (Ctrl+T)
Use to run the available tests on the specified scanner.
Run:
This opens the Diagnostic Tests dialogue box which allows you to select the scanner(s), connected to the SCSI bus, on which to run the diagnostic tests. The use of the Run function is described in Section 7.5.
Select:
This option allows specific tests to be selected from the elec, mech and optics menus. Choose the Diagnostic Tests to run on the scanner.
Fast Keys:
This opens the Fast Keys dialogue box.
7-21
The Fast Keys dialogue box allows you to run a user defined suite of tests by simply pressing the appropriate function key. You select the diagnostic tests you want performed in the Diagnostic Tests dialogue box in Select mode, click Save to open the Fast Keys dialogue box, click an F key tab which can be either [F5], [F6], [F7] or [F8], enter a description in the blank field to identify the tests, and click OK. To view a suite of tests allocated to a Function key, click the F key tab and click Tests. The Diagnostic Tests dialogue box appears showing the enabled and the disabled tests. Default [F5] settings select a suitable range of customer tests which are needed to prove the functionality of the scanner.
7-22
Electronic Repro (Ctrl+R)
Use to run the available tests on the specified scanner(s).
Run:
This opens the Repro Tests dialogue box which allows you to run the Electronic Repro tests. For more information on running Repro Tests, see Section 7.6.
Display:
This displays the Display Image dialogue box which allows you to locate and display the electronic repro test image which you have scanned on the C-550 Lanovia scanner.
7-23
Use to get a simple view of the image on disk, by clicking the mouse button.
Disk Image:
This is a toggle option. Select this option if you want to view the results from the previous Electronic Repro Test.
Limits:
Shows the installed limits for the electronic repro test. In released software this will always show Customer Settings as being selected and cannot be changed.
Soak Tests (Ctrl+S)
Selecting Soak Run displays the Soak Tests dialogue box. This allows you to select the scanner(s), connected to the SCSI bus, on which to run tests which include both Diagnostic and Electronic Repro tests.
7-24
The Calib. Slide box must be unchecked when performing Electronic Repro tests using the Repro Test transparency but checked when using the Engineers Calibration Chart, otherwise the wrong area of the platen will be scanned.
7.3.8
Calibrate Menu
The Calibrate option allows the location of register bars on the platen to be set up and the copyholder search function to be enabled or disabled. These functions are described in Sections 6.5.9 and 6.5.10 respectively. C-dot calibrations are also
7-25
accessed from this menu. These procedures are described in Section 6.6.
7-26
7.4
Tool Bar Buttons
Click on this to open the Print dialogue box. The Print dialogue box is also opened by selecting Print from the File menu. Click to toggle Verbose on or off.
Click to toggle temperature readings in the Scanner Log on or off.
Click on this to open the Diagnostic Tests dialogue box.
Click on this to open the Repro Tests dialogue box.
Click on this icon to open the Soak Tests dialogue box.
Clicking on this icon opens a file selection menu which allows a Code file to be selected for downloading to the scanner. This procedure is described in Section 7.7. Incorrect use could make the scanner inoperable and require a service visit. Click on this icon to display the copyright notice and version number of your C-550 Lanovia diagnostics. Click on this icon if you want information to be displayed about a function. The cursor changes to an arrow and a question mark. When you move the cursor to a function and click, a Help window opens containing information about the function. Double-click on this icon to display information about this function.
7-27
7.5
Diagnostic Tests
Select Diagnostic Tests - Run in the Tests menu.
The Diagnostic Tests dialogue box appears.
Check the box next to the scanner on which you want to run the tests. Double click anywhere on the background of the Diagnostics Tests window to put a marker in the Log box.
7-28
Press [F5] to select a range of customer tests which will prove the functionality of the scanner. The Tests slider gives an indication of the number of tests selected. Specify the number of times you want the tests to be repeated by typing a value in the Loop 0 of field. You can enter a value up to 999. If you do not want the tests to stop when an error occurs, uncheck Stop on Error. To start the tests, click:
To stop the tests at any time, click:
A slider moves to the right as the tests progress, status messages appear in the Selected Scanners panel next to the selected
7-29
scanner, and the name of the current test being performed appears below the slider.
It takes approximately thirty minutes to perform all of the diagnostic tests. If any errors occur, messages appear in the scanner log box. To remove the error messages in a scanner log box, double-click within the scanner log box to display the following confirmation box.
Click Yes to remove all error messages in the scanner log box.
7-30
7.6
Electronic Repro Tests

The Electronic Repro set of tests are used to validate scanning performance. Before proceeding with the Electronic Repro tests, ensure that the condition of the scanner has been set up correctly:
Perform the electronic, mechanical and optical tests,

described in Chapter 5, and obtain a pass result.
Then, perform the relevant alignment procedures, described

in Chapter 6. The tests check a number of parameters to ensure that the:
rotation mechanism and defined resolutions are accurate, degree of chromatic aberration, flare and jitter are acceptable, and the image signal levels, coming from the camera head,
are consistent and accurate. If a Electronic Repro test fails, then performance of the Terminal Diagnostic tests will be necessary to establish the correction strategy. (See Chapter 5.)
7.6.1
Electronic Repro Test Subjects

The Electronic Repro tests require a test subject to be mounted on the platen. The subject is provided in two forms:
The Electronic Repro Transparency is designed specifically

for the Electronic Repro test (see Figure 7.1). It is to be left with the customer after installation so that they can perform Electronic Repro tests as described in the Users Guide.
The Engineers Calibration Chart is a multi-function test

subject which includes the Electronic Repro test subject (See Figure 7.2).
7-31
Electronic Repro Target Part No. 7542015002
Figure 7.1 Electronic Repro Transparency
ELECTRONIC REPRO TEST SUBJECT
Figure 7.2 Engineers Calibration Chart
7-32
CAUTION The test subject must be clean and undamaged. Dirty or damaged (scratched emulsion) subjects may cause the tests to fail.
7.6.2
Positioning the Electronic Repro Test Subject

1. Open the lid. 2. Make sure the lightbar is fitted. 3. Make sure the platen area is clean. 4. Fit the short registration edge to the platen. 5. Place the test subject on the platen:
The text must be right reading as viewed from above. The arrow heads must point towards the top edge of the
platen.
The film must be positioned against the registration edge. The arrow heads on the film must be aligned with the top
edge of the platen glass.
EDGE OF GLASS PLATEN
Fujifilm Electronic Imaging Ltd Part No. 7542015002
7-33
CAUTION The Electronic Repro Test transparency must be positioned correctly. If not it will cause the tests to fail.
7-34
REPRO TEST TRANSPARENCY

TOP EDGE OF PLATEN GLASS ARROWS POINTING TOWARDS TOP OF PLATEN
REGISTRATION EDGE TEXT: RIGHT READING AS VIEWED FROM ABOVE
ENGINEERS CALIBRATION CHART
TOP EDGE OF PLATEN GLASS
If the test transparency is not positioned and orientated correctly the test will fail. 6. Close the top lid.
7-35
7.6.3
Electronic Repro Procedure

1. Run the workstation diagnostics (See Chapter 7). 2. From the Tests menu, ensure that Verbose is selected. 3. From the Tests menu, select Electronic Repro Run.
4. If the large Engineering Calibration Chart is used, check the Calib. Slide box. If the Electronic Repro Transparency is being used, ensure that the Calib. Slide box is unchecked. 5. Select the appropriate scanner number from those made available in dialog box. 6. Click on the Go icon.
7-36
7. Wait while the progress bar reaches its endpoint. Note: This is at the end of the image scan. 8. Wait while the tests are being performed on the electronic repro image. 9. Read the test result. If the result is Passed, the test has been completed successfully. If the result is Failed , look in the Scanner Log for the reason then do the following: a) Examine the image (repro[scsi id].tif) by selecting Electronic Repro Display then opening the image from the directory which appears. The image is located in the C-scan Diagnostics C-550 Lanovia Mac folder. Ensure that TIFF files are displayed by selecting TIFF Files from the List Files of Type menu. The image should show six, thick, grey lines with diagonal lines between (see below). If no image appears, check that you positioned the image correctly on the platen as described in Section 7.6.2.
Figure 7.3 Electronic repro image
b) Repeat Steps 1 to 3. c) If the tests fail again, ensure that the Calib. Slide checkbox has the correct selection and change as required, icon see Step 4. If this was correct, double-click the to display the Scan Details window and ensure that the Slow and Fast Offsets have not been altered. They should be set as follows:
7-37
Workstation Diagnostics Electronic Repro Transparency Slow Offset Fast Offset 50 35 Engineers Calibration Chart 240 35
If the selection or the parameters were incorrectly set, repeat Steps 1 to 3. d) Run the Diagnostics tests, see Section 7.5. e) Remove the electronic repro slide. f) Perform the required alignment procedures (refer to Section 6.4.2 for lightbar, or Section 6.4.3 for differential focus). g) Repeat Steps 1 to 8 of this section. The data can be read using a simple text editor.
7-38
7.7
Downloading Firmware to the Scanner

This procedure is required when new firmware has been supplied. It is not required as a part of the installation procedure as firmware is loaded before delivery of the scanner. 1. Launch user diagnostics as described in Section 7.2. 2. Click on Download tool button.
The file selection window opens.
3. From the file directory, find the C-scan3.1 folder (or later level) then select Diagnostics C-550 Lanovia V1.2 (or later level) Appl .
7-39
4. Unless already selected, select Binary Files from the List Files of Type menu.
5. Highlight mrscan.bin and click Open . The Download Code window appears.
7-40
6. Select the scanner you want to download the firmware to. 7. Set File type to Flash if required. Note that Flash is selected by default.
7-41
8. Click the Go tool button.
A slider moves to the right while the firmware data is downloading.
9. When the firmware has downloaded, the scanner automatically reboots. Note that this can take up to three minutes.
7-42
When the scanner has re-booted, Complete appears.
7-43
10. Unless you have to download a new bootstrap program, exit by clicking the Stop tool button.
11. If a new bootstrap program is required to be downloaded, use the top menu to move back up to the v1_nn directory, highlight boot and click Open .
7-44
12. Select S record files from the List Files of Type menu.
13. Highlight mrscan.hex and click Open .
7-45
The Download Code window appears.
14. Select the scanner required and select the Boot radio button. Note that the Flash button is selected by default.
7-46
15. Click the Go icon. The sequence of events is the same as for downloading the scanner firmware. Note that if the Boot button is not selected, a SCSI Check Condition error message appears. If this message appears, click OK. Failed appears next to the selected scanner box. Ensure the Boot button is selected and repeat the above procedure for downloading the bootstrap program.
7-47
7-48
8 Maintenance
This chapter provides a general description of the maintenance procedures for the C-550 Lanovia Scanner.
8.1
Introduction
The scanner has been designed with a minimum level of necessary maintenance. For example, the leadscrews do not need any form of lubrication. However, all equipment undergoes a change in performance over time and the produced images can be below an acceptable standard because the optical components have collected dust/dirt on their surfaces. It is important to follow all applicable safety and health instructions, and to remove rings from fingers when cleaning around the underside of the platen.
8.1.1
Maintenance and Service

Normally, regular maintenance will be carried out by the customer (refer to C-550 Lanovia Scanner Users Guide). Maintenance is quick and easy to carry out. Service visits shall occur only when a modular unit is required to be replaced by another unit. Servicing and maintenance visits require the use of tools listed in Section 4.1. Certain diagnostic tests are accessible from the host workstation (see Chapter 7). Terminal diagnostic tests (see Chapter 5) are only available via the RS232 diagnostic port on the side of the RFI box.
8-1
Maintenance
Field adjustments and alignments should be performed as part of the replacement procedure of certain components. Appendix A provides the important electrical reference data and Appendix B provides some guidance on fault diagnosis. When required, the appropriate calibration procedures (see Chapter 6) should be performed after receiving no fault messages from the diagnostic procedures. Any software or firmware upgrades or fixes shall be installed by the customer, using workstation software. The final quality assurance test is the electronic repro test (see Section 7.6).
8.2
Safety Interlock Checks

Remove the RFI box cover and identify the two large interlock relays on the system board. These relays have an aperture in the top cover. This aperture shows red when the relay is energized. With the main and standby switches On, the safety interlocks are meant to operate when the following conditions exist:
With the lightbar fitted, the left-hand relay must be energized

when the lid is closed and de-energized when the lid is open.
With the lightbar removed, the left-hand relay must be

energized when the lid is open. Note: If the relay is not energized, reset the protrusion height of the lid interlocks (see Section 4.13.2).
With the lightbar removed, and the main cover open, both
relays must be de-energized. With the main cover closed, the right-hand relay must be energized. Note: If the relay is not energized, reset the protrusion height of the main cover interlocks (see Section 4.13.1).
8-2
Maintenance
8.3
Cleaning Procedures
The optical components need cleaning no more than once per year. The environment for the scanner is defined as a Class M environment by BS5295 Part 1 1989.
8.3.1
Handling and Cleaning of Optical Components

Customer service engineers must understand the health and safety conditions for the techniques and materials to be used in the cleaning of optical components. The procedures, and use of approved materials and substances, for handling and cleaning optical components must minimize the risk of damage.
Recommended List of Tools

The following tools items will be required for cleaning the optical components that are located in the scanner.
Protrusion height ruler, Latex disposable gloves, Squeeze bulb - without brush, Repro wipes, Cotton buds without plastic stems, Sable brush, Glass polishing cloth, System calibration target, Electronic repro slide, Selvyt cloth.
8-3
Maintenance
Approved Materials
Approved materials and handling tools must be available for the cleaning operations before starting work. The following cleaning agents are recommended:
KAMI DC2001 - for removing tape adhesive from the topside

of the platen.
NILCO glass cleaner - for removing dirt from the platen. Iso-propyl alcohol (IPA) - for use on the CCD-window, but
should not be extensively used.
Liquid paraffin (transparency mounting oil) - for cleaning

scratched surfaces, but should not be extensively used.
CAUTION Any cleaning, or handling operation, of a delicate optical component like a coated platen, mirror, lens, or CCD-window carries a risk of causing damage to the component.
Policy
Cleaning and handling procedures are both capable of inflicting damage on a delicate optical surface. Handling procedures must not be designed to only prevent direct damage, they must also prevent contamination which will need to be cleaned off later, risking further damage. Touching critical surfaces must be avoided. Packaging of optical components must ensure the minimum handling necessary when removing or unwrapping the component. This is just as important to the service engineer who may need to return the camera head sub-assembly to the factory.
Maintenance
The overriding advice is Dont clean unless you have to. It is only necessary to clean a surface if there is reason to think that the contamination is absorbing or scattering light. Clean according to the advised procedures, having regard to the materials of the component and the nature of the contamination. This risk can be minimized by using:
handling procedures which avoid contamination by dust,

fingermarks etc.,
cleaning glass and coated surfaces only when this is

necessary, not as a routine operation,
defined cleaning procedures for all delicate components,

using materials and techniques which minimize the risk of damage.
Visual Inspection
The following are guideline procedures for general use:
Look at the optical component surface against a matt black

background.
Obliquely illuminate the optical component from either the

front or rear. Visual inspection may optionally use a low power (x3) magnifier lens. Contamination will be seen as dust particles, smears or streaks, or as a uniform grime coating. Often, this test can be done in-situ, by inserting a matt black card on the opposite side of the component and illuminating the optical face with a torch. There is no definitive specification of when a lens needs to be cleaned. When there are no image defects (see Appendix B) in the output results, dont clean an optical component just because it looks dirty.
8-5
Maintenance
Cleaning Processes
The procedure to be adopted in cleaning an optical component depends on:
the nature of the contamination, the material of the component - glass, plastic, metal etc., whether the component is loose or mounted.
Dry dust adhering to an optical surface can be difficult to remove. A puff of air from a squeeze bulb will dislodge and re-distribute loose dust. Dusting with a dry brush or wiping with a lint-free cloth will only re-distribute the dust, and may add more if the brush is already contaminated from previous dusting operations. Dust is best removed by wiping the optical component with a recommended solvent followed by gently drying it with a clean repro wipe. A coated platen, mounted in a metal housing, is difficult to clean by any of the above methods. Dry cleaning with a soft cloth only re-distributes the dust and the platen coating may become scratched in the process. One method of cleaning dust, is to take a clean lens tissue, or a repro wipe and form it into a loose swab. Then, dampen the swab with the approved cleaner (do not use acetone anywhere in the system), and gently wipe it over the surface. Finally, take a dry lens tissue and repeat the process, but in a different direction. Repeat this process until no smudges or particles can be seen when being visually inspected.
8.3.2
Cleaning Preparations and Completions

The following preparations must be made. 1. Position main carriage for Camera service (see Section 4.12). 2. Open the main cover (see Section 4.11). 3. Remove the light table (see Section 4.16).
8-6
Maintenance
4. Prepare solutions and tools for use (see Section 4.1). 5. Remove rings from fingers and put on a new pair of latex gloves. 6. Perform the necessary cleaning procedures. 7. On completion re-fit the light table (see Section 4.16). 8. Close the main cover (see Section 4.11). 9. Perform the scanner health (confidence) check (see Section 8.4).
PLATEN
CCD-WINDOW MIRROR BAFFLE LENS
Figure 8.1 Optical components
8.3.3
Platen Cleaning Procedures CAUTION Do not use IPA to Clean the platen surfaces. Use only the recommended solvents.
8-7
Maintenance
Topside Procedure
1. Use a clean repro wipe, dampened with Kami DC2001, to remove local areas of tape adhesive. 2. Use a clean repro wipe, dampened with Nilco cleaner, to clean the topside of the platen. 3. Use a Selvyt cloth to polish the platen surface.
Underside Procedure
Note: Both sides of the glass have a special anti-reflective coating which is vital to the performance of the scanning operation. Ordinary glass does not produce the required scan results.
CAUTION Normally, the following procedure should not be required. If it is necessary, then do not attempt to remove the platen. Any disturbance will affect the calibration profile.
Note: The light table should have been removed during the cleaning preparation procedure (see Section 8.3.2). 1. Visually inspect the under-surface of the platen for deposits of dust or dirt. Note: If the under-surface is reasonably clean do not perform any cleaning procedure. 2. Mechanically, move the main carriage to the right-hand end (Park) position (see Section 4.12.3). 3. Use a repro wipe, dampened with Nilco, to clean the left-half of the under-surface.
8-8
Maintenance
4. Use a repro wipe to dry the under-surface of the left-hand side. 5. Mechanically, move the main carriage to the left-hand end (Camera service) position. 6. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for the right-half of the under-surface.
8.3.4
Mirror Cleaning Procedure

1. Visually inspect the surface of the mirror for deposits of dust or dirt. Note: If the surface is reasonably clean do not perform any cleaning procedure. 2. Use the squeeze bulb to blow away any loose dust or dirt and repeat Step 1. 3. Use a lens tissue, dampened with IPA, to gently clean the surface of the mirror. Note: Do not wipe the surface aggressively as this action could cause more damage.
8.3.5
Lens Cleaning Procedure

1. Visually inspect the surface of the lens for deposits of dust or dirt. Note: If the surface is reasonably clean do not perform any cleaning procedure. 2. Use a lens tissue, soaked in IPA, to gently clean the surface of the lens. Note: Do not use cotton buds which have sharp pointed plastic stems.
8-9
Maintenance
8.3.6
CCD-Window Cleaning Procedure

Note: This procedure cannot be performed while the CCD image sensor baffle is fitted. However, in the event of any accidental contact with the CCD-window, while the enlargement sensor is being replaced, use this cleaning procedure. 1. Visually inspect the surface of the CCD-window for deposits of dust or fingerprints. Note: If the surface is reasonably clean do not perform any cleaning procedure. 2. Use a lens tissue, dampened with IPA, to clean the surface of the CCD-window.
8-10
Maintenance
8.4
Scanner Health (Confidence) Check

This confidence check is performed to satisfy the customer that the scanner is performing according to the set parameters. The following procedures must be carried out: Note: If any of the following procedures fail, perform the necessary fault diagnosis (see Appendix B) and replace the appropriate units (see Chapter 4) before trying again. 1. Perform the cleaning procedures (see Section 8.3). 2. Check the enclosure fan filter (see Section 4.8) 3. Perform a full range of diagnostic tests (see Section 5.3). 4. Perform the full range of calibration tests (see Section 6.5). 5. Perform the electronic repro test (see Section 7.6).
8-11
Maintenance
8-12
This appendix shows the locations of the electrical modules and their LEDs, fuses, connectors, test points, relays, links, and switches for the C-550 Lanovia Scanner.
A.1
Module Locations
The electrical modules shown (see Figure A.1) are as follows:
Power Supply Unit (PSU) (see Figure A.1 and Figure A.3), System Board (inside RFI Box) (see Figure A.1 and
Figure A.3),
CCD Headboard (see Figure A.1 and Figure A.3), Digitizer Board (see Figure A.1 and Figure A.3), Lamp Driver Board (see Figure A.1 and Figure A.5), Lamp Detector Boards (3 off) (see Figure A.3 and
Figure A.5),
RH Distribution Board. (see Figure A.4), LH Distribution Board (see Figure A.4), Display Board (see Figure A.4), Flexicable Distribution Boards (see Figure A.2 and
Figure A.4),
50-way Flexicable Loom (see Figure A.2), 62-way Flexicable Loom (see Figure A.2).
A-1

DIGITIZER BOARD CCD HEADBOARD LAMP DRIVER BOARD RH DISTRIBUTION BOARD DISPLAY BOARD
LH DISTRIBUTION BOARD
LAMP DETECTOR BOARDS RFI BOX PSU MAIN SWITCH STANDBY SWITCH SYSTEM BOARD
REFER TO Figure A.2 FOR FLEXICABLES
VIEWED FROM FRONT
Figure A.1 Electrical module locations
A-2
A.1.1
Flexicable Looms
DIGITIZER CONNECTOR
DIGITIZER RFI COVER X-SLIDE MOTION
X-SLIDE DISTRIBUTION BOARD TRAVERSE DISTRIBUTION BOARD MAIN CARRIAGE MOTION
LAMP DRIVER CONNECTOR
50-WAY FLEXICABLE
62-WAY FLEXICABLE VIEWED FROM REAR RFI BOX
Figure A.2 Arrangement of flexicables
A-3
RIBBON CABLE FLEXICABLE WIRE CABLE
DISPLAY BOARD
PL1 PL2
DISTRIBUTION BOARD (RH)

PL1
DISTRIBUTION BOARD (LH)

PL6
MAIN CARRIAGE MOTOR
SK1
PL1
SK2

SK1 SK1 PL1 PL2 PL3 PL4
CCD HEADBOARD
ENLARGEMENT DATUM SENSOR ENLARGEMENT STEPPER MOTOR FOCUS STEPPER MOTOR DIGITIZER FAN
DIGITIZER BOARD
SK2
LAMP DETECTOR BOARDS (x3)
SK1
TRAVERSE DISTRIBUTION BOARD

PL3
PL4
LAMP DRIVER BOARD
PL2
SK3
SK4
SK5
RS232 DIAGNOSTICS SCSI ADDRESS
RFI BOX FAN SYSTEM BOARD

PL2
SW1
PL3
SCSI & TERMINATOR CONNECTORS
REMOTE POWER SWITCH
INLINE CONNECTOR
PSU MAINS SWITCH DC POWER RFI BOX
Figure A.3 Main system interconnections
A-4

MAIN COVER INTERLOCK LH DISPLAY BOARD PL1 LID INTERLOCK LH LID INTERLOCK RH MAIN COVER INTERLOCK RH
PL2 PL5 CARRIAGE REVERSE LIMIT SWITCH CARRIAGE DATUM SENSOR PL4
PL6
ENCLOSURE FAN
PL3 PL1
DISTRIBUTION BOARD LH
PL4
PL3
DISTRIBUTION BOARD RH
PL5 PL2
PL6
PL1
SYSTEM BOARD (PL1) CARRIAGE FORWARD LIMIT SWITCH MAIN CARRIAGE MOTOR
SYSTEM BOARD (SK1)
X-SLIDE MOTOR
FOCUS DATUM SENSOR
PL4 TRAVERSE DISTRIBUTION BOARD PL6 PL5
PL7
X-SLIDE DATUM SENSOR
TRANSMISSION LIGHTBAR INTERLOCK
Figure A.4 Distribution board interconnections
A-5

LAMP DETECTOR BOARD
PL1
REFLECTION COPY LAMPS x2
LAMP DETECTOR BOARD
PL1
TRANSMISSION COPY LAMP
LIGHTBAR LOOPBACK
LAMP DETECTOR BOARD
PL1
LIGHT TABLE LAMPS x2
PL1 PL2 PL3 SK1 LAMP DRIVER BOARD
PL4
FLEXICABLE TO TRAVERSE DISTRIBUTION BOARD
Figure A.5 Lamp driver board interconnections
A-6
A.2
Power Supply Unit (PSU)

TO SYSTEM BOARD (PL2) (Table A.2) MINIMUM LOAD (3R3) RESISTOR
TO RFI BOX FAN (Table A.2) TO STANDBY SWITCH CONNECTOR ON RFI BOX (Table A.2)
TO PSU TO PSU REMOTE CONNECTOR (Table A.2) PSU REMOTE CONNECTOR PSU FAN
Figure A.6 PSU Layout
Table A.1 PSU AC-connections From Mains Live Mains Neutral Mains Earth Mains Switch Mains Switch Earth Stud To Mains Switch Mains Switch Earth Stud PSU Live PSU Neutral PSU Earth Wire Colour Brown Blue Green/Yellow Brown Blue Green/Yellow
A-7
Electrical Reference Data Table A.2 PSU DC-connections System PL2 Pin # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 RFI Box Fan Conn 1 2 Standby Switch Connector 1 2 3
From PSU +5 V 0 V (D) +5 V 0 V (D) 0V 0V +24 V +24 V 0 V (A) +18 V 0 V (A) -12 V PSU
+24 V 0V PSU Remote Connector 4 5 NC
Note: 0 V (D) represents digital ground, 0 V (A) represents analogue ground, and 0 V represents power ground. A 3R3 resistor is mounted to the metalwork of the RFI box and is connected from +5 V to 0 V(D) as a minimum load for the PSU.
A-8
A.3
System Board
SW1
SK5 FS3 SK4
PL3
PL4 SK8 LK1
PL2
U82 U81
U95 U94
SK3
RL2
LK2
SK7
SK2
FS2 RL1 PL1 PL7 FS1 SW2 LK3 SK1 PL5 PL6 D6 D5 D4 SK6 PL8
Figure A.7 System board layout: pre-Kicker
A-9

SW1
SK5 FS3 SK4
PL3
PL9 SK8
U91 PL2 U78 U77 U90 SK3 DONGLE PL10
RL2 PL1 SK2
SK7
SK1
FS2 RL1 PL1 PL7 D6 D5 D4 SK6 PL8
DONGLE
SK1
FS1 SW2 LK3 PL5 PL6
Figure A.8 Kicker System board layout
A-10
A.3.1
System Board Connectors

Table A.3 System board connectors Port PL1 SK1 SK2 SK3 SK4 SK5 SK6 SK7 SK8 PL2 PL3 PL4 PL5 PL6 PL7 PL8 PL9 PL10 Connections and Notes 25-way ribbon cable to LH distribution board. 15-way ribbon cable to RH distribution board. 25-way cable loom to servo motor and encoder of the main carriage drive. 50-way flexicable loom to Traverse distribution board. 62-way flexicable loom to Traverse distribution board. RS232 terminal diagnostics port (see Note). Factory use. Factory use. Factory use. DC-connector from PSU (see Note). Single ended SCSI / terminator double port (see Note). Not on Kicker board. Factory and R & D use only. Factory use. Factory use. Factory use. Factory use. Kicker board only. Factory and R & D use only. Kicker board only. Direct connection to Dongle board, SK1.
Note: SK5 is an 8-way mini-DIN connector with the same pinout as the serial interface for the Macintosh. Note: For PL2, see Table A.2 for pinout connections. Note: PL3, uses the standard pinout connections for a SCSI2 connector.
A-11
PL1 to LH Distribution Board

Table A.4 System board to LH distribution board connections System PL1 Pin # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LHDist PL6 Pin # 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26
Function LED fault cathode LED ready cathode LED power cathode NC Enclosure fan (+24 V) 0 V (D) 0 V (D) 0 V (D) 0 V (D) 0 V (D) 0 V (D) NC Main cover interlocks loop LED fault anode LED ready anode LED power anode Enclosure fan (0 V) NC NC Spare sensor +5 V +5 V Carriage forward limit sensor NC Main cover interlock (+24 V) NC
A-12
SK1 to RH Distribution Board

Table A.5 System board to RH distribution board connections System SK1 Pin # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 RHDist PL1 Pin # 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
Function Lid interlocks (+24 V) NC Spare +5 V Carriage reverse limit sensor Carriage datum NC Main cover interlock loop Lid return 0 V (D) 0 V (D) 0 V (D) 0 V (D) 0 V (D) Main cover interlocks return NC
A-13
SK2 to Main Carriage Servo Motor

Table A.6 System board to main carriage servo motor connections System SK2 Pin # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
Function Main carriage encoder A (+) NC Main carriage encoder B (+) NC Main carriage encoder index (+) NC Main carriage encoder +5 V NC NC NC Brush servo phase 1 Brush servo phase 2 Brush servo phase 2 Main carriage encoder A (-) NC Main carriage encoder B (-) NC Main carriage encoder index (-) NC Main carriage encoder 0 V Screen (encoder) Screen (motor) Brush servo phase 1 Brush servo phase 1 Brush servo phase 2
A-14
SK3 to Lamp Driver Board

Table A.7 System board to traverse distribution board to lamp driver board connections System SK3 Pin # 34 1 18 35 2 19 36 3 20 37 4 21 38 5 22 39 6 23 40 7 24 41 8 25 42 9 26 CarrDist LampDvr PL4 PL3 Pin # Pin # 17 50 33 16 49 32 15 48 31 14 47 30 13 46 29 12 45 28 11 44 27 10 43 26 9 42 25 19 37 18 36 17 35 16 34 15 33 14 32 13 31
Function X-slide motor phase3 X-slide motor phase4 X-slide motor phase2 X-slide motor phase1 +5 V Focus datum sensor +5 V 0 V ( D) Lightbar interlock (-) Lightbar interlock (+) 0 V ( D) X-slide datum sensor 0 V ( D) Lamp SCLK cathode Lamp SCLK anode Lamp SDI cathode Lamp SDI anode Lamp SDACEN cathode Lamp SDACEN anode Lamp SDO cathode Lamp SDO anode Lamp LDAC cathode Lamp LDAC anode Lightbar trip return Lightbar trip Spare Lamp power OK cathode
A-15
Electrical Reference Data System board to traverse distribution board to lamp driver board connections (continued) System SK3 Pin # 43 10 27 44 11 28 45 12 29 46 13 30 47 14 31 48 15 32 49 16 33 50 17 51 52 CarrDist PL3 Pin # 8 41 24 7 40 23 6 39 22 5 38 21 4 37 20 3 36 19 2 35 18 1 34 51 52 LampDvr PL4 Pin # 12 30 11 29 10 28 9 27 8 26 7 25 6 24 5 23 4 22 21 3 2 20 1 38 39
Function Lamp power OK anode NC NC Transmission lamp ON cathode Transmission lamp ON anode NC NC Temperature OK cathode Temperature OK anode Reflection lamps ON cathode Reflection lamps ON anode ADC DOUT cathode ADC DOUT anode Light table lamps ON cathode Light table lamps ON anode +24 V (return) +24 V (return) +24 V (return) +24 V +24 V (return) +24 V +24 V +24 V Screen Screen
A-16
SK4 to Digitizer Board

Table A.8 System board to traverse distribution board to digitizer board connections System SK4 Pin # 21 42 62 20 41 61 19 40 60 18 39 59 17 38 58 16 37 57 15 36 56 14 35 55 13 34 54 12 33 53 CarrDist Digitizer SK2 PL2 Pin # Pin # 21 42 62 20 41 61 19 40 60 18 39 59 17 38 58 16 37 57 15 36 56 14 35 55 13 34 54 12 33 53 22 1 43 23 2 44 24 3 45 25 4 46 26 5 47 27 6 48 28 7 49 29 8 50 30 9 51 31 10 52
Function Pixel demand clock (-) Pixel demand clock (+) Digitizer returned clock (-) Digitizer returned clock (+) 0 V (D) Start of line sync from system board +5 V (D) Start of line to system board 0 V (D) Exposure control RED Exposure control GREEN Exposure control BLUE +5 V (D) Digitizer data bit0 (lsb) 0 V (D) Digitizer data bit1 +5 V (D) Digitizer data bit2 0 V (D) Digitizer data bit3 +5 V (D) Digitizer data bit4 0 V (D) Digitizer data bit5 +5 V (D) Digitizer data bit6 0 V (D) Digitizer data bit7 (msb) +5 V (D) Reset signal from system board
A-17
Electrical Reference Data System board to traverse distribution board to digitizer board connections (continued) System SK4 Pin # 11 32 52 10 31 51 9 30 50 8 29 49 7 28 48 6 27 47 5 26 46 4 25 45 3 24 44 2 23 43 1 22 63 64 CarrDist PL2 Pin # 11 32 52 10 31 51 9 30 50 8 29 49 7 28 48 6 27 47 5 26 46 4 25 45 3 24 44 2 23 43 1 22 63 64 Digitizer SK2 Pin # 32 11 53 33 12 54 34 13 55 35 14 56 36 15 57 37 16 58 38 17 59 39 18 60 40 19 61 41 20 62 42 21 63 64
Function 0 V (D) Serial DAC enable Program enable Digitizer serial clock 0 V (D) Serial data in For programming Serial data out 0 V (D) Mode bit0 Mode bit1 Mode bit2 0 V (D) PLL locked Input volts OK Temperature OK Enlargement datum sensor 0 V (D) +18 V +11.5 V -12 V -12 V 0 V (A) 0 V (A) Enlargement motor phase1 Enlargement motor phase3 Focus motor phase4 Enlargement motor phase2 Enlargement motor phase4 Focus motor phase2 Focus motor phase3 Focus motor phase1 Screen Screen
A-18
A.3.2
Fuses
Table A.9 Fuses on system board Fuse # FS1 FS2 FS3 Rating 1 A (fast) 1 A (fast) 1 A (fast) Function Interlock supply Enclosure fan supply SCSI terminator power
A.3.3
Switches
Table A.10 Switches on system board Switch # SW1 SW2 Function Sets SCSI address for system board Must be set at position 7 (factory use)
A.3.4
LEDs
Table A.11 LEDs on system board LED # D4 D5 D6 Colour Green Red Green Function Power (+5 V present) Fault Ready
Note: These LEDs mirror the three LEDs on the display board, although the colours are different.
A-19
A.3.5
Relays
Table A.12 Relays on system board Relay # RL1 RL2 Function Main carriage motor interlock Lamp driver supply Enclosure fan supply Stepper motors interlock
A.3.6
Links
Table A.13 Links on system board Link # LK1 LK2 LK3 Setting OFF OFF OFF Notes Not on Kicker board Not on Kicker board
Note: All links are for factory use.
A-20
A.4
CCD Headboard
CCD
SK1 TO DIGITIZER
Figure A.9 CCD headboard layout
A-21
A.4.1
CCD Headboard Connector
SK1 to Digitizer Board

Table A.14 CCD headboard to digitizer board connections
A-22
Electrical Reference Data CCDHead SK1 Pin # 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Digitizer SK1 Pin # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Function 0 V (A) Buffer Amp output RED 0 V (A) Buffer Amp output GREEN 0 V (A) Buffer Amp output BLUE 0 V (A) +15 V Supply (ref to AGND) 0 V (D) +7.2 V Supply (ref to DGND) Exposure control - RED +12 V Supply (ref to DGND) 0 V (D) Exposure control - GREEN 0 V (D) Exposure control - BLUE 0 V (D) Transfer Gate2 0 V (D) Transfer Gate1 0 V (D) Reset Clock 0 V (D) Phase2B Clock 0 V (D) Phase1B Clock 0 V (D) Phase2A Clock 0 V (D) Phase1A Clock
A-23
A.5
Digitizer Board
SK1 TP9 (GND) TP8
PL4
TP2 TP3
TP5 TP6 TP4
TP10
TP11
TP1
TP7 SK2
PL2 PL3
PL1
Figure A.10 Digitizer board layout
A-24
A.5.1
Digitizer Board Connectors

Table A.15 Digitizer board connectors Port PL1 PL2 PL3 PL4 SK1 Connects to Enlargement datum sensor Enlargement motor Focus motor Power to digitizer fan CCD headboard
Note: For SK1, see Table A.14 for pinout connections.
PL1 to Enlargement Datum Sensor

Table A.16 Enlargement datum sensor connections Digitizer PL1 Pin # 1 2 3 4 5
Function 0 V (D) NC Datum sensor NC +5 V
A-25
PL2 to Enlargement Motor

Table A.17 Enlargement motor connections Digitizer PL2 Pin # 1 2 3 4 5 6
Function NC NC Motor phase4 Motor phase3 Motor phase2 Motor phase1
PL3 to Focus Motor

Table A.18 Focus motor connections Digitizer PL3 Pin # 1 2 3 4 5 6
A-26
PL4 to Digitizer Fan

Table A.19 Digitizer fan connections Digitizer PL4 Pin # 1 2
Function 0 V Fan +5 V Fan +
A.5.2
Test Points
Table A.20 Digitizer board test points Test Point TP1 TP2 TP3 TP4 TP5 TP6 TP7 TP8 TP9 TP10 TP11 Function Offset DAC Video RGB Video RED X1 ADC Analogue GND Video GREEN Line Sync Diagnostic DAC Digital GND Video BLUE X4 ADC Acceptable Signal Range (with reference to TP9) 0 V to +4.1 V 0 V to -8 V 0 V to +8 V 0 V to +6.5 V +/- 100 mV 0 V to +8 V TTL -ve pulse 0 V to -5 V 0 V to +8 V 0 V to +6.5 V
A-27
A.6
Lamp Driver Board

TP6 TP5 SK1
TP4 TP3
PL4 D5
D15
PL3
TP2 TP1
PL2
PL1
Figure A.11 Lamp driver board layout
A-28
A.6.1
Lamp Driver Board Connectors

Table A.21 Lamp driver board connectors Port PL1 PL2 PL3 PL4 SK1 Connects to Reflection lamps Transmission lamp Light table lamps Traverse distribution board Lamp detector boards
Note: For PL4, see Table A.7 for pinout connections.
PL1 to Reflection Lamps

Table A.22 Reflection lamps connections LampDvr PL1 Pin # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Function Lamp1 cathode2 Lamp1 cathode2 Lamp1 cathode1 Lamp1 cathode1 NC Lamp2 cathode2 Lamp2 cathode2 Lamp2 cathode1 Lamp2 cathode1
Note: To check lamp connections, first disconnect PL1 and using a multimeter, measure the cathode resistances across the connector pins. e.g. Pin 1 to Pin 2 which should be approx. 3.5 . With PL1 connected and the scanner powered on, the lamp cathodes should glow in a darkened room.
A-29
Alternatively, the glass at each end of the lamp should feel warm. DO NOT TOUCH THE METAL END CAPS.
PL2 to Transmission Lamp

Table A.23 Transmission lamp connections LampDvr PL2 Pin # 1 2 3 4
Function Lamp cathode2 Lamp cathode2 Lamp cathode1 Lamp cathode1
Note: To check lamp connections, first disconnect PL2 and using a multimeter, measure the cathode resistances across the connector pins. e.g. pin1 to pin2 which should be approx. 3.5 . With PL2 connected and the scanner powered on for 15 minutes, heat should be felt at each end of the lightbar.
A-30
PL3 to Light Table Lamps

Table A.24 Light table lamps connections LampDvr PL3 Pin # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Function Lamp1 cathode2 Lamp1 cathode2 Lamp1 cathode1 Lamp1 cathode1 NC Lamp2 cathode2 Lamp2 cathode2 Lamp2 cathode1 Lamp2 cathode1
Note: To check lamp connections, first disconnect PL3 and using a multimeter, measure the cathode resistances across the connector pins. e.g. Pin 1 to Pin 2 which should be approx. 3.5 . With PL3 connected and the scanner powered on, the lamp cathodes should glow in a darkened room. Alternatively, the glass at each end of the lamp should feel warm. DO NOT TOUCH THE METAL END CAPS.
A-31
SK1 to Lamp Detector Boards

Table A.25 Lamp detector board connections LampDvr SK1 Pin # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
Function Transmission lamp detector anode +5 V (test) Transmission lamp detector cable screen Reflection lamp1 detector anode +5 V (test) Reflection lamp1 detector cable screen Reflection lamp2 detector anode +5 V (test) Reflection lamp2 detector cable screen NC NC NC Lightbar loop (+18 V to loopback) Transmission detector cathode 0V NC Reflection lamp1 detector cathode 0V NC Reflection lamp2 detector cathode 0V NC NC NC Lightbar loopback
A-32
A.6.2
Test Points
Table A.26 Test points on lamp driver board Test Point TP1 TP2 TP3 TP4 TP5 TP6
Function 0 V (HT) +320 V (HT) +18 V +5 V +14 V 0V
Acceptable Signal Range +2.9 V to+3.9 V (ref to TP1) +17 V to+19 V (ref to TP6) +4.75 V to+5.25 V (ref to TP6) +13.3 V to+14.7 V (ref to TP6)
Note: The voltage measured between TP2 and TP1 is the HT voltage divided by 100.
A.6.3
LEDs
Table A.27 LEDs on lamp driver board LED # D5 D15 Function +24 V power present and soft inrush circuit working +320 V power present
A-33
A.6.4
Links
Table A.28 LEDs on lamp driver board Link LK1 Function DO NOT FIT
Note: If fitted, the +320 V power supply is disabled.
A.6.5
Lamp Detector Boards
D1 2 1 PL1
Figure A.12 Lamp detector board layout
Lamp Detector Connections

Table A.29 Lamp detector connections Detect PL1 Pin # 1 2
Function Detector cathode Detector anode
A-34
A.7
RH Distribution Board
PL1 PL3 PL4 PL5
PL2 PL6
Figure A.13 RH distribution board layout
A.7.1
RH Distribution Board Connectors

Table A.30 RH distribution board connectors Port PL1 PL2 PL3 PL4 PL5 PL6 Type 16-way 5-way 5-way 5-way 6-way 6-way Connects to System board Spare Main carriage datum sensor Main carriage reverse limit sensor RH interlock - main cover Lid interlocks
A-35
PL3 to Main Carriage Datum Sensor

Table A.31 Main carriage datum sensor connections RHDist PL3 Pin # 1 2 3 4 5
Function 0 V (D) LED anode Datum sensor LED cathode +5 V
PL4 to Main Carriage Reverse Limit Sensor

Table A.32 Main carriage reverse limit sensor connections RHDist PL4 Pin # 1 2 3 4 5
A-36
PL5 to Main Cover - RH Interlock

Table A.33 Main cover RH interlock connections RHDist PL5 Pin # 1 2 3 4 5 6
Function Interlock (ret) Interlock loop NC NC NC NC
PL6 to Lid Interlocks

Table A.34 Lid interlock connections RHDist PL6 Pin # 1 2 3 4 5 6
Function Return +24 V NC NC NC NC
A-37
A.8
LH Distribution Board
PL3
PL4 PL6
PL1 PL2
PL5
Figure A.14 LH distribution board layout
A.8.1
LH Distribution Board Connectors

Table A.35 LH distribution board connectors Port PL1 PL2 PL3 PL4 PL5 PL6 Type 6-way 10-way 6-way 5-way 5-way 25-way Connects to Enclosure fan Display board LH interlock - main cover Main carriage forward limit sensor Spare System board
A-38
PL1 to Enclosure Fan

Table A.36 Enclosure fan connections LHDist PL1 Pin # 1 2 3 4 5 6
Function Fan - 0 V NC NC NC NC Fan +24 V
PL2 to Display Board

Table A.37 Display board connections LHDist PL2 Pin # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Display PL1 Pin # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Function LED power cathode LED power anode LED ready cathode LED ready anode LED fault cathode LED fault anode NC NC NC NC
A-39
PL3 to Main Cover - LH Interlock

Table A.38 Main cover LH interlock connections LHDist PL3 Pin # 1 2 3 4 5 6
Function Loop +24 V NC NC NC NC
PL4 to Main Carriage Forward Limit Sensor

Table A.39 Main carriage forward limit sensor connections LHDist PL4 Pin # 1 2 3 4 5
Function 0 V (D) LED anode Forward limit LED cathode +5 V
A-40
A.9
Flexicable Distribution Boards

PL7 X-SLIDE DISTRIBUTION BOARD
FLEXICABLE TO DIGITIZER BOARD
PL6 PL4 PL5 PL3 74LS14 TRAVERSE DISTRIBUTION BOARD PL2
FLEXICABLE TO LAMP DRIVER BOARD
Figure A.15 Flexicable distribution boards layout
A-41
A.9.1
Flexicable Distribution Boards Connectors

Table A.40 Connectors on Traverse and X-slide distribution boards Port PL2 PL3 PL4 PL5 PL6 PL7 Type 62-way 50-way 6-way 5-way 5-way 5-way Connects to System board System board X-slide motor Lightbar interlock X-slide datum sensor Focus datum sensor
Note: For PL2, see Table A.8 for pinout connections. For PL3, see Table A.7 for pinout connections.
PL4 to X-slide Motor

Table A.41 X-Slide motor connections CarrDist PL4 Pin # 1 2 3 4 5 6
A-42
PL5 to Lightbar Interlock

Table A.42 Lightbar interlock connections CarrDist PL5 Pin # 1 2 3 4 5
Function Lightbar interlock NC Lightbar interlock + NC NC
PL6 to X-slide Datum Sensor

Table A.43 X-slide datum sensor connections CarrDist PL6 Pin # 1 2 3 4 5
Function 0 V (D) NC Datum sensor NC +5 V
A-43
PL7 to Focus Datum Sensor

Table A.44 Focus datum sensor connections X-slide PL7 Pin # 1 2 3 4 5
A.10 Display Board Layout

PL1
D1
D2
D3
Figure A.16 LED display board layout
A-44
Fault Diagnosis
This appendix provides a definition of some image defects and some fault diagnosis tables in support to the customer service engineer. At the end of this appendix, a numerical list is provided for all available tests and checks.
B.1
Image Defects
B.1.1 Introduction
This section intends only to define certain types of image defects. Before checking for defects run the Repropak transparency/reflection copy and compare with the factory test films. Image defects are usually an indication of a fault which is too subtle for the diagnostics to detect as either a pass or fail state. An image defect can slow up the progress of an electronic repro test (see Section 7.6). Image defects can be classified into the following groups:
Lack of sharpness, Streaks, Distortions, Tonal problems, Subtle colour errors, Patterning, Cropping errors, Graininess/Lack of smoothness.
B-1
Fault Diagnostics
B.1.2
Lack of Sharpness
Lack of sharpness is seen as a soft (out of focus) image with indistinct edges that should be sharp. If the lack of sharpness is only apparent over a part of the image area, the most likely explanation is that the original is not laying flat on the platen. If the lack of sharpness is all over the image, then the scanner may have failed to correctly autofocus on the subject. The scanner makes three attempts to focus, along lines at the quarter, half, and three-quarter points of the area to be scanned. If there is no detail here, then autofocus may fail. Note: Preview scans do not perform an autofocus, and may look unsharp if the copy is not mounted directly on the platen. This is not a problem. When focussing has failed, try turning the image by 90_, or try over-scanning slightly onto an original which has some strong detail. Fault diagnosis is given in Symptom 1 of Table B.4. Figure B.1 gives but one example of an image defect suffering from a lack of sharpness.
Figure B.1 Lack of sharpness example
B.1.3
Streaks
There are two types of streaks. In both cases, the streaks will appear from top-to-bottom on the output scan, assuming that no image rotation has been specified and the image has been mounted heads right.
B-2
Fault Diagnostics
Light Streaks
Streaks seen in light and medium tones which are lighter than the surrounding area and are more than a single pixel wide may be caused by dirt or other marks on the:
CCD scan head window (glass plate covering the CCD image
sensors),
platen in the transmission white-balance area, Reflection white-balance strip, mirror.

Note: When scanning negatives, this sort of streak appears dark rather than light.
Figure B.2 Example of a light streak
Deep Streaks in Shadows

Streaks seen in deep shadow tones which are darker than the surrounding area and are a single pixel wide. These are always present to a certain extent in CCD scanners but bad pixels should be removed by bad pixel elimination. Fault diagnosis is given in Symptom 2 of Table B.4.
B.1.4
Distortion
Distortions include skews and compression, or stretching, of the image.
B-3
Fault Diagnostics
Distortions are more easily seen while scanning a square grid.
Skew
Skew is apparent when the vertical and horizontal lines are straight, but not perpendicular (at right angles) to each other. This can only be caused by serious damage to the camera head sub-assembly or the X-slide assembly (spec 0.1_ max).
Compression or Stretching
Compression, or stretching, is when squares become rectangles by more than the specified size tolerances (0.3%). This type of image defect indicates any of the following problems:
a serious error in the main leadscrew drive, a wrongly-setup scanner, or the image was not focused properly (though it should then
look unsharp). Fault diagnosis is given in Symptom 3 of Table B.4. Figure B.3 gives but one example of an image defect suffering from a distortion problem.
Figure B.3 Example of distortion
B-4
Fault Diagnostics
B.1.5
Tonal Problems
Flare is when light areas break into adjacent dark areas. The most likely cause is dust on the mirror or lens. Loss of shadow detail may occur if the lamps are failing. In some cases, shadow detail may be reduced when very dark originals are scanned without masking the unused areas of the platen. Fault diagnosis is given in Symptom 4 of Table B.4. Figure B.4 gives but one example of an image defect suffering from a tonal problem.
Figure B.4 Tonal problem example
B.1.6
Subtle Colour Errors

Subtle colour errors are often related to ageing components. Small colour casts may occur, (e.g. a white area does not look quite white). Some possible causes of subtle colour errors are as follows:
discoloured reflection white balance target, ageing lamps, clear film covering the transmission white-balance area, or copy has been mounted using glass.
Fault diagnosis is given in Symptom 5 of Table B.4.
B-5
Fault Diagnostics
B.1.7
Patterning
Patterning is generally seen as either a series of repetitive lines in flat tint areas or as wavy edges, which normally should be smooth. Patterning is often faint, and with closely spaced lines. The lines may appear at any angle. On screened outputs, the angle is often different on the different screen angles. In addition when descreening, moir patterning, often seen as diagonal bands, can be caused by using an incorrect filter. The chosen filter is not compatible with the screen ruling on the original. When viewing output films, the moir may be seen on one or more separations and at different angles. The remedy is to use the correct filter. Fault diagnosis is given in Symptom 6 of Table B.4. Figure B.5 gives but one example of an image defect suffering from a patterning problem.
Figure B.5 Example of patterning
B.1.8
Cropping Errors
A cropping error is the failure of the scanner to accurately scan the selected area of the original. These are usually seen when an HR scan is not cropped as planned on the pre-view setup. Cropping errors can be caused by a system board being replaced without re-running the setup alignment and calibration programs.
B-6
Fault Diagnostics
Re-running the alignment and calibration programs is always the first remedial action. If this process should fail and there are no diagnostics error messages, then something is either mis-aligned or physically distorted. Fault diagnosis is given in Symptom 7 of Table B.4. Figure B.6 gives but one example of a cropping error.
Figure B.6 Example of a cropping error
B.1.9
Graininess
There are two types of graininess. One is caused by analogue noise and the other by a lack of smoothness in the surface finish of the scan.
Analogue Noise
This electronic noise is produced by either the CCD headboard or the digitizer board. Analogue noise is seen as random black dots which are generally more visible as single pixels in the shadow, or mid-tone, areas.
Lack of Smoothness
Graininess, or poor surface finish of the original, is detected and enhanced by the image (DSP) processor, particularly in the USM process.
B-7
Fault Diagnostics
A higher threshold or smoothness setting on the USM should improve this at the expense of loss of sharpness. In extreme cases, oil mounting may help. Fault diagnosis is given in Symptom 8 of Table B.4. Figure B.7 gives but one example of graininess.
Figure B.7 Example of graininess
B-8
Fault Diagnostics
B.2
Troubleshooting Guide
B.2.1 Introduction
In most instances, the workstation diagnostics (see Chapter 7) will help to indicate a failing part of the scanner. When the diagnostics program is run, it follows a specific order. The first test to fail will provide a good indication of the problem area. Subsequent failures may be consequential, so they are not good indicators of the true problem area. If the workstation diagnostics is not able to recognize the scanner, then the SCSI system may be at fault. In this case, terminal diagnostics (see Chapter 5) must be run with the RS232 cable connected to the scanners diagnostic port.
B.2.2
Symptom Indications
A fault is defined as an abnormality in the performance of the scanner. Four groups of faults have been categorized as follows:
Loss of power symptoms, POST failures, Application error messages, Image defects.
B-9
Fault Diagnostics
B.2.3
Loss of Power Faults

Table B.1 Loss of power faults
SYMPTOMS 1. No illumination on main switch.
DIAGNOSIS a. Mains not switched on. b. Mains fuse failure. c. Check mains cable for faults or disconnection. d. Main switch failure.
REMEDIES Switch ON the mains supply. Replace fuse. Repair as required. Replace main switch and its GREEN indicator (Section 4.9.6). See item 1 above. Switch ON or check its connections. D if cable to RFI box, replace standby switch cable (Section 4.18.8). D if RFI box cable to PSU, replace PSU (Section 4.9.4).
2. No LEDs lit on display panel.
a. Check illumination on main switch. b. Check state of standby switch. c. Check standby switch connections.
d. Check internal cables for pinching/ disconnection.
D if display board cable (Section 4.18.10). D if LH dist board (Section 4.18.11). D if 25-way ribbon (Section 4.18.12). D if system board (Section 4.9.2).
Note: Check LEDs on system board. If they are OK, it must be one of the above cables at fault.
e. Check PSU voltages (particularly the +5 V supply) at PL2 on system board. f. Display board is faulty. Replace PSU if necessary (Section 4.9.4).
Replace display board if necessary (Section 4.18.9).
Note: The workstation will still talk with the scanner in this case.
B-10
Fault Diagnostics
B.2.4
POST Failures
Table B.2 POST failures
SYMPTOMS 1. Fault lamp flashes and workstation fails to see the scanner. One flash Two flashes Three flashes Four flashes Five flashes Six flashes Seven flashes 2. Fault lamp ON.
DIAGNOSIS Fatal POST failure:
REMEDIES
a. RAM test failure. b. FLASH memory failure. c. ISP test failure. d. IMR test failure. e. Interrupt test failure. f. SCSI test failure.
Replace system board (Section 4.9.2) for any of these failures.
g. CS0 test failure. a. Non-fatal POST failure. b Interlock activated. Perform the following procedure: i. Run all terminal diagnostic tests (Section 5.4).
c. Servo motor failure. d. X-slide motor failure. e. Enlargement motor failure. f. Focus motor failure.
ii. Find the first failed module. iii. Replace relevant FRU (Chapter 4). iv. Re-run all terminal diagnostic tests (Section 5.4). v. Find next failed module. vi. Replace relevant FRU (Chapter 4). vii. Repeat this reiterative process until the terminal diagnostic tests all pass.
g. Overtemperature. h. Overvoltage j. Transmission lamp failed (when lightbar is fitted).
k. Reflection lamp failed.
B-11
Fault Diagnostics
B.2.5
Application Error Messages

Table B.3 Application error messages
SYMPTOMS 1. Cannot find any attached scanners.../ scanner not responding.../ scanner failed to respond in time.
DIAGNOSIS a. Workstation powered up before scanner. b. Check for SCSI ID conflict. c. Check SCSI cable presence / connection. d. SCSI cable fault. e. Check terminator presence / connection. f. Workstation SCSI driver fault.
REMEDIES Power down both workstation & scanner. Use Macintosh utility in use CSI IDs. Then change the scanners ID setting. Power up scanner. Power up workstation. Select File / Acquire Preferences dialog box. Then select the Verify button. Check workstation. Run terminal diagnostics (Section 5.5.3). Replace modules as required. If OK check interlock cabling and all connections.
g. System controller failure. 2. Missing the transmission arm (lightbar). a. Check presence of lightbar. b. Check operation of lightbar interlock. c. Check interlock switch. d. Check interlock switch connection. e. Check interlock cable to (PL5) connection at main carriage distribution board. f. Check connections 50-way flexicable to SK3 at system board.
Note: If lid was correctly closed, the interlock may have failed to activate.
Replace lightbar interlock switch (Section 4.5). Replace interlock cable (Not Spared). Replace main carriage flexicable assembly (Section 4.18.3).
Replace 50-way flexicable (Section 4.18.1)
g. Check system board relay (RL2). h. Check PSU output.
Replace system board (Section 4.9.2). Replace PSU (Section 4.9.4).
B-12
Fault Diagnostics Application error messages (continued) SYMPTOMS 3. Reflection lamp # failed. DIAGNOSIS a. Lamp failure. b. Lamp detector failed. c. Check lamp cabling / holder. d. Lamp driver module failed. e. Check connections 50-way flexicable to SK3 at system board. f. Check system board. REMEDIES Replace reflection lamp (Section 4.15.1). Run diagnostics (Section 5.4). Replace reflection tray assembly if necessary (Not spared). Replace lamp driver module (Section 4.17). Replace 50-way flexicable (Section 4.18.1). Replace system board (Section 4.9.2). Replace PSU (Section 4.9.4). Replace transmission lamp (Section 4.4.2). Run diagnostics (Section 5.4). Replace cable harness in lightbar if necessary (Not spared). Replace reflection tray assembly if necessary (Not spared). Replace lamp driver module (Section 4.17). Replace 50-way flexicable (Section 4.18.1). Replace system board (Section 4.9.2). Replace PSU (Section 4.9.4).
g. Check PSU output. 4. Transmission lamp failed. a. Lamp failure. b. Lamp detector failed. c. Check wiring in lightbar. d. Check wiring in Reflection lamp tray. e. Lamp driver module failed. f. Check connections 50-way flexicable to SK3 at system board.
g. Check system board. h. Check PSU output.
B-13
Fault Diagnostics Application error messages (continued) SYMPTOMS 5. Light table lamp # failed. DIAGNOSIS a. Lamp failure. REMEDIES Replace light-table lamp (Section 4.16.1). Run diagnostics (Section 5.4). b. Check lamp cabling / holder. c. Lamp driver module failed. e. Check connections 50-way flexicable to SK3 at system board. f. Check interlock relay (RL2) on system board. Replace cable harness if necessary (Not spared). Replace lamp driver module (Section 4.17). Replace 50-way flexicable (Section 4.18.1). If OK check system board. Replace system board (Section 4.9.2). Replace PSU (Section 4.9.4). Check interlocks (Section 8.2) If required, replace both interlocks (Section 4.13.2). Fit new magnets (Not spared). Replace lid assembly (Section 4.10.2). Check interlocks (Section 8.2) If required, replace both interlocks (Section 4.13.1). Fit new magnets (Not spared). Replace lid assembly (Section 4.10.2). Perform necessary action.
Note: There is no diagnostic report from the scanner. Confirm failure by visual inspection.
g. Check system board. h. Check PSU output 6. Scanner lid open (when lid was closed). a. Lid interlock failure. b. Lid magnet(s) missing. c. Distorted lid assembly. 7. Scanner main cover open (when lid was closed). a. Cover interlock failure. b. Cover magnet(s) missing. c. Distorted lid assembly. 8. Scanner POST failed. a. Run diagnostics (Section 5.4).
B-14
Fault Diagnostics Application error messages (continued) SYMPTOMS 9. Main carriage drive failed. DIAGNOSIS a. Servo motor failure. b. Check electrical supply. REMEDIES Run diagnostics (Section 5.4). Test cabling from motor to SK2 on system board. If necessary, replace servo motor and its encoder (Section 4.19.3)
CAUTION - motor encoder is not static protected. (see Section 2.7).

c. Check lid interlocks. d. Check main cover interlocks. e.. Check leadscrew clamp-nut adjustment. f. Main leadscrew failure. Go to item 6. Go to item 7. Re-adjust if necessary (Section 4.19.1). Replace main leadscrew (Section 4.19.2). Re-align or replace main coupling (Section 4.19.4). Replace limit sensor (Section 4.18.6). Replace limit sensor (Section 4.18.5). Replace datum sensor (Section 4.18.4). If OK, check system board (Section 4.9.2). Replace system board (Section 4.9.2). Replace PSU (Section 4.9.4). Re-set system board driver (Section 4.9.2). Download / upload buffer (Section 7.3.5).
g. Check main leadscrew coupling. h. Check forward limit sensor. j. Check reverse limit sensor.
k. Check datum sensor. l. Check interlock relay (RL1).
m. Check system board. n. Check PSU. p System board driver failure.
q. Mech / service program failure.
B-15
Fault Diagnostics Application error messages (continued) SYMPTOMS 10. X-slide carriage drive failed. DIAGNOSIS a. X-slide stepper motor failure. b. Check electrical supply. REMEDIES Run diagnostics (Section 5.4). Test cabling from motor to PL6 on main carriage distribution board. If necessary, replace stepper motor (Section 4.21.3) and distribution board (Section 4.18.3). Go to Symptom 6. Go to Symptom 7. Tighten X-slide leadscrew clamp nut. Re-align or replace X-slide clamp collar (Section 4.21.4). Replace datum sensor (Section 4.21.1). Replace 62-way flexicable (Section 4.18.2). If OK, check system board (Section 4.9.2). Replace system board (Section 4.9.2). Replace PSU (Section 4.9.4).
c. Check lid interlocks. d. Check main cover interlocks. e. Check X-slide leadscrew clamp nut. f. Check X-slide leadscrew coupling
g. Check datum sensor. h. Check connections of 62-way flexicable to SK4 at system board. j. Check interlock relay (RL1).
k. Check system board. l. Check PSU.
B-16
Fault Diagnostics Application error messages (continued) SYMPTOMS 11. Enlargement drive failed. DIAGNOSIS a. Enlargement stepper motor failure. b. Check electrical supply. REMEDIES Run diagnostics (Section 5.4). Test cabling from motor to PL2 on digitizer board. If necessary, replace stepper motor (Section 4.20.15) and digitizer board (Section 4.20.8). Go to Symptom 6. Go to Symptom 7. Tighten clamp-nut screws. Re-align or replace enlargement clamp collar (Section 4.20.14). Replace datum sensor (Section 4.20.12). Replace X-slide / main carriage distribution flexicable (Section 4.18.3).
c. Check lid interlocks. d. Check main cover interlocks. e. Check enlargement leadscrew clamp nut. f. Check enlargement leadscrew coupling.
g. Check datum sensor. h. Check connections through SK2 at digitizer flexicable to PL2 on main carriage distribution board. j. Check connections through 62-way flexicable to SK4 at system board.
Replace 62-way distribution flexicable (Section 4.18.2).
k. Check interlock relay (RL1). l. Check system board.
If OK, check system board (Section 4.9.2). Replace system board (Section 4.9.2). Replace PSU (Section 4.9.4).
m. Check PSU.
B-17
Fault Diagnostics Application error messages (continued) SYMPTOMS 12. Focus drive failed. DIAGNOSIS a. Focus stepper motor failure. b. Check electrical supply. REMEDIES Run diagnostics (Section 5.4). Test cabling from motor to PL3 on digitizer board. If necessary, replace stepper motor (Section 4.20.10) and digitizer board (Section 4.20.8). Go to Symptom 6. Go to Symptom 7. Re-align focus rack (Section 4.20.9). Replace datum sensor (Section 4.20.11). Replace X-slide / main carriage distribution flexicable (Section 4.18.3).
c. Check lid interlocks. d. Check main cover interlocks. e. Check focus rack. g. Datum sensor failure. h. Check connections through SK2 at digitizer flexicable to PL2 on main carriage distribution board. j. Check connections through 62-way flexicable to SK4 at system board.
Replace 62-way distribution flexicable (Section 4.18.2).
k. Check interlock relay (RL1). l. Check system board.
If OK, check system board (Section 4.9.2). Replace system board (Section 4.9.2). Replace PSU (Section 4.9.4).
m. Check PSU.
B-18
Fault Diagnostics Application error messages (continued) SYMPTOMS 13. System board temperature is not within range. DIAGNOSIS a. Check RFI box vents for blockage. b. Check PSU fan. c. Check enclosure fan filter. d. Check operation of enclosure fan. e. Check system board. f. 14. System board voltage is not within range. Check PSU. Clear all vents. Replace PSU (Section 4.9.4). Clean - or replace - filter (Section 4.8). Replace enclosure fan (Section 4.18.15). Run diagnostics (Section 5.4). Replace system board (Section 4.9.2). Replace PSU (Section 4.9.4). Run diagnostics (Section 5.4). Replace system board (Section 4.9.2). Replace PSU (Section 4.9.4). REMEDIES
See Note below
a. Check system board. b. Check PSU.
See Note below

15. Digitizer board temperature is not within range. Run diagnostics (Section 5.4). a. Check digitizer fan. b. Check digitizer board. Replace digitizer fan (Section 4.20.7). Replace digitizer board (Section 4.20.8). Replace enclosure fan (Section 4.18.15). Replace filter (Section 4.8). Replace X-slide / main carriage distribution flexicable (Section 4.18.3). Replace 62-way cable (Section 4.18.2). Replace system board (Section 4.9.2). Replace PSU (Section 4.9.4).
See Note below
c. Check operation of enclosure fan. d. Check enclosure fan filter. e. Check main carriage distribution flexicable. f. Check 62-way flexicable.
g. Check system board. h. Check PSU.
Note: Power down and leave scanner to cool for 10 minutes. Do not operate the scanner if it is overheating.
B-19
Fault Diagnostics Application error messages (continued) SYMPTOMS 16. Digitizer board voltage is not within range. DIAGNOSIS a. Check digitizer fan. b. Check enclosure fan filter. c. Check operation of enclosure fan. d. Check system board. e. Check PSU. 17. Lamp driver board temperature is not within range. a. Check operation of enclosure fan. b. Check fan filter. c. Check lamp driver board. d. Check Traverse distribution flexicable. e. Check 50-way flexicable to SK3 on system board. f. Check system board. REMEDIES Replace digitizer fan (Section 4.20.7). Replace fan filter (Section 4.8). Replace enclosure fan (Section 4.18.15). Run diagnostics (Section 5.4). Replace system board (Section 4.9.2). Replace PSU (Section 4.9.4). Replace enclosure fan (Section 4.18.15). Replace fan filter (Section 4.8). Replace lamp driver module (Section 4.17). Replace X-slide / Traverse distribution flexicable (Section 4.18.3). Replace 50-way cable (Section 4.18.1).
See Note below
See Note below
Run diagnostics (Section 5.4). Replace system board (Section 4.9.2). Replace PSU (Section 4.9.4). Replace enclosure fan (Section 4.18.15). Replace fan filter (Section 4.8). Replace lamp driver module (Section 4.17). Replace X-slide / Traverse distribution flexicable (Section 4.18.3). Replace 50-way cable (Section 4.18.1).
g. Check PSU. 18. Lamp driver board voltage is not within range. a. Check operation of enclosure fan. b. Check fan filter. c. Check lamp driver board. d. Check Traverse distribution flexicable. e Check 50-way flexicable to SK3 on system board. Check system board.
See Note below
f.
Run diagnostics (Section 5.4). Replace system board (Section 4.9.2). Replace PSU (Section 4.9.4).
g. Check PSU
Note: Power down and leave scanner to cool for 10 minutes. Do not operate the scanner if it is overheating.
B-20
Fault Diagnostics
B.2.6
Image Defects
Table B.4 Image Defects
SYMPTOMS 1. Lack of sharpness
DIAGNOSIS a. Object mode selected when not required. b. Lack of image detail to focus on c. Check for electromechanical faults. d. Check for dirt on lens e. Check for dirt on mirror. f. Check filter of enclosure fan.
REMEDIES Select correct mode in application (e.g. preview, overview, or high resolution). Ensure original has sufficient detail in vertical plane at centre / 1/4 point. Run diagnostics (Section 5.4). Clean lens if necessary (Section 8.3.5). Clean mirror if necessary (Section 8.3.4) or replace mirror (Section 4.15.4). Clean or replace filter if necessary (Section 4.8). Clean platen if necessary (Section 8.3.3) or replace platen (Section 4.14). Use IPA to clean - or replace - the test target. Run diagnostics (Section 5.4). Clean ccd window if necessary (Section 8.3.6) or replace camera head (Section 4.20.4). Clean mirror if necessary (Section 8.3.4) or replace mirror (Section 4.15.4). Replace filter if necessary (Section 4.8).
2. Streaks
a. Check transmission white-balance area of platen b. Check for dirt on test target. c. Check for electromechanical faults. d. Check for dirt on ccd window. e. Check for dirt on mirror. f. Check enclosure fan filter.
B-21
Fault Diagnostics SYMPTOMS 3. Distortions (skews, compression or stretching). DIAGNOSIS a. Check flatness of original on platen, or under reflection mat, or in a copy holder. b. Check main leadscrew drive for physical damage. c. Check setup calibration of scanner. e. Check focus rack for looseness. 4. Tonal problems or flare. a. Check lightbar for a twisted extrusion. b. Check transmission white-balance area of platen. c. Check for dirt on test target. d. Check brightness of lamps (e.g. insufficient detail of shadows). e. Check for dirt on mirror. f. Check for dirt on lens. Image Defects continued REMEDIES Make sure original is even and flat.
Run diagnostics (Section 5.4). Replace main leadscrew if required (Section 4.19.2). Run scanner calibration test (Section 6.5). Re-align and tighten securing screws as required (Section 4.20.9). Run diagnostics (Section 5.4). Run light_bar alignment (Section 6.4.2). Clean platen if necessary (Section 8.3.3) or replace platen (Section 4.14). Use IPA to clean - or replace - the test target. Replace lamps if necessary (Section 4.15.1 for reflection lamps) or (Section 4.4.2 for transmission lamp). Clean mirror if necessary (Section 8.3.4) or replace mirror (Section 4.15.4). Clean lens if necessary (Section 8.3.5) or replace mirror (Section 4.15.4). Use IPA to clean - or replace - the test target. Run diagnostics (Section 5.4). Replace lamps if necessary (Section 4.15.1 for reflection lamps) or (Section 4.4.2 for transmission lamp). Use IPA to clean reflection white-balance strip or replace (Section 4.11.1). Clean platen if necessary (Section 8.3.3) or replace (Section 4.14).
5. Subtle colour errors.
a. Discoloured test target. b. Lamp not warmed up. c. Ageing lamp.
d. Check Reflection white-balance strip. e. Check platen for clear film or adhesive tape over transmission white-balance area. f. Check for glass in copy holder.
Advise customer to avoid this practice if quality scans are required.
B-22
Fault Diagnostics Image Defects continued SYMPTOMS 6. Patterning. DIAGNOSIS a. Moir silk screen effects. b. Check digitizer fan for vibrations. c. Check for illumination faults. REMEDIES Run diagnostics (Section 5.4). Fit AV mounts to scanner. Replace lamp detector board (Section 4.4.3 for transmission) or Section 4.15.3) or lamp driver module (Section 4.17). Replace enclosure fan (Section 4.18.15). Run calibrate tests (Section 6.5). Run electronic repro test (Section 7.6). Run Elec / setup / calibration (Section 6.5). Run diagnostics (Section 5.4). Run electronic repro test (Section 7.6). Replace units as required. Replace datum sensor (Section 4.18.4). Run electronic repro test (Section 7.6). Replace datum sensor (Section 4.21.1). Run electronic repro test (Section 7.6).
d. Check enclosure fan. e. Check for electromechanical faults. 7. Cropping errors. a. Calibration may have been lost. b. Check for an electromechanical fault. c. Check main carriage datum sensor. d. Check X-slide carriage datum sensor. 8. Graininess / Lack of surface smoothness. a. Check scan head. b. Check digitizer board. c. Check system board.
Run diagnostics (Section 5.4). Replace digitizer board (Section 4.20.8). Replace system board (Section 4.9.2). Replace camera head (Section 4.20.4). Run calibrate tests (Section 6.5). Run electronic repro test (Section 7.6).
Run the digitizer or camera noise diagnostics test to check if the system is within limits.
B-23
Fault Diagnostics
B.2.7
Diagnostic Test Numbers

Table B.5 Diagnostic test numbers TEST No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 FAILED TEST OR COMPONENT Sync control - system bd Sync control - system bd Sync control - system bd Sync control - system bd SCSI control - system bd SCSI control - system bd SCSI control - system bd DSP control - system bd DSP control - system bd DSP control - system bd DSP control - system bd DSP control - system bd DSP control - system bd DSP control - system bd DSP control - system bd DSP control - system bd Sync control - system bd Sync control - system bd Sync control - system bd Sync control - system bd Sync control - system bd Sync control - system bd Sync control - system bd System board System board System board System board Digitizer board Digitizer board Digitizer board Digitizer board Digitizer board REMEDIAL ACTION Replace system bd (Section 4.9.2). Replace system bd (Section 4.9.2). Replace system bd (Section 4.9.2). Replace system bd (Section 4.9.2). Replace system bd (Section 4.9.2). Replace system bd (Section 4.9.2). Replace system bd (Section 4.9.2). Replace system bd (Section 4.9.2). Replace system bd (Section 4.9.2). Replace system bd (Section 4.9.2). Replace system bd (Section 4.9.2). Replace system bd (Section 4.9.2). Replace system bd (Section 4.9.2). Replace system bd (Section 4.9.2). Replace system bd (Section 4.9.2). Replace system bd (Section 4.9.2). Replace system bd (Section 4.9.2). Replace system bd (Section 4.9.2). Replace system bd (Section 4.9.2). Replace system bd (Section 4.9.2). Replace system bd (Section 4.9.2). Replace system bd (Section 4.9.2). Replace system bd (Section 4.9.2). Replace system bd (Section 4.9.2). Replace system bd (Section 4.9.2). Replace system bd (Section 4.9.2). Replace system bd (Section 4.9.2). Replace digitizer bd (Section 4.20.8). Replace digitizer bd (Section 4.20.8). Replace digitizer bd (Section 4.20.8). Replace digitizer bd (Section 4.20.8). Replace digitizer bd (Section 4.20.8).
B-24
Fault Diagnostics Diagnostic test numbers continued TEST No 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 FAILED TEST OR COMPONENT Digitizer board Digitizer board Digitizer board Digitizer board Digitizer board Digitizer board Digitizer board Digitizer board Digitizer board Digitizer board Digitizer board Digitizer board Sync control - system bd DSP - system board DSP - system board System board System board SCSI control - system bd System board CCD headboard CCD headboard CCD headboard CCD headboard CCD headboard CCD headboard CCD headboard System board System board Focus motor fault Enlarge motor fault X-slide motor fault Datum fault Datum fault Datum fault REMEDIAL ACTION Replace digitizer bd (Section 4.20.8). Replace digitizer bd (Section 4.20.8). Replace digitizer bd (Section 4.20.8). Replace digitizer bd (Section 4.20.8). Replace digitizer bd (Section 4.20.8). Replace digitizer bd (Section 4.20.8). Replace digitizer bd (Section 4.20.8). Replace digitizer bd (Section 4.20.8). Replace digitizer bd (Section 4.20.8). Replace digitizer bd (Section 4.20.8). Replace digitizer bd (Section 4.20.8). Replace digitizer bd (Section 4.20.8). Replace system bd (Section 4.9.2). Replace system bd (Section 4.9.2). Replace system bd (Section 4.9.2). Replace system bd (Section 4.9.2). Replace system bd (Section 4.9.2). Replace system bd (Section 4.9.2). Replace system bd (Section 4.9.2). Reserved for factory use Reserved for factory use Reserved for factory use Reserved for factory use Reserved for factory use Reserved for factory use Reserved for factory use Replace system bd (Section 4.9.2). Replace system bd (Section 4.9.2). Replace motor (Section 4.20.10). Replace motor (Section 4.20.15). Replace motor (Section 4.21.3). Perform calibration (Section 6.5.3). Perform calibration (Section 6.5.5). Perform calibration (Section 6.5.4).
B-25
Fault Diagnostics Diagnostic test numbers continued TEST No 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 FAILED TEST OR COMPONENT Start of scan offset fault Digitizer board Digitizer board Misalignment fault REMEDIAL ACTION Perform calibration (Section 6.5.6). Replace digitizer bd (Section 4.20.8). Replace digitizer bd (Section 4.20.8). Perform alignment (Section 6.4.3). Reserved for factory use. Reserved for factory use. Replace system bd (Section 4.9.2). Replace system bd (Section 4.9.2). Replace system bd (Section 4.9.2). Replace system bd (Section 4.9.2). Replace system bd (Section 4.9.2). Replace system bd (Section 4.9.2). Replace system bd (Section 4.9.2). See Table B.3 item 12. See Table B.3 item 11. See Table B.3 item 10. See Table B.3 item 9. See Table B.3 item 9. Replace driver bd (Section 4.17). Replace driver bd (Section 4.17). Replace driver bd (Section 4.17). Replace driver bd (Section 4.17). Replace driver bd (Section 4.17). Replace driver bd (Section 4.17). Replace driver bd (Section 4.17). Check transmission lamp. Run lamp diagnostics. (Section 5.7). Run system diagnostics (Section 5.5). Check error message (Section B.2.5). Replace transmission detector board (Section 4.4.3) or lamp driver board (Section 4.17).
MCB control - system bd MCB control - system bd MCB control - system bd MCB control - system bd Data bus - system board Data bus - system board MCB control - system bd Focus motor control Enlarge motor control X-slide motor control Carriage motor control Servo encoder control Lamp driver board Lamp driver board Lamp driver board Lamp driver board Lamp driver board Lamp driver board Lamp driver board Unstable transmission lamp
B-26
Fault Diagnostics Diagnostic test numbers continued TEST No 97 FAILED TEST OR COMPONENT Unstable reflection lamps REMEDIAL ACTION Check reflection lamp. Run lamp diagnostics. (Section 5.7). Run system diagnostics (Section 5.5). Check error message (Section B.2.5). Replace reflection detector bd(s) (Section 4.15.3) or lamp driver bd (Section 4.17). Reserved for factory use. Reserved for factory use. Reserved for factory use. Perform elimination (Section 6.5.7). Reserved for factory use. Perform alignment (Section 6.4.2). Check interlocks (Section 8.2), if OK, then replace system bd (Section 4.9.2). Replace sensor (Section 4.18.5 (R) or Section 4.18.6 (L)). Reserved for factory use. Check movement of main carriage Check movement of main carriage Check movement of main carriage Replace digitizer bd (Section 4.20.8). Perform calibration (Section 6.5.9). Check lamp ends for blackening. Check mirror for cleanliness (Section 8.3.1). Check X-slide calibration (Section 6.5.4). Perform transmission alignment procedure (Section 6.4.2). Replace camera head sub-assembly (Section 4.20.4). Check lamp ends for blackening. Check mirror for cleanliness (Section 8.3.1). Check X-slide calibration (Section 6.5.4). Replace camera head sub-assembly (Section 4.20.4). Clean CCD window (Section 8.3.6). Replace camera head sub-assembly (Section 4.20.4). Perform alignment (Section 6.4.3).
98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112
Bad pixels identified Misalignment fault Servo motor fault Limit stop sensors Electro-mech fault Electro-mech fault Electro-mech fault Electro-mech fault Digitizer board Copy holder registration Non-uniform transmission illumination
113
Non-uniform reflection illumination
114 115 116 117 125
Dirty CCD window Camera head fault Misalignment check
B-27
Fault Diagnostics
B-28
Index
A
Accessories Kit, 1-20 A3 Cover Glass, 1-21 Coded Copyholders, 1-20 Long Registration Bar, 1-20 Alignments and Calibrations, 6-1 Introduction, 1-18 Overview, 6-1 Cdot SP Calibration, 6-2 Camera Alignment, 6-1 Carriage Alignment, 6-1 System Calibration, 6-2 Annual Maintenance, 8-1, 8-2 Cleaning Procedures, 8-3 CCD-Window Cleaning Procedure, 8-10 Lens Cleaning Procedure, 8-9 Mirror Cleaning Procedure, 8-9 Optical Components, 8-3 Platen Cleaning Procedures, 8-7 Preparations and Completions, 8-6 Scanner Health Check, 8-11 Antistatic Precautions, 2-7 Application Error Messages, B-12 Main Carriage Cable - 50-Way, 4-64 Main Carriage Cable - 62-Way, 4-66 Main Carriage Datum Sensor, 4-72 Main Carriage Forward Limit Sensor, 4-75 Main Carriage Reverse Limit Sensor, 4-74 RH Distribution Board, 4-83 RH Ribbon Cable, 4-84 Standby Switch, 4-76 Standby Switch Cable, 4-77
C
Cdot, Calibrations, 6-29 Cdot Calibration For Sharpness At 36 Lines/mm, 6-29 Cdot Calibration For Sharpness At 45 Lines/mm, 6-34 Calibration Data, Saving To Disk, 6-41 Calibration File Saving, 7-14 Writing, 7-12 Cam Follower, 4-124 Carriage Alignment, 6-6 Carriage Menu Introduction, 6-6 Carriage Tests Menu Path, 6-6 Diff_Focus Alignment, 6-10 Adjustment Procedure for Onewheel Carriage, 6-14 Adjustment Procedure for Twowheel Carriage, 6-11 Light_bar Alignment, 6-6 Alignment Procedure, 6-9 Lightbar Alignment Target, 6-7 Procedure, 6-8
B
Base & Structure Modules, 4-64 Display Board, 4-79 Display Board Ribbon Cable, 4-79 Enclosure Fan, 4-85 Flexicable Distribution Boards Assembly, 4-68 LH Distribution Board, 4-80 LH Ribbon Cable, 4-81
Index-1
Index
CCD setup data, 6-18 Clamp Enlargement Leadscrew, 4-122 X-Slide Leadscrew, 4-132 Colour Errors, B-5 Copymount Search Enable/Disable, 6-28 Cropping Errors, B-6
Connector, A-22
SK1 to Digitizer Board, A-22
Digitizer Board, A-24 Connectors, A-25

PL1 to Enlargement Datum Sensor, A-25 PL2 to Enlargement Motor, A-26 PL3 to Focus Motor, A-26 PL4 to Digitizer Fan, A-27
D
Diagnostic Test Numbers, B-24 Digitizer Board Tests, 5-29 Dig_brd Tests, 5-30 Basic Tests Menu Path, 5-30 Function Tests Menu Path, 5-31 Digitizing System, 5-29 Introduction, 5-29 Distortion of Image, B-3 Dongle, System Board, Replacement, 4-21 Downloading Firmware to Scanner, 7-39
Test Points, A-27 Flexicable Distribution Boards, A-41 Connectors, A-42 Lamp Driver Board, A-28 Connectors, A-29
PL1 to Reflection Lamps, A-29 PL2 to Transmission Lamp, A-30 PL3 to Light Table Lamps, A-31 SK1 to Lamp Detector Boards, A-32
Lamp Detector Boards, A-34

Connections, A-34
LEDs, A-33 Links, A-34 Test Points, A-33 LH Distribution Board, A-38 Connectors, A-38
PL1 to Enclosure Fan, A-39 PL2 to Display Board, A-39 PL3 to Main Cover - LH Interlock, A-40 PL4 to Main Carriage Forward Limit Sensor, A-40
E
Electrical Module Locations, A-2 CCD Headboard, A-2 Detector Boards, A-2 Digitizer Board, A-2 Display Board, A-2 Lamp Driver Board, A-2 LH Distribution Board, A-2 Main Switch, A-2 RFI Box, A-2 PSU, A-2 System Board, A-2 RH Distribution Board, A-2 Standby Switch, A-2 Electrical Reference Data, A-1 CCD Headboard, A-21
Module Locations, A-1 Flexicable Looms, A-3 Power Supply Unit, A-7 RH Distribution Board, A-35 Connectors, A-35
PL3 to Main Carriage Datum Sensor, A-36 PL4 to Main Carriage Reverse Limit Sensor, A-36 PL5 to Main Cover - RH Interlock, A-37 PL6 to Lid Interlocks, A-37
System Board, A-9 Connectors, A-11

PL1 to LH Distribution Board, A-12 SK1 to RH Distribution Board, A-13 SK2 to Main Carriage Servo Motor, A-14 SK3 to Lamp Driver Board, A-15
Index-2
Index SK4 to Digitizer Board, A-17
Fuses, A-19 LEDs, A-19 Links, A-20 Relays, A-20 Switches, A-19 Electrical Safety, 2-6 Electronic Modules CCD Headboard, 1-5 Detector Boards, 1-5 Digitizer Board, 1-5 Display Board, 1-5 Lamp Driver Board, 1-5 LH Distribution Board, 1-5 Main Switch, 1-5 PSU, 1-5 RFI Box, 1-5 RH Distribution Board, 1-5 Standby Switch, 1-5 System Board, 1-5 Electronic Repro, 1-19 Purpose, 1-19 Electronics, 3-32 CCD Headboard, 3-35 CCD Clock Drivers, 3-36 Output Buffers, 3-37 Digitizer Board, 3-37 Analogue-to-Digital Converter (ADC), 3-40 CCD Signal, 3-38 Correlated Double Sampling (CDS), 3-39 Digital Control, 3-41 Input Mux & Level Shifter - RGB, 3-38 Operating Modes, 3-37 RGB Multiplexer (Mux), 3-39 Temperature Sensor, 3-41 Voltage Sensor, 3-41 Display Board, 3-69 Distribution Boards, 3-69, 3-70, 3-71 Interlocks, 3-67 Introduction, 3-32 Lamp Driver Board, 3-54
+5V and +14V Regulators, 3-60 Ballast Circuit, 3-63 Boost Converter, 3-60 Five Lamp Interlock Circuit, 3-61 Heater Drivers, 3-62 Input RFI Filter, 3-59 Lamp Driver Block Diagram, 3-55 Lamp Driver Blocks, 3-56 Low Voltage Monitor, 3-60 Serial ADC, 3-61 Serial DAC, 3-61 Soft Inrush Current Circuit, 3-59 Temperature Monitor, 3-60 Voltage Controlled Oscillators (VCOs), 3-62 Power Supply, 3-33 +18V, 3-34 +24V, 3-34 +5V, 3-33 -12V, 3-34 Sensors, 3-64 Enlargement Datum Sensor, 3-64 Focus Datum Sensor, 3-64 Main Carriage Datum Sensor, 3-66 Main Carriage Limit Sensors, 3-67 XSlide Datum Sensor, 3-65 System Board, 3-43 Clock Generation & Synchronization, 3-49 Image Processor, 3-47 Motion Control, 3-50 SCSI Controller, 3-49 Servo Motor, 3-52 Stepper Motors, 3-50 System Controller, 3-44 Enclosure Fan Filter, 4-16 Enlargement Motor, Moving Using Monitor Commands, 5-16
Index-3
Index
F
Fans Digitizer, 4-111 Enclosure Fan, 4-85 RFI Box, 4-26 Fault Diagnosis, 1-17, B-1 Diagnostic Tests, 1-17 Introduction, 1-17 Flares, B-5 Focus Motor, Moving Using Monitor Commands, 5-16 Functional Description, 3-1 Functional Descriptions, System Overview, 3-1
Patterning, B-6 Streaks, B-2 Subtle Colour Errors, B-5 Tonal Problems (Flares), B-5 Distortion - Compression, B-4 Distortion - Skew, B-4 Streaks In Shadows, B-3 Light, B-3 Tonal Problems (Flares), B-5 Image Defects Table, B-21 Interlock Strategy, 2-8 Interlocks Details, 3-67 Lid, 4-47 Lightbar, 4-10 Main Cover, 4-45
G
General Precautions, 2-5 Safety Devices, 2-5 Unattended Equipment, 2-5 Graininess, B-7 Lack of Smoothness, B-7
L
Lack of Sharpness, B-2 Lamp Driver Board Tests, 5-32 Introduction, 5-32 Lamp_brd Tests Menu Path, 5-33 Lamp Driver Module, 4-61 Lamp Driver Precautions, 2-8 Leadscrews Enlargement, 4-120 Main Carriage, 4-89 X-Slide, 4-128 Light Table Assembly, 4-57 LT-Lamp Holders, 4-60 LT-Lamps, 4-58 Lightbar Assembly, 4-5 Diffuser, 4-6 Lightbar, 4-5 Transmission Lamp, 4-6 Transmission Lamp Detector Board, 4-8
H
Health and Safety at Work, 2-1 Warnings and Cautions, 2-1
I
Image Defects Descriptions, B-1 Cropping Errors, B-6 Distortion, B-3 Graininess (Noise), B-7 Introduction, B-1 Lack of Sharpness, B-2
Index-4
Index
Lightbar Interlock, 4-10 Loss of Power Faults, B-10
N
Noise, Analogue, B-7
M
Main Cover, 4-34 Assembly, 4-38 Close Procedure, 4-35 Gas-Struts, 4-37 Open Procedure, 4-34 Reflection Whitebalance Strip, 4-35 Main Leadscrew Assembly, 4-87 C-Bearing Assembly, 4-94 Leadscrew, 4-89 Leadscrew Nut Clamp Plate, 4-87 Main Carriage Wheel Bearings, 4-98 Servo Motor, 4-91 Servo Motor Coupling, 4-93 Main Leadscrew Coupling, 4-93 Maintenance, 8-1 Mechanical Safety, 2-7 Mechanical Tests, 5-37 Introduction, 5-37 Mech Menu Path, 5-38 Service Menu Path, 5-39 Mirror, 4-54 Motion Control, 3-72 Enlargement Drive Mechanism, 3-76 Focus Drive Mechanism, 3-78 Main Carriage Drive Mechanism, 3-72 Main Carriage Sensors, 3-72 Stepper Motor Control, 3-73 XSlide Carriage Mechanism, 3-75 Moving the Main Carriage, 4-41 Mechanical Method, 4-43 Terminal Diagnostics Method, 4-42 Workstation Method, 4-41
O
Optical System, 3-19 CCD Image Sensor, 3-29 CCD Clocks, 3-31 CCD Description, 3-29 Illumination, 3-21 Light Table Illumination, 3-25 Reflection Illumination, 3-24 Transmission Illumination, 3-23 White Balance Areas, 3-22 Introduction, 3-19 Lens, 3-28 Optical Baffles, 3-29 Mirror, 3-28 Platen, 3-25 Aqua Strip, 3-26 Copy Holder Registration Edges, 3-27 Reflection Format, 3-27 Transmission Format, 3-27 Optics Tests, 5-36 Introduction, 5-36 Optics Menu Path, 5-36
P
Patterning, B-6 Platen, 4-49 POST Failures, B-11 Power-up Sequence, Power On Tests, 5-3 Preparation for Replacement Procedures, 4-2 Protective Covers and Gas Struts, 4-30
Index-5
Index
Lid Assembly, 4-31 Lid Gas-Struts, 4-30
R
Recommended List of Tools, 4-1 Reflection Lamps Assembly, 4-51 Mirror, 4-54 Reflection Lamp Detector Boards, 4-54 Reflection Lamp Holders, 4-53 Reflection Lamps, 4-51 Reflection Tray, 4-12 Registration Bar Calibration, 6-23 Replacement Procedures, 4-3 RFI Box Modules, 4-17 Cooling Fan, 4-26 Cover, 4-17 Main Power Switch, 4-27 PSU and Cable Loom, 4-22 System Board, 4-18
Sensors Enlargement Datum, 4-119 Focus Datum, 4-117 Main Carriage Datum, 4-72 Main Carriage Fwd Limit, 4-75 Main Carriage Rev Limit, 4-74 XSlide Datum, 4-127 Servo Motor, 4-91 Coupling, 4-93 Encoder Labels, 2-7 Moving Using Monitor Commands, 5-13 Setup Introduction, 6-5 Introduction, Setup Menu Path, 6-5 Site Safety, Safety Signs, Labels, and Indicators, 2-2 Stand Covers, 4-15 Standard Monitor Commands, 5-11 Display Utilities, 5-17 Monitor Mode Operation, 5-11 Servo Motor Commands, 5-13 Stepper Motor Commands, 5-15 Stepper Motors Enlargement Motor, 4-123 Focus Motor, 4-116 Moving Using Monitor Commands, 5-16 XSlide Motor, 4-130 Streaks, B-2 Streaks - Deep, B-3 Streaks - Light, B-3 Structure, 3-79 Base, 3-80 Enclosure Fan Filter Housing, 3-82 Introduction, 3-79 Lid, 3-83 Main Cover, 3-83 Pedestal, 3-80 Platen Support, 3-82 Stand, 3-79 Swathe Platen Calibration, 6-34
S
Safety Interlocks, 4-45 Lid Interlocks, 4-47 Main Cover Interlocks, 4-45 Safety Practices, 2-1 Health and Safety at Work, 2-1 Site Safety, 2-2 Scanner, Downloading Firmware, 7-39 Scanner Diagnostics, 1-16 Introduction, 1-16 Scanner Modules, 1-6 Electrical Modules, 1-10 Electronic Components, 1-12 Interlocks and Sensors, 1-14 Mechanical Modules, 1-6 Optical Components, 1-8
Index-6
Index
Symptom Indications, B-9 System Board Tests, 5-21 CPU Tests, 5-21 CPU_Test, CPU_Test Menu Path, 5-22 Introduction, 5-21 Mcb_brd Tests, 5-28 Mcb_brd Tests Menu Path, 5-28 Sys_brd Tests, 5-23 DSP_Tests, 5-24 DSP_Tests Menu Path, 5-25 SCSI_Tests, 5-23 SCSI_Tests Menu Path, 5-24 Sync_Tests, 5-26 Sync_Tests Menu Path, 5-26 System Calibration, 6-17 All, 6-22 Procedure, 6-23 Bad (CCD) Pixel Elimination, 6-22 Procedure, 6-22 Calibrate Menu Introduction, 6-17 Calibrate Tests Menu Path, 6-18 Copymount Search Enable/Disable, 6-28 Enlargement & Focus Calibration, 6-21 Procedure, 6-21 Main Carriage Datums, 6-19 Procedure, 6-19 Registration Bar Calibration, 6-23 Start of Scan Offsets, 6-21 Procedure, 6-21 System Calibration Target, 6-19 XSlide Carriage Datums, 6-20 Procedure, 6-20 System Description, 1-1 Overview of Features, 1-1 C-550 Scanner, 1-2 Modules, 1-3 Workstation, 1-2 System Operation, 3-10 Basic Principles, 3-10 Autofocus, 3-12 Automatic Calibration System, 3-14 Control System, 3-15
Fixed Platen - Moving Camera, 3-11 Fluorescent Illumination, 3-12 Graphics and Line-art Scanning, 3-13 Image Re-alignment, 3-13 Line Scan CCD Camera, 3-10 Reading Copymount Data from Platen, 3-14 Three-Stripe CCD Colour Separation, 3-13 Variable Magnification, 3-12 Xslide Carriage Movement, 3-12 Introduction, 3-10 Sequence of Scanning Operations, 3-15 Autofocus, 3-17 Black Balance, 3-17 Enlargement Setting, 3-16 Exposure Control, 3-17 Focus Setting, 3-16 Lamp Control, 3-18 Scan, 3-17 Stabilize Lamps, 3-16 White Balance, 3-17 XSlide Setting, 3-16 System Overview, 3-1 Electronics, 3-4 Illumination System, 3-7 Image Data Path, 3-6 Power Supply & Distribution, 3-4 System Control, 3-5 Introduction, 3-1 Motion Control, 3-6 Optical System, 3-4 Structure, 3-8 System Operation, 3-3
T
Terminal Diagnostic Tests, 5-19 Terminal Diagnostics, 5-1 Overview, 5-1 Power-up Sequence, 5-3 Terminal Diagnostics User Interface, 5-5
Index-7
Index
Diagnostics Display, 5-5 Global Commands, 5-7 Command Line Editing, 5-9 Soak Test Operation, 5-9 Verbose Command, 5-10 The Terminal Diagnostics Display, VT100 Emulation Operation, 5-5 VT100 Emulation Operation, Entering Commands, 5-6 Test Films, 6-3 Transmission Column, 4-12 Troubleshooting Guide, B-9 Introduction, B-9
Configuration Commands, 7-7 File Commands, 7-4 Tests Commands, 7-21

Diagnostic Tests Command, 7-21 Electronic Repro Command, 7-23 Soak Tests Command, 7-24
View Commands, 7-6 Window Commands, 7-6 Purpose, 1-19 SCSI Buffers, 7-17
X
XSlide Carriage Assembly, 4-101 Bearings Assembly, 4-108 Cam Follower, 4-124 Digitizer Board, 4-112 Digitizer Cover Plate, 4-110 Digitizer Fan, 4-111 Enlargement Clamp, 4-122 Enlargement Datum Sensor, 4-119 Enlargement Leadscrew, 4-120 Enlargement Motor, 4-123 Focus Datum Sensor, 4-117 Focus Motor, 4-116 Focus Motor Rack, 4-114 Moving CCD Mount, 4-103 Moving Lens Mount, 4-102 Moving XSlide Carriage, 4-102 XSlide Carriage, 4-104 XSlide Leadscrew Assembly, 4-127 XSlide Clamp, 4-132 XSlide Datum Sensor, 4-127 XSlide Leadscrew, 4-128 XSlide Motor, 4-130 Xslide Motor, Moving Using Monitor Commands, 5-16
U
Unit Replacement Procedures, 4-1 User Diagnostics Launching the Application, 7-2 Running the Diagnostics Tests, 7-28 Tool Bar Buttons, 7-27 Utilities, 5-34 Introduction, 5-34 Utilities Menu Path, 5-34
W
Workstation Diagnostics, 1-19, 7-1 Electronic Repro Test, 7-31 Placement on Platen, 7-33 Procedure, 7-36 Electronic Repro Test Subjects, 7-31 Introduction, 7-1 Menus, 7-4 Buffers Commands, 7-11 Calibrate Command, 7-25
Index-8

C-550 Lanovia Scanner Engineer's Reference Guide

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Descrizione originale:

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

C-550 Lanovia Scanner Engineer's Reference Guide

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

Engineers Reference Guide 6700800003

Tel: 01442 213440 Fax: 01442 343432 Registered Number: 3244452

Engineers Reference Guide 6700800003